JP2019103884A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decline of interest in the game.SOLUTION: When a result of a first special symbol lottery becomes a failure, and when a specific variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern of a first special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery, by a variation start of the first special symbol as a trigger, a time shortening control is finished and a control is performed to shift to a rush mode. In this way, a novel game never existed before can be realized in which at the start of a variable display that is to stop and display a failure symbol, suddenly the time shortening control is finished. Also, by the finish of the time shortening control, it is possible to perform a control to shift to the rush mode to obtain prize balls, thereby a decline of interest in the game can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 187

Description

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine provided with a display for fluctuating display of symbols, for example, a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball having won the start winning opening, and the symbols are variably displayed on the display based on the lottery result. Play a game to stop and display the symbol after a predetermined period of time. In this type of gaming machine, when the symbol stopped and displayed on the display becomes a specific display mode, a big hit game to open and close the big winning opening is executed, and based on the game ball entering the big winning opening It is possible for a player to obtain a large number of winning balls by paying out a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-54334, A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, if a big hit game is not performed, a monotonous game of fluctuating display of the symbols on the display is repeated, so that the fresh taste is lost and there is a possibility that the game interest may be lowered. .

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement by solving the above-mentioned problems.

In order to solve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means for displaying predetermined symbol information;
Lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of the start condition after the start condition is established;
A fluctuation period determination unit that determines a fluctuation period of the symbol information variably displayed on the display unit when the win lottery is performed by the lottery unit;
Display control means for causing the symbol information to be stopped and displayed in a mode according to the lottery result of the lottery means after variably displaying the symbol information over the fluctuation period determined by the fluctuation period determination means;
Shortening control means for executing shortening control for shortening the fluctuation period more than usual on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined shortening condition;
First shortening termination means capable of terminating the shortening control being executed by the shortening control means based on satisfaction of a first termination condition determined in advance;
And second shortening termination means capable of terminating the shortening control being executed by the shortening control means based on the satisfaction of a second termination condition different from the first termination condition;
The second shortening end means ends the shortening control being executed by the shortening control means triggered by the start of the variable display which causes the failed mode to be stopped and displayed as a mode according to the lottery result of the lottery means. It is characterized by getting.
According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the control for terminating the shortening control based on the satisfaction of the first termination condition, and the lottery result of the lottery means as the second termination condition different from the first termination condition In order to execute the control to end the shortening control based on the start of the variable display that causes the false selection mode to be stopped and displayed, the shortening control ends suddenly at the start of the variable display that causes the false selection mode to be stopped and displayed. It becomes possible to realize an unprecedented novel game of being played, and it is possible to suppress the decline in amusement of the game.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game fun.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view at the time of seeing the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the game panel of embodiment different from the example, such as FIG. 104, and was seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board after the display of FIG. 107; FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front component of embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 grade | etc., And was seen from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board when FIG. 110 is viewed later. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special prize winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a periphery side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interruption board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal sound signal blocking board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening prize winning process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during the 1st change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving function setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during 2nd fluctuation | variation of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of gate passage processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol normal processing of this embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of this embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart explaining simultaneous fluctuation control of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the ideal game mode transition in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence about an example of the submain process of this embodiment performed by periphery control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular processing performed every 16 ms by submain processing. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural view of an attacker device, (B) is a front view showing a functional display unit in an enlarged manner, and (C) is a front view showing a seven-segment display in an enlarged manner. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of the 2nd embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an outline of a control pattern of a simultaneous change control structure of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hitting game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right hitting penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right-handed penalty alerting | reporting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 1st change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of forced removal effect addition processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, and (B) is a special symbol variation when additional release notification effect is set in the forced removal effect addition processing 27 is a timing chart of effect display in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the restart production | presentation change process in the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of production after resumption in resumption production change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the modification of the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the modification of the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining reset setting in a reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of the 3rd embodiment, and the 2nd separate symbol. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the ideal game mode transition in a 3rd embodiment. It is an example of the fluctuation pattern table selected in rush preparation mode. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the presentation content performed when the start timing of rush mode is changed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing in a 4th embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of the 4th embodiment, and the 2nd separate symbol. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of 4th Embodiment. It is an example of the fluctuation pattern table selected in rush mode of a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 6th Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of 6th Embodiment by every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of 6th Embodiment by main structure, and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front component and front unit in the game board of 6th Embodiment in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit in the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit bottom and side unit top in the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) looked at the side unit bottom and side unit of 6th Embodiment from back It is a perspective view. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path on the right side in the center product of 6th Embodiment in a cross section. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacking unit part in the center combination goods of 6th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit of 6th Embodiment by every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit of 6th Embodiment by every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. in the game board of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box etc. of 6th Embodiment from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable presentation unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment from the back It is. (A) is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the sixth embodiment of the back-rear movable effect unit disassembled into main components, and (b) is a back-rear movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into each main structure and was looked after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit of the back bottom back movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front with a back bottom back 1st decoration body and a back bottom back 2nd decoration body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the back with a back bottom 1st decoration body and a back bottom 2nd decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back down rear movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment from a front. (A) is a front view of the back-rear movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a back view of the first decorative body and the back-rear first from the normal state of the sixth embodiment It is a front view in the state where the second decorative surface of the second decorative body is turned to the front by rotating the two decorative bodies together, and (c) is the back of the first decorative body in the state of (b) And it is a front view of the state which moved the 2nd decoration to back movement bottom to a front view left side. In the state of FIG. 224 (c), the first back surface of the first decoration is turned to the front by rotating the first back of the back and the second back of the second back together. (E) is a front view of the state, (e) is the back of the back of the state of (d), the first decoration is rotated to open the first decoration and the back of the second decoration, and the back is back It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decoration side of the 1st decoration and the 2nd decoration side of the back decoration and the 2nd decoration turned to the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable presentation unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper left movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper left movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment in a normal state, and (b) is the back upper left first decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment, and It is a front view shown in a state where it is moved to the position of front view right second end, and (c) is from the state of (b) back upper left first decoration and back upper left second It is a front view shown in the state which expanded the decoration. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable presentation unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment from the back . (A) is a front view which shows the back left movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment in a normal state, (b) is the state which made the back left movable decoration body in the back left movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment project. It is a front view shown by. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper inside movable presentation unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back inside inside movable presentation unit of the 6th embodiment from the back It is. (A) is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the sixth embodiment of the back-upper-middle movable effect unit for each main configuration, (b) is a back-upper-middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into each main structure and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top inside decoration unit of the back top inside movable movable production unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the back top inside decoration unit of 6th Embodiment from the back It is the seen perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top inside decoration unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top inside decoration unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of the back top middle decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in (a). (A) is a front view of the back top inside decoration unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) a pair of back top inside decoration of the back top inside decoration unit of the sixth embodiment FIG. 18C is a front view showing the cover in a half-opened state, where (c) is a state in which the pair of back-tops of the back-up decor unit of the sixth embodiment is completely opened out of the first decor. It is a front view showing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper inside drive unit of the back up inside movable movable effect unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper inside drive unit of the back upward moving movable effect unit from the back is there. (A) is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the back upper and middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment for each main configuration, and (b) is a main view of the back upper and middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled according to each structure and was seen from back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the back upper middle rotation unit of the back upper middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a back rear middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper middle rotation unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up middle movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment roughly from a front. (A) is a front view of a back up middle movable production unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a back up middle decoration unit lowered in the back up middle movable production unit of the sixth embodiment It is a front view shown in the closed state. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable presentation unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled except back-bottom front decoration unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled except back-bottom front decoration unit of the back-bottom front movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism in the back down front movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of the decoration unit raising / lowering mechanism when raising the back bottom front decoration unit of 6th Embodiment, (b) is a part of a unit raising / lowering pin in (a) And (c) is an enlarged view of (b) to show the relationship between the unit raising and lowering pins and the raising and lowering slits. (A) It is a front view which shows the back bottom front movable presentation unit of 6th Embodiment in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back bottom front decoration unit from the state of (a) (C) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back 1st front decoration of the back 2 front decoration unit from the state of (b). A state in which the second decorative surface is directed to the front by rotating together the first decorative body and the second decorative body in the normal position in the back-to-back and movable presentation unit of the back unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board shown by. The back side of the back unit of the sixth embodiment The back side of the movable effect unit The back side of the back of the first decorative body and the back side of the second decorative body are closed, and the back side of the back side of the first decorative surface of the first decorative body is directed to the front Slide it to the approximate center of the game area in the left-right direction and move the back top left first decoration of the back movable top effect unit and the back top left second decoration to the approximate center of the game area in the left / right direction. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which carried out slide movement. From the state shown in FIG. 253, the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit, and the second decoration of the first decoration and the second decoration of the back is displayed on the back. And turn the back top left second decoration of the back top left movable effect unit by hinge to open the fixed top decoration of the top back left first decoration and the second top decoration of the back top left second decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state directed to the front. From the state shown in FIG. 253, the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit, and the second decoration of the first decoration and the second decoration of the back is displayed on the back. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being directed to. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment is slid to the appearance position of the front view right end. In the back unit of the sixth embodiment, the back top middle movable decoration unit is moved to the position of the falling end and the back top middle decoration unit is obliquely extended in the front left direction, and the front view is reversed. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being rotated clockwise. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decoration bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 257 and slide-moved to the half open position. FIG. 250 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to the fully open position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back lower front decoration unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment is positioned at the rising end. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back first front decoration is hingedly rotated from the state of FIG. 260 to be raised above the second back front decoration. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main processing performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment, (b) is about the interrupt processing regularly performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production | presentation prior determination process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a prior determination table used for the effect prior determination process, and (B) is a table about the type details of the prior determination information determined by the prior determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a big hit determination table used for lottery processing for the big hit of the sixth embodiment, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for the reach of the sixth embodiment, (C Is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the type of jackpot according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the notice determination processing performed by periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production control processing performed by periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the fluctuation production start process performed by periphery control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the change production end processing performed by periphery control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the contents of a production of the specific notice production of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the monochrome advance notice execution processing performed by periphery control MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is an area | region occupancy pattern determination table used in order to determine the area | region occupancy pattern in execution of the monochrome advance production of 7th Embodiment. It is an example showing an area which makes a notice production appear among display areas of a main liquid crystal display device in execution of a monochrome notice production of a 7th embodiment. It is an example of presentation when the monochrome advance announcement production of a 7th embodiment is performed. It is an example of presentation when the monochrome advance announcement production of a 7th embodiment is performed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. A hand or the like is inserted, and it is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as moving away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook 20c Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for supporting the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in main frame support holes (not shown) formed in the main frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 67) of the main frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be widened. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

[Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wire holding member 197 for holding a part of the wire 196 (see FIG. 28) connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wire 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the bowl unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. As will be described later in detail, the main relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extended backward, as will be described later. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, the mounting boss 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and the mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are suitably positioned. Each is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the mounting boss 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding band is attached to the holding holes 197a paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring 196 can be held by inserting the 198 and tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3 As a result, it is pushed forward and pivots in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thus, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end of the wire holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wire 196 extending from the free end of the wire holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the folded wire 196 on the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wire 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. As it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and is held so that a part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction, On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wire 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wire holding member 197, and the wire 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, the upper and lower sides of the door frame 5 may be opened and closed even if a force is applied through the wire 196. It is possible to make it difficult to move in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be reliably folded in the lateral direction to prevent occurrence of a defect.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. Respective decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball lending units 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. The door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high security against fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 112). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. (See 112), and can prevent the insertion of the tool, and can prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as it is disassembled and seen afterward.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably made to the player side It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in front view, and the upper end back side of the horn portion The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, respectively. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front and rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and having a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted And (see FIG. 35 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has a high degree of light transmission under the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282 b facing the inside of the central frame 281 a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282 a An extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c is provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, within the frame of the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the dish unit in the door frame, cut at a portion of the ball lending unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right lower surface and having a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface. And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view An upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328, the lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the right side and the right side from the left, right center position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 And Shitasara side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 And a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge it forward.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g by the gaming balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more games A ball can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312, and a decorative attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest. And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to be lower toward the front side and higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  Further, the lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. The lower plate lower left side cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to one side of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. It has a plate-like part that forms a part. The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left side cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the lower speaker 821 (speech speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the player receives the sound from the lower speaker 821 It can be made to be transparent to the side. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted therein. .

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left side cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left side cover The bottom surface between them and 334 is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing passage 344c on which the game ball can roll.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. As a result, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding channel 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and the lower bowl ball supply port 310g from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. Can be discharged into the

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 etc. While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 in the tray unit 300 is disposed between the lower tray side cover 330 and the lower tray lower left side cover 334 on the lower side of the lower tray main body 324 to form the bottom central portion of the tray unit 300. A ball-opening base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower-disc ball-extracting base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower-disc ball-extracting hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324; It has a lower countersink slide 353 supported so as to move and slide on the upper surface of the lower counterball recess 351 in the front-rear direction, and a lower countersink 354 attached to the front end of the lower countersink 353. ing.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a which can close the lower ball ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter ball hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact the lower disc ball slide 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower ball chop slide 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move backward by the lower opening ball slide 353, or the lower opening slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351 A holding mechanism 355 is further provided to hold the lower countersink slide 353 at a predetermined position in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc flash slide 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc flash slide 353 toward the rear The open / close shutter 352 turns against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is rotated backward, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slide 353 is moved rearward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower countersink 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball ball slide 353 is locked (held), the lower ball ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball hole 352b is a lower ball ball. The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The rental ball unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b formed in the upper end decoration portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 that protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 is disposed on the transparent rental unit front cover 365 covering the front side of the rental remaining display portion 363, and behind the rental ball unit front cover 365, and the rental remaining display portion 363 is attached. Ball unit base 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached (see FIG. 45) And a rear cover 367 mounted on the rear side of the mounting portion 310b. The crime prevention cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

  The rental ball unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the rental ball unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. Transparent including a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a ball unit front cover 365 and a projection 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward, respectively, and closing the display opening 310n A remaining-loan display portion 363 disposed on the rear side through the rental ball unit front cover 365 can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the frusto-conical lower surface. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b, and the operation portion holding member 416 An inner-shaped opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a to the lower recess 420b and can accommodate at least the driven gear 410; Is equipped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Is equipped. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so that it passes through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from coming off upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted with a positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c, The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation part 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed through the step part 407a and the projecting part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (dish unit 300) Since it is possible to receive the weight, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation unit 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, so that problems with the dial drive motor 414 due to overheating can be prevented, and the dial drive motor 414 Be able to withstand high loads and Ri, it is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial drive motor 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, the player can be given an operation feeling with respect to the pressing operation unit 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the drawing, on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower tray side cover 330 in the tray unit 300. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing strength is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the gaming balls fired toward the game area 1100 reach the right area to the right of the center character 2500 and this right area Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing strength becomes smaller than a predetermined value, the gaming balls fired toward the gaming area 1100 flow down the left side area to the left of the center character 2500. In this manner, it is possible to hit the gaming ball into the right area and the left area by the operation of the player. The ball speed of the gaming ball flowing down the right side area on the right side of the center character 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of the gaming ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center character 2500. And the game ball which flows down the right side area with relatively fast ball speed becomes possible to be able to win the 2nd starting opening 2102 which it mentions later, the game ball which flows down the left side area with relatively slow ball speed it mentions later Winning of the first starting opening 2101 is possible.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. It is possible to That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle unit 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) The rotational drive can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The steering apparatus 500 according to the present embodiment electrically detects the rotation operation of the steering wheel main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512 and, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of the trouble in the joint unit, to control the decrease in the player's interest due to the hitting trouble of the game ball It has to be able to bet.

  In the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 (firing solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 gaming balls are sequentially fired at predetermined intervals in one minute. It is driven to reach the hitting speed (pace). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the handle device 500 is performed (maintained), the game balls are successively hit in the game area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[Fall cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door cover in an exploded manner, and FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view taken after the camera (B) disassembled the cover unit. Moreover, FIG. 53 is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball inlet 542a disposed in the upper right corner and penetrating in the front-rear direction in rear view, and the first ball inlet 542a. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of the cover base 542 to the right in front view, and a second ball inlet disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a 542c and a second ball passage 542d which is in communication with the second ball inlet 542c and which is extended downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view inside the cover base 542; The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the false cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. The swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of a game ball.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, If the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540 and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also full, gaming balls roll to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 Second ball inlet 542c, second ball passage 542d, and second ball outlet 544 of the far cover unit 540 from the full ball outlet 776 of It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118). The user is notified that the player is urged to discharge the gaming balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[Antistatic measure for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the fal cover unit 540 (the transparent polycarbonate molded article) (see FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53) includes the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. A storage space 546 for retaining the game ball is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, so that the game ball and the resin rub against each other to generate static electricity and charge the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal ground rail 554 is provided for removing static electricity of the gaming ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the gaming ball and discharging it to the lower plate. There is. In addition, the fowl cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-like ground fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground fitting 556 at the left end can conduct electricity to the ground rail 554 at the bottom of the fal cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). This earth metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

  Although the second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in this part of polycarbonate, and may reach 10 several kV. Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, even if the charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only the very periphery is removed, and most of it remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge.

  In the gaming machine, an earth wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

  The embodiment described below is made in view of such a situation, and the charge accumulated in the fall cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction even if the ground is not taken. The invention relates to an invention relating to an anti-static mechanism for shielding the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and preventing the static electricity released to the shield metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a door frame provided with an anti-static mechanism, as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of an essential part of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (thin plate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to the charge accumulated in the far cover unit 540. Shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed into an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the charge jumping to the shield plate 562 from jumping to the surrounding conductors And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-like conductive portion 563 which is conductively contacted by contacting the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 at the upper part in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 568 bent in the left-right direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 located below and behind the conductive portion 563 with the border as a boundary, and disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 And.

  In the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an attachment portion 565 extended in a substantially semicircular shape is formed, and an insertion hole 566 is bored in the attachment portion 565, and the attachment hole 567 is formed at the upper left corner of the conductive portion 563. Is drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and serves to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from the surrounding electrical conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the insulating sheet 570 is attached by adhesion to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562.

  In FIGS. 55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the anti-static mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, shield plate 562 is arranged such that the outer peripheral edge of shield portion 564 is surrounded by insulating sheet 570 on the back surface of insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562 so as to be sandwiched. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 is brought into conductive contact by coming in contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5, thereby releasing static electricity.

  Note that mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for attachment to the fall cover unit 540 are provided at appropriate places on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (the door frame base body 110). In addition, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the earth metal fitting 556 to the metal lower reinforcement sheet metal 154 so as to release static electricity to appropriate places of the lower reinforcement sheet metal 154. , 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss 110g into the insertion hole 566, and a screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame It is screwed to the base body 110.

  The front cover 544 is disposed on the rear surface of the shield plate 562 so that the front cover 544 is in surface contact, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion thereof, and the screw is screwed into the mounting bosses 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back of the door frame base main body 110. In addition, a screw is inserted through the mounting portion of the ground metal 556, and a screw is further inserted through the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is electrostatically charged by screwing the screw. It is screwed to the door frame base main body 110 so as to escape.

  The shield plate 562 and the fal cover unit 540 are fastened together by screws to the mounting boss 110g. In addition, in the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a ground wire (not shown) is fastened together with a ground fitting 556 with a screw.

[Function of Antistatic Mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the false cover unit 540 escapes to the metallic lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the conductive part 563 in surface contact with the shielding part 564 of the shielding plate 562 in surface contact and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-like shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction by the charge accumulated in the fal cover unit 540.

  In addition, since the shield plate 562 is disposed so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the charge jumped to the shield plate 562 from the corners or end face of the shield portion 564 Things and harnesses can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. FIG. 58 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 60A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 61 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. (D) is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a turns in the direction of the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 60) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight 583 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 60B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in a back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose entire outer diameter in a rear view is horizontally long, and is opposite to the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. Of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c which are divided up and down with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of V formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to be away from each other And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played on the game area of the gaming board 4. When driven into the interior 1100, the illegal gaming ball I fired by the striking device 650 moves along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It tries to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is a passage of the game ball It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance inside. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right side of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 61D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal gaming ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, the portion between the outer rail 1111 and the firing rail 660 does not enter the gaming area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud preventing member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 1100. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball is hit The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is operated to be pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. , In a front view right side of the lower plate 302, for driving the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper side of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 viewed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side is a sharp and artificial metallic appearance ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Also, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[Luminous decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.63 and FIG.64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 64 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 214a and 216a that emit light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball release button 341 can be lighted and decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 63 and FIG. 64) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b in the upper decorative unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing, operation direction, and the like of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are played Can be notified to

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Also, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as mentioned above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player is given a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability changing gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability changing time short playing status , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109 c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that urges the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

Body frame base
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side which protrudes to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 which protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and which forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is lowered from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game ball to roll. The main unit frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800, and the game ball obtained by rolling the ball extraction passage 741d in the award ball device 740 will be described later in detail. Is supposed to roll.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b extending, a door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642b and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the open side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Ball launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 102 etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the lateral direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotary body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing the ball rolling passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The winning ball device 740 paying out based on the instruction and the gaming ball paid out by the winning ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of gaming balls It mainly comprises a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the award ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown also in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an oblong box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape with a long plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) in a rectangular shape in a plan view from the bottom wall 721; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and on the front both ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Award the tank 720 to the ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 to be described later, and the game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) which opens downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 78) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734 a of the ball holding plate 734 so that the projection 735 a of the ball stopper 735 passes through the slit 734 b and is inside the tank rail 731. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 b of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  Also, the prize ball device 740 is a ball out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a, and of the gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. The count sensor 751 for measuring the number, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 A relay board 754 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the sensor substrate 753 and the payout motor 744, the ball breakage switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control substrate 4110; Is equipped.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 interposed, and a supply channel that can contact the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741 a of the unit base 741 An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be removable from the unit base 741 And an attach / detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741 a by the ball breakage switch 750. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the out-of-ball switch 750 (the out-of-ball state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hall It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated. It can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the payout switch 860b is operated, or the like. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side, and together with the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branching unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 It is possible to discharge to the rear side outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. The full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. A prize ball receptacle 771 for receiving game balls having flowed down a prize ball passage 715 of a prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball receptacle 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83) The game ball is rolled forward from the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view and a full channel 775 for guiding the game ball forward from a position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 (FIG. three A), a full Tan passage 775 to release the rolling was game balls forward and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the gaming ball received in the extraction opening 777 to the front side and the gaming ball rolled on the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receptacle 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and then the bowl unit 300 It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning bowl device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal passage 773 but also many game balls in the full tank passage 775 Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are large enough to roll the game balls in a plurality of rows, and the amount of game ball parked in the full tank branch unit 770 (storage amount) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is avoided that the total storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 decreases. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 and the opening and closing operation piece 542 g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 Longitudinally slit-shaped plural-pieces penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate unit base 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Further, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 favorably to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with the lower speaker 821 mounted facing the front. At the same time as sealing the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, the speaker box 820 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. The open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, though the detailed illustration is omitted, so that the phase of the sound on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 is reversed. It radiates forward and is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting more deep bass to the aperture of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is detached from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. It can be done (see Figure 67).

  Further, the launch power supply substrate box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately emitted from the power supply substrate 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is easy The interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving and firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed, and reaches the life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 receives the gaming balls discharged upward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the gaming board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, and Ejecting passage 842 and the front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward and the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600 is rolled to pass through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the back of the substrate unit base 810 The game ball which has flowed down to the side and the game ball which is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and which is received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 will be described later in detail. It can be discharged downward.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 is exposed on the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851 The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply substrate box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the upright wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c that project rearward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  The power supply substrate box 850 and the power supply substrate box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. The rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. And a delivery control substrate 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removing switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 4, a, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. It can be done.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 92, in the assembled state, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridge 871e and the outer piece and the portion 871c of the base 871, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to tamper with insertion of needle-like electrodes through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opening portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, so the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 ( A needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and it is possible to have a high crime prevention capability It can be done.

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 3 so that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 3 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are covered by a relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connection to the door frame 5 side come to the front side through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the locking piece 923a on the lower side of the body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 92 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. A holding member 925 mounted so as to sandwich the, and a. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. are coming to the rear side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. These through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and, with the game board 4 housed and held in the main body frame 3, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252, and the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. It can be evacuated. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assured correctly in the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are closely attached. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 resiliently engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction and a front end of the side piece 952a as viewed from the front Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 in the game board 4 between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See Figure 112). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and the like disposed in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. In addition, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side (shaft support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend backward than the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a becomes long. Since the bending rigidity to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the side crime prevention plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating being performed .

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily made While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and high in durability and strength.

[Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main frame, which are provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for glass door and the sliding door for main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view are attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper part of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open side 1001a, 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part and lower part of both side faces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with sliding levers 1040 for door frame and By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places in the upper, middle and lower of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the The fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 101B, it swings (clockwise in FIG. 101B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 that protrudes forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, it protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72, etc.) formed in the main body frame base 600. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 at the top The lower end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide projection 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a door frame sliding It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of the crucible 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Insert the piece 1043 into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 and align and overlap the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 with each other. For the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame, while making the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005 .

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the opening 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for main frame are engaged The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 100A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to retract from the tamper-proof cutout portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 101 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be installed.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding wedge 1040 and a main frame sliding wedge 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the peripheral wall portion 605. It is good also as a structure stored, and the same operation effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above can be produced.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 On the back wall of the prize ball base 710, the prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710 b and a gaming ball discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 on the basis of a predetermined payout instruction. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 with a tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane as the rear face of the game board, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be inspected (visually inspected) easily without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4 It can be a pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[Basic composition of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 etc., and seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using a front component member of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a gaming board showing FIG. FIG.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this gaming board 4 is not illustrated in FIGS. 102 to 109 and will be described in detail later, a front unit attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150 are further included. (See FIG. 113, FIG. 116, etc.).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The inner periphery of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 102 etc., the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow to the lower end of the game area 1100. Are guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower side of the back of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and fastening each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed And a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and the out port 1151 (see FIG. 105) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and within the range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a table unit 2000 is attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 with respect to the front component 1110 is It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the side at the left end portion of the rear surface in the rear wall in a rear view. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[Master control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control substrate 4100 having electronic components, terminals, and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the substrate cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  Further, the main control board box 1170 is provided with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. The various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010 and the payout control board 4110 and the like are to be exposed to the rear side. Note that by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed except by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance It can be done.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 106A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED for playing, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the gaming status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 for the first, and the lottery result of the first special symbol which is disposed on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and is drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol arranged and received by receiving the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The second special symbol for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 comprising a special symbol display 1186 and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of the second special symbol display 1186 And a memory display 1187.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the common gate 2301 by the game ball Normal symbol memory indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the symbol, and an ordinary lottery result which is arranged under the ordinary symbol memory indicator and the lottery balls are drawn by passing the game ball through the common gate 2301 The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying as and the normal special symbol storage indicator 1188 are arranged side by side obliquely to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (condition device is Round display consisting of two LEDs to display the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 at the time of operation). It is provided with a 1190, a.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By the combination, various game states (for example, probability change state, time reduction state, probability change time short game state, big hit game state, etc.) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, at least the probability fluctuation state, the time shortening state, and the right hitting gaming state can be displayed. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game state which is advantageous for the player by firing the game ball in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500 (so-called "left-hand") and the game on the right side of the center character 2500. Since the game state which is advantageous for the player is mixed if the game ball is fired in the area 1100 (so-called “right-handed”), the timing for “right-handed” is clearly displayed on the player. As a result, even the game beginner can smoothly switch the striking method (the striking operation) along with the transition of the gaming state without making a mistake in striking "left strike" and "right strike".

  In addition, the gaming state indicator 1183 is not limited to one configured by one color LED, and may be configured by a plurality of LED groups or 7 segment LEDs. Any configuration may be employed as long as the player moves his / her eyes to the game state indicator 1183 during the game, so that it can easily grasp the current game state, in particular, whether it is a game state in which the user can strike the right.

  The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, but transmits this control signal to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later to allow the player to use the liquid crystal display 1900. It is preferable to report "right-handed". Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in the front view (the end of the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when “right-handed” is notified in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the line of sight is at the left end It is possible for the player to switch to an appropriate strike method (drive operation) without transferring it.

  In addition, when the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b Turns on together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, both the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and after the 7 segment LED fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops after the change and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7 segment LED The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by the game ball passing through the regular drawing gate 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the common view gate 2301 when the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189, the start of the variable display is It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of a normal symbol held (stored). This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and lighting of these indicator lamps can indicate the number of rounds in the "big hit" game. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board (not shown). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared to the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. In order for the store clerks in the hall to be able to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without confusion You have me.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

[Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as those described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. It is formed. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center character 2500 etc. The attaching devices 2100 and 2150 etc. The unit which it has is designed to be inserted and fixed.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example) is about 2.5 mm, which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010 c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227 And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010 c can be prevented from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4, can be used as the main unit frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010 c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the housing recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  Also, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and open at the lower end A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting The panel plate 1210 can be set in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

Second Embodiment of Front Component Member
Next, a front component 1110A different from the front component 1110 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the game panel 1200, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 except for the difference.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that it has a function display unit 1180 in addition to a part of the inner circumferential shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit Prepared for 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-like inner circumferential shape extending clockwise in a front view from the out-out guide surface 1115 up to the stop 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stopper 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 ing. More specifically, the section from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right sticker sheet sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc, and from the lower end of the arc to the outlet. It is formed in the shape of a straight line inclined so that the distance up to the guiding surface 1115 is lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of this example can secure the game area 1100 more widely as compared with the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. It can be done.

[Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front and rear direction. A plate-like side piece 952a which forms a side of the main body frame 3 and a front end which extends inward in a substantially perpendicular direction (open side) from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the side security plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is axially supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively assumed. Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact so as to cover the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, it is a pachinko machine 1 having a rigid side, from the side It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the middle piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change. When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those are left outside As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. Further, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 117 is disassembled into main members constituting the game board (however, the center character 2500 is not shown) and obliquely viewed from behind. It is the seen perspective view.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A, which partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200 are provided.

  The game panel 1200 of this example is a plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is divided by the front component 1110A, and a transparent panel plate 1210 formed smaller than the front component 1110A. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000 A function display unit 1180 disposed at a position that can be viewed from the player through the transparent panel board 1210 and can be viewed from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) mounted on the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the back side Substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a wind turbine is provided at a predetermined position along the way. A center character 2500 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center character 2500.

  Further, behind the center character 2500, there is provided an effect display device 1900 for displaying effects with a large area in front view so as to attract attention from the player. As the effect display device 1900, a suitable display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decoration symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

  Further, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided which has a smaller display area than the liquid crystal display device 1900 to realize an auxiliary display effect. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information and the like obtained by combining the decoration symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like.

  On the other hand, from the right side to the lower side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, from the upstream, the regular drawing gate 2301, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100, and the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101; A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, in the left side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided. In the lower area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, a constant winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101 is provided.

  Here, the first starting opening 2101 is a regular winning opening 2101 a where the game ball can always be won at a position substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the liquid crystal display device 1900. The game ball is configured to have a special winning opening 2101 b which can be won only when the movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 is operated on the right side. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101 a, special opening winning opening 2101 b), entering the same game ball by the first starting opening sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an after-mentioned attacker will be based on a random number for the first special symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range. The first special symbol lottery (the first special determination) is performed for the hit serving as the operation trigger of the device 2100, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Ru. When the player wins a hit, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of the later-described attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) configured to include a solenoid etc. is performed, and the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed accordingly. Will be operated. In this way, after the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed, transition control can be made to the time saving game state described later where improvement of the easiness of winning of the gaming ball to the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is achieved. .

  In addition, although it mentions later, in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, it is supposed that it has a control structure which can make the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol change simultaneously, and is made to start the change of the 2nd special symbol. It is arranged that the symbol variation according to the result of the first special symbol lottery can not be in the variation start waiting state.

  The common drawing gate 2301 is provided above the special prize winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow passage of a game ball driven into the right area of the center character 2500. Then, when there is an acceptance (pass) of the gaming ball to the common drawing gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) described later that the acceptance is made.

  At this time, if the predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normally based on the random number for the regular symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within the predetermined numerical range, if the predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied. A determination process (normal determination) is performed on a normal hit which is an operation trigger of the motorized part) 2111, and the normal symbol dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the player wins a normal hit, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of a common prize product drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118) described later that is configured to include a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is permitted through an opening operation in which the movable piece 2111 pivots the upper end rightward (clockwise) around the lower end. .

  That is, the special prize winning opening 2101b is inserted only when there is an opening operation by the movable piece 2111 (rotation operation of the upper end centering on the lower end of the movable piece 2111) in response to the normal hit. The ball is provided so that winning is possible. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 can not enter the gaming ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (a refusal ball aspect) and a mode enabling the same ball (permission It can be said that it is operable to switch between the ball mode and the ball mode, and is maintained in the refusal mode as long as the drive control of the common item driving mechanism 3114 is not performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), almost no winning of the game ball occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is hit in the right area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), so that the easiness of accepting the game ball is improved. The game characteristic centered on the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball to the winning opening 2101b is realized.

  In addition, the second starting opening 2102 is provided below the special winning opening 2101b, and is driven into the right area of the center role 2500, and special winnings of the special winning opening 2103 and the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker device 2100. The game ball which has not been accepted in the mouth 2101 b is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when the game ball is entered into the second start opening 2102, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by a second start opening sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker (to be described later) is based on a random number for a second special symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range. The second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit serving as the operation trigger of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Ru. Then, when the hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the drive control of the later-described attacker drive mechanism 2121 (refer to FIG. 118) configured to include a solenoid etc. is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 Will be opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special prize winning opening 2101b, and configured to be able to receive a game ball hit into the right side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 when open. It is done.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, an opening and closing member 2106 operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106. Normally, it is closed by the opening and closing member 2106 so that the game ball can not be received in the big winning opening 2103.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (first special At the time of opening the special winning opening 2103 as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2102) (the second special symbol side hit game), The number of balls that can be received by the gaming balls is adjusted by making the control modes for opening the doors different.

  That is, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a determination result of either the first special determination or the second special determination, the attacker device 2100 opens the big winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. Thus, a jackpot game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit advantageous to the player. Therefore, three gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (first starting opening sensor 3131) and the second starting opening 2102 (second starting opening sensor 3132), When the gaming ball has won in the large winning opening 2103 (count sensor 2122a) provided for execution of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, 15 game balls are paid out. It should be noted that ten gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133).

  By the way, in the short time game state (the rush preparation mode in this embodiment), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2111 is opened after the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops (specially designed winning opening 2101b The time for which the game ball is maintained at the right rotation side position where the game ball can be won is "5.5 seconds". That is, the game ball always wins normally when the game ball passes the regular drawing gate 2301, and then the time it takes for the passed game ball to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2111 is shorter (0 By stopping the variation of the normal symbol in .08 seconds), the game ball which is the trigger of the normal hit is made possible to win the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 as it is. According to such a configuration, in the time saving game state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being won in the second starting port 2102 which is provided further below the special winning hole 2101b and can accept the flowed-down game ball. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the short time game state where execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the game ball winning to the special winning opening 2101b is preferred.

  It should be noted that after the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (the position where the gaming ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", the movable piece 2111 is in the closed state (the gaming ball is in the special winning opening 2101b) Act to be an unacceptable position).

  Therefore, in the time-saving game state (lash preparation mode), the probability of winning a normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is further rotated to the right for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, hitting the right makes it easy to win the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time saving game state rush preparation mode), the center role object such that many gaming balls are won in the first starting port 2101 (specially-provided winning port 2101 b), not the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101 a). It is considered more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right strike") aiming at the right side of 2500.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-short game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in this embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is predetermined fluctuation time (for example 1 second) By setting it to), the reception of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is disabled.

  It should be noted that depending on whether or not the game is in the non-time-short game state, it is different whether it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the left or right of the center character 2500 depending on whether or not it is the probability variation game state. In the normal gaming state (normal mode) which is not a non-time-saving gaming state and not a probability changing gaming state, the left side of the center character 2500 is set so that many gaming balls will win the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. It is considered advantageous for the player to aim and shoot the game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Also, in the high probability non-time game state (rush mode) in which the non-time-short game state and the big hit winning probability is higher than the normal game state, there are many game balls in the second starting opening 2102 It is considered more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right strike") aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 to win a prize.

  In addition, as the time saving function, control to increase the winning probability of the above normal symbol than the non time saving game state, control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the above normal symbol than the non time saving game state, of the first starting opening 2101 Control to extend the period to maintain the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b at the right rotation side position than the non-time short game state, the number of times to move the movable piece 2111 to the right rotation side position than the non-time short game state Increasing control may be performed in any one or any combination (or all).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the back side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened and the opening which penetrates the back wall 3010a in the front and back direction where the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which a 3010 b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back up rendering unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010, and a back box A lower back rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010 b within the 3010, and a lower right back corner disposed between the lower back rendering unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the front right lower corner of the back box 3010 A presentation unit 3600 is mainly provided. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position where it can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that accommodates a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 will be described later in detail. A box 1910 is provided.

  The game board 4 of this embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can roll sufficiently between the outer periphery of the left side of the center character 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A) A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center product 2500 in the game area 1100.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500 (is hit with a strength higher than a predetermined strength), this game ball is upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center character 2500 from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width allowing game balls to flow down one ball at a time, and the game ball having flowed down the right passage 2545 is decelerated by the stopper 1114, and first, the path of the right passage 2545 The common map gate 2301 disposed above is reached. Thereafter, it is guided to the movable area of the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100. In this movable area, the gaming balls that are not received by the opening and closing member 2106 in the big winning opening 2103 are then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. The gaming ball flowing down the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and converted to the downward direction, and then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. Here, the gaming ball having passed through the upper spread gate 2301 is guided to the special prize winning opening 2101 b in which the movable piece 2111 can accept the gaming ball.

  In the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the gaming ball which has not been guided by the movable piece 2111 to be received by the special winning opening 2101b is decelerated again by the second induction portion 2902 and then guided to the second starting opening 2102 Be done. The game balls flowing down the right side passage 2545 are guided to the second starting opening 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless entering the large winning opening 2103 or the special winning opening 2101 b.

  As described above, in the time saving game state, the gaming ball which has been hit to the right and passed through the common drawing gate 2301 will be accepted by the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

  Then, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of performing such a game and the determination result of either the first special determination or the second special determination, the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 As a result, a jackpot game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 117 etc., this liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 through the fixing pieces 1902. ing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010 d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 protrudes from the right side in front view After the two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing parts 3010 e on the left side of the back box 3010 in the back view, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the locking mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward and closing the insertion port.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 accommodating the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118), and the lower portion of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By appropriately rotating the volume 1912 in the direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the lower speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3, etc. It has become.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light brightness white LED as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first start opening sensor 3131 that detects gaming balls received in the first start opening 2101 and a second start opening sensor that detects gaming balls received in the second start opening 2102 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3133 for detecting gaming balls received to the general winning opening 2201 are respectively input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, a gate sensor 2302, a count sensor 2122 (count A panel relay board 3040 on which the detection signal from the sensor 2122a, the count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 is attached to the game board 4, and the main control I / O port 4100b It is supposed to be input through.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby a common part product drive mechanism 2114 via the panel relay board 3040, Outputs drive signals to attacker drive mechanism 2121, winning opening distribution drive motor 2558, and specified area distribution drive motor 2559, or through main control I / O port 4100 b, panel relay board 3040, and function display board 1191. First special symbol indicator 1185, second special symbol indicator 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, gaming status indicator And a drive signal to the round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls performs payout control by the payout control unit 4111 which performs various control related to payout and the firing solenoid 654, and An emission control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and an award ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111 b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b, or a command for indicating the state of pachinko game 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the entrance of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the rental ball unit substrate 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 It is input to the CR unit 6 via the interface. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the ball unit substrate 366, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[Release control unit]
The launch control unit 4120 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is, as shown in FIG. 118, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and the firing A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 for detecting whether the handle main body 504 is touched by a palm or finger and a detection stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball by the intention of the player. Is input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the handle main body 504 first receives the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880 Are input to the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d is based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 to drive the driving current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with the launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504. Is output to the firing solenoid 654 when it is input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see) 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 118, performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041, or the game board A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in 4 In order to transmit to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal The light emission data is transmitted from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the liquid crystal display 1900 or the second liquid crystal display A control signal (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( The sound command is output to the sound source IC 4140 c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various rendering units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a through a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is done. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 It controls so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed such that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 or motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 are door frames via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received light on / off signal based on the received door frame side light on / off command. Output to the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or based on the received game board side light blink command, the lighting signal or blinking signal is It outputs to LED of each decoration board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3124, 3115, 3123, 324, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped. In addition, a panel relay substrate 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is a dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3324, 3304, 4360, 3476, 3508 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped, each solenoid, etc. FIG.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the motor drive board 3045, etc. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through 882 or the rear surface of the back box 3010 Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to the lower bass speaker 821 Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise generation]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various sound facilities, and equipment requiring power such as LEDs and sensors, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speakers 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker (FIG. 89) and connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 to amplify the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and output it to each speaker An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  Also, on the door frame base substrate 194, the wires that connect various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. with the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, etc. It is connected to the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 67, FIG. 89). In addition, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered by the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, at the location (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the winning ball unit 700 or into the game area 1100 despite being fired by the ball striking device 650. A far cover unit 540 (a molded article of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding the game balls (fall balls) not reached to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided close to each other (FIG. 23).

  In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, since game balls (metals) pass at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and may reach 10 several kV Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, the charges accumulated in the resin, even if grounded, are only removed from the very periphery, and most of them remain.

  Then, the digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge. In this case, an abnormal audio signal continuing for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal by the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. In such a case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattle may be generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker may be a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound may be generated), which may make the player uncomfortable. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually absent on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) which blocks an abnormal sound signal so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As for voice output, as described above, peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc., and receives various commands from main control board 4100. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d is output to the sound source IC 4140 c (FIG. 118).

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided at the lower portion of the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194 etc. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base substrate 194 provided in the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected by the wiring 196 and the periphery from the door frame base substrate 194 A +24 V voltage and a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 120, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, a ground signal, a +24 V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821 outputted from the door frame base board 194. The signal is relayed and output through the speaker protection harness 883 to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884.

  Further, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821 and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. It is done. As described above, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, as for the arrangement place of the abnormal sound signal interception board 884 in main part frame 3, it is desirable that it is a place which is hard to receive the influence of static electricity noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location distant from the far cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 in a portion that is less susceptible to the influence of electrostatic noise, input of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 can be stably suppressed.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 detects whether the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal, and is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is blocked so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal speech signal blocking substrate 884 detects an abnormal speech signal from the abnormal speech signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal, and an abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885 from the abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 is provided to cut off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when the output abnormality detection signal is received.

  The +24 V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the +24 V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. Also, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884.

  The woofer + signal which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

  Also, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. , And is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge form, a resistor SR1 (47 k.OMEGA.) Disposed in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, An infrared LED mainly composed of a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal out of two is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branched is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to constitute a rectification bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a + voltage line 890 for supplying the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the rear stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the rectifier bridge to the rear stage. The circuit is connected to a 0V line 891 which supplies 0V whose negative portion has been cut and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectification bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (+ voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain, and the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of + voltage to 0 V The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at a stage subsequent to the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, ripples of the waveform of the positive voltage are removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 after the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal, that is, + voltage is applied after rectification. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to a connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6 The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of a resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 appearing based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at the latter stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the transistor STR3, and the relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of photocoupler SPC1, and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1. It is done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  The base terminal of the relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the 3rd terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL 1 is connected to the ground line 887. Furthermore, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Are connected to an external lower speaker 821.

  Furthermore, varistor SZNR1 for induced current bypass by self-induction function is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of relay SRL1, and relay serial number 5 of relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Incidentally, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC 1, no electrical noise enters the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 directly. It is supposed to be.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with different peak amplitude) is input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of the woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct. In FIG. 120, current flows from top to bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in a period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the positive voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, from 0 V to the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the + voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  As described above, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also maintain the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not substantially turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 is maintained in the off state, and the transistor STR3 is also maintained in the off state. Also, the relay SRL1 is in the inactive state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excitation state, and the non-operation B contact (the contact is closed) between the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, and the non-operation between the third terminal and the fourth terminal. A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL 1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal continues for a fixed period of time]
[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode As SD3 conducts, charging current flows from the top to the bottom to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, a rise in voltage of the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in charge accumulated in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is applied. It will approach a constant voltage and reach the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4) The current flows through the resistor SR5, the zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0 V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing to the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside relay SRL1 between the No. terminal and the terminal is energized, and relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact between the fifth and sixth terminals of relay SRL1 in the operating state (the contact is open), and between the third and fourth terminals in the operating state. A contact (contact closed). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are switched to the disconnection state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted in the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  The third and fourth terminals of relay SRL1 are brought into conduction, the third terminal of relay SRL1 is pulled to ground, and the collector terminal of transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of relay SRL1 is grounded. The transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal and the ground line 887 The current flows to the conductive state, and the conductive state of the coil is maintained. Thus, the woofer + signal remains disconnected from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1.

  As described above, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above embodiment, when abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is maintained by blocking the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority given to preventing damage to the speakers. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal can be grasped by a person in charge or the sound output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL 1 is canceled by turning on the game machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the proper amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 become conductive, charging current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V to the peak voltage of the waveform of + voltage. Be done.

  Also, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in FIG. 120 through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, During the period up to the peak voltage, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely high compared to the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the mountain waveform is the same for the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 The charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the through, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises to reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when an abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, when photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, transistor STR3 is turned on and transistor STR3 is turned on, whereby relay SRL1 is activated and terminals 5 and 6 of relay SRL1 are cut off. In the state, the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted at the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of an abnormal sound due to an abnormal sound signal of an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making unpleasant sounds.

[Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs A screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for displaying and controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above The character ROM 4150 d stores various data, and the character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to The drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b is, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control substrate 4010, A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, in the case of displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each person is referred to as "sprite". Thus, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap are set, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device It is drawn to 3252.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and sequentially intersect with the one direction along the pixels as viewed from the front and from left to right. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction of When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning, And sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of a minute, the image is output as pixels in one line sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing on the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 149, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board of the present embodiment. When the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is it a set value at the time of a power failure) or not. For example, it executes processing (return processing at power failure) to return to the state at the time of power failure according to the backup data stored in RAM, clears the RAM if backup data is abnormal, and performs device setting around CPU (normal initialization , Setting of interrupt timing, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is turned on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to a transmittable state to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the gaming state when the power is shut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is stored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is performed.

  When the power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each game process. At the start of the loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S2). In the present embodiment, the power supply voltage used by the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply substrate. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply substrate. It is supplied to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply substrate falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate to the main control substrate 4100 is stopped. Will be sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power failure notification signal in step S2, the power off occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

  When the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply substrate after power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the processing at the time of power failure occurs from the state before the power failure. In order to start, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the process contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3).

[Process on power off]
FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of power-off occurrence processing of this embodiment. The power failure occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main process.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM before the power failure is held at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a specified value indicating that the processing upon power failure has been performed (step S4c). When the above process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply. It should be noted that in this process, in the case where the process at the time of a power failure has been started by the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, it may not be possible to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but the processing upon power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure occurs, processing is initiated by a momentary power failure, and even if an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment).

  After the main control MPU 4100a first executes register save processing (step S10), the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number updating process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command instructing payout of a game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In addition, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display 1185 or 1186 based on the progressing state of the game, or the special electric character (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121). Controls the opening / closing member 2106 for opening / closing the special winning opening 2103, and executes processing of changing the opening / closing state of the special winning opening 2103 or the like.

  In step S15, the normal control process including the lottery process according to the normal hit which triggers the operation of the movable piece 2111 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2111 becomes higher when a specific condition (the ON / OFF flag) is satisfied after the big hit gaming state ends. Is configured to execute (so-called short time game state). In this embodiment, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and this is set as a long time as the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates. Thus, the time-saving gaming state is realized when the reception of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is facilitated more than the normal state (low probability short-time gaming state).

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1, a drive signal is output to a special view start storage indicator (not shown) To perform the process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting a rendering command to the surrounding control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission processing, processing of transmitting the power on command set in the power on processing (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processes from step S11 to step S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In the present embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for the determination (whether it is a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery) to generate the jackpot gaming state is generated a jackpot gaming state in the jackpot judgment A random number for the big hit symbol used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be made, a determination whether to generate the small hit gaming state instead of the big hit (also called small hit determination, small hit lottery ) Random number for small hit judgment used for small hit, random number for big hit symbol used to decide stop symbol of special symbol when it is decided to generate small hit gaming state in small hit decision, big hit lottery and small hit Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high expectation rendering such as reach rendering when it is determined that the player is not hit by lottery. Variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the separate symbol display 1185, 1186, big hit (small hit) gaming (special bonus) A random number for round determination used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds etc.) of the special winning opening 2103 in the game), the movable piece 2111 for opening and closing the special opening 2101b is opened (upper end is clockwise around the lower end) There are a normal hit determination random number and the like used for determining whether or not to control to a position where it is rotated (normally determined per lottery).

  In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is also used to determine the jackpot state type (such as whether or not to operate the time saving function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot was won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number updating process 1, the big hit (small hit) judging random number, the big hit (small hit) symbol random number, the round deciding random number, and the movable piece 2111 in the big hit (small hit) lottery are opened. Update the random number per standard symbol judgment related to whether or not to control to. That is, the random number used for the determination regarding the opening and closing control of the big hit (small hit) lottery and the movable piece 2111 is updated as a predetermined timing every 4 ms. By doing this, the probability in a predetermined period with each random number (the probability of determining that a big hit (small hit) gaming state is generated, the probability of determining that the movable piece 2111 is controlled to be open) is made constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, update of reach determination random numbers, fluctuation display pattern random numbers and the like not related to the big hit (small hit) lottery and the normal lottery is performed.

[Special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process of the present embodiment.

  In this special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processes, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, for example. The second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled after the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110) is performed, and the first special symbol processing process A first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progression of the game on the symbol side is controlled is sequentially performed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed, As a result, even if the symbol variation on one side is started, the symbol variation on the other side is not started to be started.

[First and second starting opening winning process]
Next, first and second starting opening winning processing (processing of step S110) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting hole winning processing of the present embodiment.

  In the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110), the processing related to the determination of whether or not the game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 is largely considered, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there has been a process of updating the holding status of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random number for big hit judgment, big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) A determination is made as to whether the value of the hold number counter is less than 1 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second pending number counter is less than 1 (the second pending number counter is 0), the second start pending storage process (step S203) and the pending history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbols) obtained by the game ball winning in the second start opening 2102 as a second start pending storage process (step S203). The random numbers and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S204).

  In the process of step S203, a prize notification command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays a hold display on the second start port 2102 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output in the process of step S201, or the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value in the process of step S202. If it is determined that the value is 1, then it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131 as the process of step S205. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (YES in step S205). The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit judgment random numbers, big hit random numbers for the first start reservation storage process (step S207), obtained by the game ball winning the first start opening 2101 Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S208).

  In the process of step S207, too, a prize notification command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, even when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like makes a hold display on the first starting port 2101 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that 4 has been reached, at this time, the first and second starting opening winning process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) to the second starting port 2102 is performed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) to the first starting port 2101 is performed. . However, instead of this, it may be possible to execute the winning process for the second starting port 2102 after performing the winning process for the first starting port 2101.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a may execute an advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a prize notification command. The precedent determination process is performed prior to a lottery using random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of a big hit lottery, a probability variation lottery, and a change display pattern described later), and a process of determining the lottery result in advance It is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the precedent determination processing, the lottery result (big hit (small hit)), the type of the big hit, and the variation display pattern when the lottery using the random number is performed by comparing the random number with the prior determination table. Etc.) (A determination made in advance of the lottery in this manner is also called a "prefetch determination"). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before a lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect may be Also referred to as

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the advance determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progression of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled (step S14a) and the second special symbol control process in which the progression of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled (step S14b) Each detailed procedure about and is explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, unlike the execution procedure of control, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-described first and second starting opening winning process (FIG. 125) and the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later are executed in the above-mentioned special control process (FIG. 124) It is a process to be executed later.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the interlocking flag on the first special symbol side is in the on state (step S100a). The interlocking flag of the first special symbol is a flag set to ON when the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can simultaneously proceed. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) will occur redundantly between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. In order to avoid, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, the interlock flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is to be controlled regardless of the processing flag is operated in the on state. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

  When the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S100a), main control MPU 4100a does not perform processing (step S130a to step S200a) according to the first processing flag, and (1) The interlock setting process is executed (step S250a). Details of the first interlocked setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is in the OFF state in the process of step S100a, the main control MPU 4100a is the original game of the first special symbol side (NO in step S100a). Assuming that the game situation is permitted to proceed, the state of the first processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a selectively selects a process according to the state of the first process flag (the progress of the game on the first special symbol side) among the plurality of processes (steps S130a to S200a) shown in the figure. Since the game is executed, the game on the first special symbol side will be properly progressed.

  More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a), and if the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), 1 Change start processing (step S130a) is executed. In the first variation start process (step S130a), after the setting for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special determination), etc., the first change is made. The 1 process flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 1 or not (step S140a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is executed. In this first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 (the first special symbol (identification in the first special symbol indicator 1185) After the fluctuation time from starting of the fluctuation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined, etc., the first processing flag is updated to "2".

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 2 or not (step S160a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first variation processing (step S170a) is executed. In this first variation processing, the variation time set in the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and the first special symbol display in the first special symbol display 1185 is based on time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. And after this, when it is determined that the first variation start process (step S130a) has won the big hit, the interlocking flag for interlocking the game of the second special symbol side to the game of the first special symbol side After turning on, the first processing flag is updated to "3" to start the big hit game. However, if the win is not won (loss), the first processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the first variation start process (step S130a) will be performed again.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 3 or not (step S180a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), the first big hit game start processing (step S190a) is executed to create an interval period before starting the big hit game. In addition, when the interval period before starting the big hit game has passed, the first processing flag is updated to “4” in the first big hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes a first big hit game start process (step S200a). In the first big hit game start process, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the first big hit gaming process (step S200a), assuming that the first processing flag is 4. In this first big hit game processing, the big hit game mode (round number, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the open / close operation on the open / close member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. . In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the first variation start process (step S130a) will be performed again.

  As described above, in the process of step S100a, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is in the OFF state, the step When any of S130a, S150a, S170a, S190a, and S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first process flag, the first special control process in the interrupt process is executed. It is finished.

  Hereinafter, the first change start process (step S130a), the first change pattern setting process (step S150a), the first change process (step S170a), the first big hit game start process (step S190a), the first big hit game process (step S190a) The detailed procedures of the process of step S200a) and the first interlocked setting process (step S250a) will be described separately.

[First change start process]
First, the first variation start process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of first variation start processing according to this embodiment. The first variation start process is executed when the first processing flag is "0" in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the above first special suspension number counter as the process of step S301a. I do. Then, if it is determined that there is no lottery process of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter (YES in step S301a), within the interrupt process The first variation start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-mentioned interruption processing is performed, it is judged in the processing of the above-mentioned step S301 a whether or not there is lottery processing of the first special symbol in the holding state, and the holding state The progress of the game on the first special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state until it is determined that there is the lottery process of the first special symbol in.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S301a that the main control MPU 4100a determines that there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301a), the next step of step S302a is performed. As a process, it is determined whether the number of times of ST is zero. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) which sets the jackpot probability as the high probability (certainly changed state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later. . In this embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after all the big hit games are over. Details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302a), the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the number of STs and updates it as the process of step S303a. On the other hand, if the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process of step S303a is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304a.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs, as the processing of step S304a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example, the first win The random number group stored in the first storage area among the determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number) is read from the same RAM 4100 e. Next, as the process of step S305a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a The first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

  More specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special suspension number counter as the processing of steps S306a and S307a, and performs lottery processing for the hit based on the read first hit determination random number (the first 1 Make a special symbol lottery). In the lottery process for the above, a lottery is performed based on the first hit determination random number to determine whether or not to make a big hit and whether to make a small hit, and when a lottery result to make it a big hit is obtained A process of determining the jackpot symbol, ie, the type of jackpot, is executed based on the first symbol random number.

  Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the jackpot probability state of the big hit is the normal state (low probability non-short state), the big hit with 1/399 probability In the case where the jackpot probability state of the jackpot is a probability change state (high probability state), the jackpot is set to be won with a probability of 1/45.

  Then, when the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as processing of step S308a next. Do. At this time, a stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery is also determined. After that, when the first processing flag is updated to “1” so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) as the process of step S309a, this process is ended.

  It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first variation start process is used as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a described above, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. It will be transmitted to the part 4140.

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, a first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) and the like will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of a first variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has won the big hit. If the flag indicating that is set (YES in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402a), and in the flag state indicating that it is a loss that does not win the big hit If there is any (NO in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S403a).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and the determined variation pattern The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of the start of setting is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the first variation timer (step S406a). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time determined in this way. After that, when the first processing flag is updated to “2” so that the process proceeds to the first variable processing (step S170a) as the processing of step S407a, this processing ends.

  The fluctuation pattern set in the first fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. Be done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

  Among the variation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402a and S403a, the variation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high probability short game state (lash preparation mode) is a liquid crystal display. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time) for exciting display effects in the device 1900 are stored. In these fluctuation patterns, effects (including reach effects) are set which make the degree of expectation to be “winning” different, and in the process of step S 405 a, any fluctuation pattern is selectively determined. It becomes. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used in the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. The details of setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Process during first change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first variable processing (step S170a) executed when the first processing flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the first during-variation process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the first fluctuation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150a) has become 0 as the process of step S501a, that is, the above setting A determination is made as to whether the time of change has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the first fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first fluctuation processing (step S170a) Every time it is performed, the first fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S 521 a.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the first fluctuation timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501a, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). The main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) already determined as the processing of step S502a and step S503a on the above first special symbol display 1185 By performing the display control for ending the variable display by performing the first determination stop command to instruct the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decoration symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first determined stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  In this way, after performing processing concerning symbol stop, when various processing according to the result of the 1st special symbol lottery are performed, this processing will be ended.

  If the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S 504 a), main control MPU 4100 a avoids the occurrence of overlapping hits on the second special symbol side, the second special symbol side The interlock flag of the above-mentioned second special symbol indicating that the game of the should be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol side is turned on (step S505a). In addition, a probability variation flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a high probability status (probability status) is turned off (step S506a). After that, when the first processing flag is updated to "3" to start the big hit game (step S507a), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the interval until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is turned off (the first big hit game processing (see FIG. 131 described later)). In step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side regardless of the second processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504a), main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the probability change flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is in the ON state or not It judges (step S511 a). The probability change flag is set to the on state when the probability of winning the big hit is shifted from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probable state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in the first jackpot game processing (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the on state (YES in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the number of times of ST is 0 or not (step S512a). If the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S513a).

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511a), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514a. If the number of times of ST is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S512a), the probability change state continues, so the probability change flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S514a. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S514a (step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to ON when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S 725 a) of the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is to be stopped (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the probability changing function triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued when the probability change flag is in the on state.

  That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513a described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516a). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped fluctuating so as to indicate that it is a loss, and the first processing flag is This is updated to “0” (step S 517 a), and this processing ends. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the first special symbol is performed.

[First jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first jackpot game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the first jackpot game start process of the present embodiment.

  At step S601a, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (first big hit start interval timer) that counts an interval before the start of the big hit game has been set. As a result, when the first big hit start interval timer is not set yet (NO in step S601a), the processing of step S602a does not activate the condition device (does not open or close the attacker device 2100, but the attacker If the conditions for enabling the opening and closing operation of the device 2100 are satisfied) and the time saving function is activated as the processing in step S603a and step S604a (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. Let That is, after the preparation, the first big hit start interval timer is set and the first big hit interval start command is set as the processing of steps S 605 a and S 606 a to start the big hit game's pre-start interval. , End this process once.

  The first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects in the interval before the start of the big hit game come to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601a every time the interrupt processing is performed ( YES in step S601a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611 a, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed It will be determined whether or not it has been made. Then, in the process of step S611a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611 a Each time the first big hit game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621a.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S611a, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed. When (YES in step S611a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the first processing flag to "4" to execute the big hit game (step S612a), and ends this processing.

  In addition, about the 1st big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[First jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the first big hit game processing (step S200a) executed when the first processing flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the first jackpot gaming process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first big hit game execution flag is in the on state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already in progress, as the process of step S701a. The first big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the process of step S703a described later at the start of the first big hit game, and turned off by the process of step S723a described later It is set.

  Then, when the first big hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S 701 a), the main control MPU 4 100 a performs the process of step S 702 a to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. As, the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum winning number of each round) according to the type of the big hit is set. In addition, the detail about the opening aspect according to the kind of big hit is later mentioned in FIG. 146 (C).

  In this way, after the execution mode of the big hit game is set, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S703a and step S704a, indicates that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in the state of proceeding. When the flag is turned on and the first jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S701a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been digested as the process of the next step S711a. Then, in the process of step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is determined that it is a halfway stage of control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711a The main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set open pattern as the process of step S712a every time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed. Thus, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712a. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an open pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit is realized.

  And, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, it is determined that all the control for the execution of the big hit game has been completed. (YES at step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating the end interval of the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (first big hit end interval timer) for clocking the end interval of the big hit game has already been set (step S721 a). As a result, when the first big hit end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721a), the first big hit end interval is processed as the processing of steps S741a and S742a to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the first big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects during the big hit game end interval appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S 721a each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S721a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first big hit end interval timer is 0 or not, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed, as the processing of the next step S722 a. It will be determined whether or not it has been made. Then, in the process of step S722a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game is not elapsed (NO in step S722 a Each time the first big hit gaming process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts one from the first big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has become 0 in the processing of the step S 722 a, that is, it is determined that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S723a to step S728a) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the first big hit game execution flag in the OFF state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already progressing, as the process of step S723a. Then, next, as the process of step S724a, the number of special symbol lottery in which the probability change flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (positive variation state) is turned on to make the high probability state ( Set ST times to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag operated in the on state is operated to be in the off state when the number of times of ST is digested (step S513a) or when it is a big hit before the digestion (step S506a).

  In the present embodiment, although the probability changing function is activated for all the big hits, when the probability changing function is not activated or not according to the type of the big hit, the time saving function setting process described later (step S725a) As described above, first, processing may be performed to determine whether or not the jackpot to activate the probability change function. Then, when it is a big hit to operate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the on state similarly to the process of the above-described step S724a, and sets the ST number. Further, in the case of a big hit to operate the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to set the probability changing flag to the ON state and do not set the ST number.

  Next, in step S725a, the main control MPU 4100a executes time-saving function setting processing to set whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the game state. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  And, after processing concerning the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a, in view of the possibility that the big hit game will occur redundantly on the second special symbol side is no longer, the second special symbol side The above-mentioned interlocking flag which shows that it is in the state which should interlock a game of 1st with a game of a 1st special symbol is made into an OFF state (step S726a). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S 727 a), and the first processing flag is updated to “0” (step S 728 a), as the first special symbol that became the big hit this time is in the processing stage that has been detained. ), End this process. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the first special symbol is performed.

  According to such a big hit game processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum round number in the processing of step 711a, the corresponding big winning opening 2103 is an opening mode (according to the type of the big hit ( After step S712a), the player can be released repeatedly, and the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[Time saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S 725 a) of the above-described first big hit gaming process (FIG. 131) will be described based on FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving function setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time saving function according to the type of the big hit (step S751). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146C described later, the time saving function is provided only when the big hit (first big hit A) of the symbol A is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Then, if it is a big hit to operate the time saving function (YES in step S751), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752). The rush mode in this embodiment indicates a gaming state in which the probability changing function is activated and the time saving function is not activated (high probability non-time gaming state). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether the probability change flag is in the on state and the time saving flag is in the off state.

  When the current game mode is not the rush mode (high probability non-short game state) (NO in step S752), main control MPU 4100a operates the short time flag ON to activate the short time function (step S753). . Thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the present big hit is not a big hit for activating the time saving function (NO in step S751), the main control MPU 4100a ends the present processing without operating the time saving flag. In addition, even when the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-time game state) (YES in step S752), the time saving flag is not operated. This process ends. Here, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the above-mentioned first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130).

  Therefore, if the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the short function, It will not be activated. In the present embodiment, a game state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a game state (a rush preparation mode) in which the time short function is activated by not activating the time short function that is generally advantageous to the player is provided. It is characterized by

[First interlock setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a) of the above-mentioned first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the second special symbol side.

  Main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a).

  Then, when the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002a).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 (step S1003a). Further, a first decision stop command instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a) . The processes in steps S1003a and S1004a are the same as steps S502a and S503a which are performed when the variation time is up in the above-described first variation-in-progress process (FIG. 129).

  Subsequently, main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the above-mentioned first variation in processing (FIG. 129) by the processing of steps S1005a to S1011a. After execution, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of first special symbol (that is, the first special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021a), and the process ends.

  Thus, in the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived due to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the first interlocking flag is in the on state), the first special symbol in fluctuation is compulsorily forced Stop with a lost design. In addition, the first special symbol which is not changing is made to be in a standby state not to start changing until the first interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is avoided that a hit overlaps between the game of the 1st special symbol side, and the game of the 2nd special symbol side.

  In the present embodiment, the first interlocking flag is set to ON at the end of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the process of step S505b of the second in-divergence process (FIG. 137), and the first interlocking setting process is performed. Although the stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) is changed to the untouched pattern, the present invention is not limited thereto. The first interlocking flag may be set to ON at the timing when the variation starts according to the gaming state. For example, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), the first interlocking flag is turned on when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the hit determination process (step S307 b) of the second change start process (FIG. 135) Make settings. Then, when the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the variation in which the second jackpot is derived, no lottery is performed without using the first hit determination random number. You may make it determine an out pattern. As a result, since the shift symbol is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived, the processing at the end timing of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is simplified. can do.

  Further, as a modification of the first interlocked setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state may be created in which the fluctuation state is maintained even when the first special symbol is in fluctuation. In this way, when the big hit is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol side, it is forcibly controlled by the loss, and the player loses the winning opportunity of the first big hit that should be originally obtained. It disappears.

  Next, each detailed procedure of the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142.

  In addition, about a 2nd special symbol control processing, you may make it carry out by changing the various values referred within this program using the same program as the case where the above-mentioned 1st special symbol control processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the interlocking flag on the second special symbol side is in the on state (step S100b). The interlock flag of the second special symbol is a flag that is set to the on state when the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can proceed simultaneously. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) will occur redundantly between the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game, so avoid this. In order to obtain a big hit (small hit) in the game on one side, at that time, the interlock flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is to be controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. ing. Here, the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

  When the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S100 b), main control MPU 4100 a does not perform any process (step S130 b to step S240 b) according to the second processing flag. The second interlock setting process is executed (step S250 b). Details of the second interlocking setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the OFF state in the process of step S100b, the main control MPU 4100a originally intended the game of the second special symbol side (NO in step S100b). Assuming that the game situation is allowed to progress, the state of the second processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing that matches the state of the second processing flag (the progress status of the game on the second special symbol side) among the plurality of processing (steps S130b to S240b) shown in the figure. By selectively executing the game, the game on the second special symbol side will be properly advanced.

  More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b), and if the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), 2) Perform change start processing (step S130 b). In this second variation start process (step S130 b), after setting for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special determination), etc., The second processing flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In this second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186 (the second special symbol (identification in the second special symbol indicator 1186) The second processing flag is updated to "2" after the fluctuation time, etc., from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second processing flag is 2 or not (step S160b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second variation processing (step S170b) is executed. In this second variation process, the variation time set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 is Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined that the big hit is won in the second change start process (step S130b), the interlock flag for interlocking the game of the first special symbol side to the game of the second special symbol side After the on state, the second processing flag is updated to "3" to start the big hit game. Also, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, similarly the interlocking lag for interlocking the game of the first special symbol side to the game of the second special symbol side is turned on, and the small hit game is started. The second processing flag is updated to "5" in order to make it happen. However, if the small hit and the big hit have not been won (loss), the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the present fluctuation ends, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130 b) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second processing flag is 3 or not (step S180 b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In the second big hit game start processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second processing flag is 4 or not (step S200 b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second big hit game processing, the big hit game mode (round number, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the open / close operation on the open / close member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. As a result, the present fluctuation ends, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130 b) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second processing flag is 5 or not (step S220 b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), a second small hit game start process (step S230b) is executed to create an interval period before starting the small hit game. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the second processing flag is updated to “6” in the second small hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, when the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220 b), the main control MPU 4100 a executes the second small hitting game processing (step S240 b), assuming that the second processing flag is 6. In the second small hit game process, a small hit game in which the opening and closing member 2106 is operated to open and close in a control mode corresponding to the type of the small hit is performed. In addition, when the small hitting game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the present fluctuation ends, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130 b) is executed.

  As described above, in the process of step S100b, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the OFF state, the step When any of the processes of S130b, Step S150b, Step S170b, Step S190b, Step S210b, Step S230b, and Step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second processing flag, within the interrupt processing The second special control process is ended.

  Hereinafter, the second change start process (step S130b), the second change pattern setting process (step S150b), the second change process (step S170b), the second big hit game start process (step S190b), the second big hit game process (step S190b) The detailed procedures of step S210 b), second small hit game start process (step S230 b), second small hit game process (step S240 b), and the second interlock setting process (step S250 b) will be described separately. Each will be described.

[Second variation start process]
First, the second change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second change start process according to this embodiment. The second variation start process is executed when the second process flag is “0” in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter as the process of step S301 b. Then, if it is determined that there is no lottery process of the second special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the second special suspension number counter (YES in step S301 b), within the interrupt process The second variation start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-mentioned interruption processing is performed, it is judged in the processing of the above-mentioned step S301 b whether or not there is lottery processing of the second special symbol in the holding state, and the holding state The progress of the game on the second special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state until it is determined that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S301b that the main control MPU 4100a determines that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301b), next, in step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether the number of times of ST is zero. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) in which the jackpot probability is a high probability (probability change state) and is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later. . In this embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after all the big hit games are over. Details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the number of times of ST is not 0 (NO in step S302 b), the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the number of times of ST as a process of step S303b and updates. On the other hand, if the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S302 b), the process of step S303 b is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304 b.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs, as the processing of step S304 b, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a The random number group stored in the first storage area among the determination random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) is read from the same RAM 4100 e. Next, as the process of step S305 b, a random number group (random number for second winning judgment) related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) are shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

  More specifically, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become. In the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) of the second special symbol hold storage area is effective. That is, in the variable display control of the second special symbol of this embodiment, as long as the second special symbol corresponding to the start winning combination generated earlier is not finished changing, the random number extracted according to the starting winning combination generated later is stored. It will not be done.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special hold number counter as the processing of steps S306b and S307b, and performs lottery processing for the above hit based on the read second hit judgment random number 2) Make a special symbol lottery). It should be noted that in the lottery process for the above, if a lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit and a small hit is performed based on the second hit determination random number, a lottery result to be made a big hit is obtained A process of determining the jackpot symbol, ie, the type of jackpot, is executed based on the second symbol random number.

  Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is a definite variation In the case of the state (high probability state), the jackpot is set to be won with a probability of 1/45. Also, when the probability of winning is normal, the player wins a small hit with probability 390/399, and when the probability of winning is a positive state (high probability), it wins with a probability of 44/45. It is set.

  Then, when the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as processing of step S308b next. Do. At this time, a stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery is also determined. After that, when the second processing flag is updated to “1” so that the process proceeds to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150 b) as the process of step S309 b, this process is ended.

  It should be noted that the result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second change start process is used as the winning information command set in the process of step S308b, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. It will be transmitted to the part 4140.

[Second variation pattern setting process]
Next, the second variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a second variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second processing flag is “1” in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  If the flag indicating that the big hit has been won is set (YES in step S401b), main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table for the big hit according to the game state (step S402b), and wins the small hit If the flag indicating that it has been set is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table for small hitting according to the game state is selected (step S404b), and there is neither a big hit nor a small hit. If it is a flag state indicating that (NO in step S403b), a fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S405b).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and the determined variation pattern Of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is started (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the second variation timer (step S408b). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed in the second special symbol display 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time thus determined. After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "2" so that the process proceeds to the second in-divergence process (step S170b) as the process of step S409b, this process is ended.

  The fluctuation pattern set in the second fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. Be done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small hit lottery) based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. The display effect is performed as indicated by.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side are simultaneously advanced, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 Through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, the display effect (variation of the decoration symbol etc.) on the first special symbol side and the display effect (variation of the decoration symbol etc) on the second special symbol side simultaneously appear .

  In the fluctuation pattern table used in the process of steps S402b, S404b and S405b, the fluctuation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high probability short game state (lash preparation mode), A variation time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length ten times or more longer than any other variation time selectable on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used in the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Process during second change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the second variation processing (step S170b) executed when the second processing flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the second in-transition processing of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines, as the process of step S501b, whether or not the second fluctuation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150b) has become 0, ie, the above setting A determination is made as to whether the time of change has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the second fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) Every time it is performed, the second fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521 b.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, when it is determined that the second fluctuation timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501b, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). The main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) already determined on the second special symbol display 1186 as the processing of step S502 b and step S503 b. By performing a display control for ending the variable display by performing the second determination stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decoration symbol according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The second determined stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  In this way, after performing processing concerning symbol stop, when various processing according to the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery are performed, this processing will be ended.

  When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S 504 b), main control MPU 4100 a prevents the occurrence of overlapping hits on the first special symbol side, and thus the first special symbol side The interlock flag of the above-mentioned first special symbol indicating that the game of II should be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol side is turned on (step S505 b). Further, a probability variation flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the high probability status (probability status) is turned off (step S506 b). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b, YES in step S531b), first, overlapping hits on the first special symbol side In order to avoid occurrence, the interlock flag of the first special symbol is turned on to indicate that the game of the first special symbol should be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol (step S532b). ). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "5" to start the small hit game (step S533b), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the interval until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game processing (FIG. 139 described later)). In step S 726 b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the second special symbol side regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S 504 b and NO in step S 531 b), main control MPU 4100 a first turns on the probability change flag provided in RAM 4100 e of main control board 4100 It is determined whether or not (step S511 b). The probability change flag is set to the on state when the probability of winning the big hit is shifted from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probable state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in the second jackpot game processing (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the on state (YES in step S511 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the number of times of ST is 0 or not (step S512 b). If the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the positive variation state has ended, and the positive variation flag is set to the off state (step S513b).

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511 b), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514b. If the number of times of ST is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S512b), the probability change state continues, so the probability change flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S514b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S514 b (step S514 b). Specifically, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to ON when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S 725 b) of the second big hit gaming process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether to stop the time saving function (step S515 b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the probability changing function triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued when the probability change flag is in the on state.

  That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513b described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516b). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped fluctuating so as to indicate that it is a loss, and the second processing flag is This is updated to “0” (step S 517 b), and this processing ends. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next change concerning the 2nd special symbol will be performed.

[Second jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) executed when the second processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the second jackpot game start process of the present embodiment.

  At step S601b, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (second big hit start interval timer) that counts an interval before the start of the big hit game has already been set. As a result, when the second big hit start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S601b), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602b, and time saving is performed as the process of steps S603b and S604b. If the function is operating (YES in step S603 b), the operation is stopped. That is, when such preparation is completed, the second jackpot start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S605b and S606b, and the second jackpot interval start command is set, to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game. This process will end once.

  Note that the second jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects in the interval before the start of the big hit game come to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the second big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of the step S601 b every time the interrupt processing is performed ( YES in step S601b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second big hit start interval timer is 0 or not in the process of the next step S611 b, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed It will be determined whether or not it has been made. Then, in the process of step S611b, as long as it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game is not elapsed (NO in step S611 b Each time the second big hit game start process (step S190b) is performed, the second big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621b.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S611 b, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed. When (YES in step S611b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing when the second processing flag is updated to "4" to execute the big hit game (step S612b).

  In addition, about a 2nd big hit start interval timer, time length can be set according to the kind (type decided by 2nd symbol random number) of big hit symbols.

[Second jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the second big hit game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the second big hit game process of this embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second big hit game execution flag is in the on state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already progressing, as the process of step S701 b. The second big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the processing of step S703b described later at the start of the second big hit game, and turned off by the processing of step S723b described later at the end. It is set.

  Then, when the second big hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S 701 b), main control MPU 4100 a performs the process of step S 702 b to start control related to the execution of the big hit game using attacker device 2100. As, the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum winning number of each round) according to the type of the big hit is set. In addition, the detail about the opening aspect according to the kind of big hit is later mentioned in FIG. 146 (C).

  In this way, after the execution mode of the big hit game is set, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S703b and step S704b, indicates that the control related to the execution of the big hit game has already progressed, the second big hit game execution When the flag is turned on and the second jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S701 b), the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the set number of rounds has been digested, as processing of the next step S711 b. Then, in the process of step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is determined that it is a halfway stage of control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711b Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set open pattern as the process of step S712b. Thus, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712 b. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an open pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit is realized.

  And, while the control is being performed, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been digested in the process of step S711b, that is, it is determined that all the control for the execution of the big hit game is completed. (YES at step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating the end interval of the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (second big hit end interval timer) for counting the end interval of the big hit game has been set (step S721 b). As a result, when the second big hit end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721 b), the second big hit end interval is processed as the processing of steps S741 b and S742 b to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the second big hit interval end command is set, this process is once ended.

  The second big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the periphery control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects during the big hit game end interval appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the second big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S 721 b whenever the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S721 b), the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second big hit end interval timer is 0 or not in the process of the next step S 722 b, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. It will be judged whether or not. Then, in the process of step S722b, as long as it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722 b Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts one from the second big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer has become 0 in the processing of step S722b, that is, it is determined that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S723b to step S728b) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the second big hit game execution flag in the OFF state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already progressing, as the processing of step S723b. Then, next, as the process of step S 724 b, the number of special symbol lottery in which the probability flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the high probability state (probability state) is turned on to make the high probability state ( Set ST times to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag operated in the on state is operated to be in the off state when the number of times of ST is digested (step S513 b) or when it is a big hit before the digestion (step S506 b).

  In the present embodiment, although the probability changing function is operated for all the big hits, when the probability changing function is not activated or not according to the type of the big hit, a time saving function setting process described later (step S725 b) As described above, first, processing may be performed to determine whether or not the jackpot to activate the probability change function. Then, in the case of a big hit to operate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the on state similarly to the processing of the above-described step S724b, and sets the ST number. Further, in the case of a big hit to operate the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to set the probability changing flag to the ON state and do not set the ST number.

  Next, at step S725b, the main control MPU 4100a executes time-saving function setting processing to set whether to activate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the game state. Note that the time saving function setting process is the same process as the time saving function setting process (step S 725 a) in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described above, and is as described above in FIG. 132.

  And, after the processing concerning the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a is the first special symbol side in view of the possibility that the big hit game will be generated redundantly on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag which shows that it is in the state which should interlock a game of 2nd with the game of 2nd special symbol is made into an OFF state (Step S726 b). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S 727 b), and the second processing flag is updated to “0” because the second special symbol that has become the big hit this time is in the processing stage that has been reserve-digested S728b), end this process. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next change concerning the 2nd special symbol will be performed.

  According to such a big hit game processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum round number in the processing of step 711b, the corresponding big winning opening 2103 is an opening mode (according to the type of the big hit ( After step S 712 b), the player can be released repeatedly, and the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[Second small hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hit game start processing (step S230b) executed when the second processing flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the second small hit game start processing of this embodiment.

  At step S801 b, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (second small hit start interval timer) for measuring the interval before the start of the small hit game has already been set. As a result, when the second small hit start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S801 b), the second small hit process is started as the process before steps S802 b and S803 b. This process is temporarily ended when the small hit start interval timer is set and the second small hit interval start command is set.

  The second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect in the interval before the start of the small hitting game comes to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second small hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the second small hit start interval timer has been set each time the interrupt processing is performed (YES in step S801 b). ), The main control MPU 4100a, in the processing of the next step S811b, the determination about whether or not the time set as the second small hit start interval timer is 0, ie, the interval before the start of the small hit game has passed. It will be done. Then, in the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned small hit game start interval has not elapsed (in step S811b Every time the second small hit game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small hit start interval timer is decremented by one as the process of step S821b.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S811b, that is, the time set as the interval before the small hit game has elapsed. When the main control MPU 4100a updates the second processing flag to "6" (step S812b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing (YES in step S811b).

[Second small hit game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the second small hit game process (step S240 b) executed when the second process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the second small hit gaming process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second small hit game execution flag is in the on state, which indicates that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S901 b. Do. The second small hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the process of step S903 b described later at the start of the second small hit game, and turned off by the process of step S921 b described later Set to state.

  Then, when the second small hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S901 b), main control MPU 4100 a starts step S902 b in order to start the control related to the small hit game execution using attacker device 2100. As the process of (4), an open mode (open pattern) according to the type of small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required to execute control concerning the open pattern are set. In addition, the small hit in this embodiment is one type. The details of the small hit opening mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (D).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a operates the second small hit game execution flag in the ON state, which indicates that the control for the execution of the small hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S903 b and step S904 b. When the second small hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the small hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed. (YES in step S901 b), the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether or not the control timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S911 b, that is, the timing for the control to execute the small hit game has come The decision of Then, in the process of step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, the halfway stage of the control concerning the execution of the small hit game (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Every time the game processing (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes open / close control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set open pattern as the process of step S912b. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912b, and the small hit where the attacker device 2100 opens and closes. A game will be realized.

  When the control timer is 0 in the process of step S911b, that is, it is determined that all the controls for the small hit game have been completed (step S911b). The main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for ending the small hit game.

  As the processing of step S921b, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the second small hit game execution flag to the OFF state, which indicates that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress. Next, considering that there is no possibility that the big hit game will be generated redundantly on the first special symbol side, that the game on the first special symbol side should be linked to the second special symbol game. The interlock flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922 b).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control substrate 4100 is in the on state (step S 923 b). If the probability change flag is in the on state (YES in step S 923 b), it is determined whether the number of times of ST is 0 (step S 924 b). If the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S925b).

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S923 b), the main control MPU 4100 a shifts to the process of step S926 b. If the number of times of ST is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S924 b), the probability change state continues, so the probability change flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S926 b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S926b. Then, if the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S926 b), it is determined whether the time saving function is to be stopped (step S927 b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the probability changing function triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued when the probability change flag is in the on state.

  That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S925b described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S928b). Then, after the processing concerning the probability change function and the time reduction function is performed, the second processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the special symbol from which the small hit is derived is in the processing stage that has been reserve-digested (step S929b). End this process. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next change concerning the 2nd special symbol will be performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) of the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second interlocking setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the first special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the second special symbol is changing (step S1001 b).

  Then, when the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001 b), main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the second special symbol lottery (step S307 b) of the second change start process (FIG. 135) The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002 b).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). Further, a second determination stop command instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b) . The processing in steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as steps S502b and S503b which are performed when the variation time is up in the above-described second variation-in-progress processing (FIG. 137).

  Subsequently, main control MPU 4100a performs the same process as the process of steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-mentioned second variation in process (FIG. 137) by the process of steps S1005b to S1011b. After execution, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001 b), main control MPU 4100a continues the current second special symbol state (that is, the second special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021b), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is in the on state), the second special symbol during fluctuation is forcibly lost symbol Stop at. In addition, the second special symbol which is not changing is made to be in a standby state not to start changing until the second interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is avoided that a hit overlaps between the game of the 2nd special symbol side, and the game of the 1st special symbol side.

[Process of normal pattern side]
Subsequently, the normal control process (step S15) of the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the normal control process, normal symbol variation control (normal symbol lottery) based on the passage of gaming balls of the common view gate 2301 is executed, and a movable piece (normally generated) occurs in the normal symbol lottery. A winning assistance control is performed to operate the electric winning combination) 2111 to facilitate winning of the gaming ball in the special prize winning opening 2101b.

Normal control processing
FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the ordinary control process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the gate sensor 2302 for detecting passage of the game ball to the common gate 2301 is in the on state (step S2001). When the gate sensor 2302 detects passage of the game ball to the common gate 2301 and is in the on state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a selects the normal random number of the normal symbol as the random number counter. And gate pass processing such as storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM and the like (step S2010). The details of the gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a is one of five process processing (normal symbol normal processing, normal symbol variation time determination processing, normal symbol variation processing, normal symbol stop processing, common electric character opening processing) according to the normal symbol process flag. Selectively execute one to end normal control processing.

  First, in the normal symbol normal processing in step S2100, the main control MPU 4100a reads out the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the read out normal random number, the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol. Execute lottery processing and the like.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation time determination process in step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs lottery processing etc. for the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the common pattern variation random number. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation process of step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.

  Next, in the normal symbol stop processing in step S2400, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the change control stop of the normal symbol is normal A process of stopping the variation display of the normal symbol is executed so as to be displayed on the symbol display 1189.

  Next, in step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a causes the main control MPU 4100a to move when the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stop of the variation control of the normal symbol suggests "per common figure". A piece (normally-powered combination) 2111 is operated to execute processing for controlling the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101.

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the gate passing process (step S2010) of the above-mentioned normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate passage processing according to this embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the counter value, the hold number of the normal symbol is a value less than the maximum value "4". It is determined whether or not (step S2011).

  Then, when the number of reserved normal symbols is a value less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), main control MPU 4100a sets step S2012 to newly put variable display control of normal symbols on hold status. Execute the processing of S2014. First, as the process of step S2012, the normal hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S2013, the normal random number and the common-pattern variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S2014, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Thereafter, the gate passing process is ended.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a does not newly suspend variable symbol display control of normal symbols if the number of reservations of normal symbols is the maximum value (NO in step S2011). That is, the gate passing process is ended without executing the processes of step S2012 to step S2014.

[Normal pattern normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) of the above-mentioned normal control processing (FIG. 143) will be described. The normal symbol normal processing is executed when the normal symbol process flag indicates that the main processing should be performed in the above-mentioned normal control processing. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal symbol normal processing of this embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the pending state (YES in step S 2101), the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100 a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode is read out from the same RAM (step S2102). And while doing the countdown which subtracts 1 normally pending number counter (step S2103), it is related to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the normal design which is stored in each storage area of the normal retention storage area of RAM of main control MPU4100a. The random number (normal random number, common drawing random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out mode (step S2104).

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the spread gate 2301 sequentially from the first (first) area of the normal symbol storage area with four storage areas. Do. And, when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, if the game ball passes through the spread gate 2301, the random number extracted to the n + 1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in the order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state (step S2105). Then, if the current gaming state is the short time gaming state (YES in step S2105), the common time chart reduction time determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2106), and the current gaming state is the non-short time gaming state If it is (NO in step S2105), a common drawing determination table (not shown) for non-short time is selected (step S2107). After that, the common drawing determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or step S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read out in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

  The per-normal-pattern determination table is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and is used when the gaming state is non-temporal when the gaming state is non-temporal. It has a determination table for non-time-to-time regular drawing. Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. Usually, random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the out-of-plane mis-discrimination determination value. As described above, in the time saving game state, when there is passage of the gaming ball to the common drawing gate 2301, the common drawing always wins, and the movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 is operated and the first starting opening 2101 It is controlled so that the winning of the game ball to special prize winning opening 2101b becomes possible.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all the 255 types of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the standard deviation judgment value. As described above, in the non-time-saving game state, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301, since it is not won per common drawing, through the opening operation of the movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 It is not controlled so that winning of a game ball to the special installation winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 becomes possible. In addition, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time-saving gaming state, and in this case the winning probability (for example, 50%) lower than the time-short gaming state, the lottery result of the normal symbol is When it comes to a hit, the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is opened for a time shorter than the short time gaming state, for example, for 0.1 second, and then closing operation after enabling winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b It may be made to make winning of the game ball to special installation winning a prize mouth 2101b impossible.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it becomes a common drawing as a result of the process of step S2108 described above (step S2109). Then, in the case of per common drawing (YES in step S2109), after setting a per common drawing per shot flag indicating that the variation of the normal symbol is elected per common drawing (step S2110), the normal design is A symbol per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of variation control stop is determined (step S2112).

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a is dislocated as a result of the process of step S2108 described above (NO in step S2109), the common control as a mode (stop symbol of normal symbol) when variation control of normal symbol is stopped The off symbol is determined (step S2111).

  After completion of the processing of step S2112 or step S2111, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S2200) (step S2113), and this processing is ended. .

  In the present embodiment, the hit probability of hitting the normal symbol in the non-short game mode where the time saving function does not operate is 0%, and the hit probability of the normal symbol in the short game mode when the short function is activated is 100%. But it is not limited to this. In the short time game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the winning opening 2101a, ie, short time gaming In the state, it may be any game specification of an ordinary symbol capable of guiding the player so that the player does not strike left but strike right (winning probability per common drawing, common drawing fluctuation time, opening pattern of common electric character). Specifically, in the time saving game state, a regular drawing probability changing function that increases the winning probability per common drawing compared to the non-short time gaming state, a common drawing fluctuation shortening function that shortens the common drawing fluctuation time, and an opening operation by the ordinary electric character At least one function of the general-purpose program release extension function for extending (winning assistance control) is provided. As a result, in the time saving game state, a prize assistance reinforcing control that further strengthens the prize assistance control set in the non-time saving game state is executed.

[Game specification of special symbol]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 146 (A), the hit winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (A), in the first special symbol lottery of this embodiment, when the winning probability is the normal state (low probability state), the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399. Also, in the case of a probability variation state (high probability state) in which the hit winning probability is set higher than the normal state, a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45. In the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, only a big hit occurs in which the condition device operates, and a small hit in which the condition device does not operate does not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) described above, the big hit determination is performed with a 1/399 or 1/45 win probability according to the probability state at the time of lottery execution.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (B), the hit probability in the second special symbol lottery of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the hit in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery described above. The small hit election probability in the second special symbol lottery, when the big hit election probability is a normal state (low probability state), wins a small hit with a probability of 390/399, the jackpot probability probability probability change state (high probability state) If it is, it wins a small hit with a probability of 44/45. The small hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, and does not change between the normal state and the definite changing state like the big hit winning probability. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-mentioned second change start process (FIG. 135), a big hit determination is performed with a win probability of 1/399 or 1/45, depending on the probability state at the time of lottery execution. Alternatively, the small hit determination is performed with a 44/45 winning probability.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high. In particular, the second special symbol lottery in the definite variation state is characterized in that it is set to always win the small hit if it did not win the big hit. It should be noted that the player does not necessarily win the small hit if he does not win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery in the definite variation state, but does not necessarily win the small hit in the second special symbol lottery in the definite variation state. It is sufficient that the player wins a small hit with a probability much higher than the probability of becoming (for example, a big hit winning probability is 1/45, a small hit winning probability is 40/45, a losing probability is 4/45, etc.).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 146 (C), the big hit type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), in the big hit of this embodiment, the first big hit A and the first big hit B which can be generated in the first special symbol lottery, and the second big hit which can be generated in the second special symbol lottery There are a total of four types of jackpots, A and the second jackpot B.

  The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol A at this time. In addition, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, at this time the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol B.

  The second big hit A occurs at a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol A at this time. Also, the second big hit B occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, at this time the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol B.

  These four types of big hit transition the game state after the end of the big hit game to a definite change state with probability of 100%, and continue the definite change state until the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the big hit game is executed 70 times It is provided to be able to give a function. In addition, the first jackpot A can be provided with a time-saving function that operates movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 to assist winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Provided in

  Also, the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of the big hit, the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A and the second big hit B are open patterns A, B, C respectively And D are set. Here, the number of winning balls obtainable by the player is changed by the opening pattern, and the interest of the big hit game is enhanced.

  The open patterns A to C are set so that the open time of the big winning opening 2103 is long and the player can obtain a sufficient winning ball. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are a big hit game in which four round games are played, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings of each round are set so that the player can obtain 500 balls as a winning ball. Also, the opening pattern C is a big hit game in which 16 round games are played, and the opening time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can obtain 2000 balls as a winning ball.

  On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 is short and the player can not acquire a sufficient winning ball. For example, the opening pattern D is set so that the player can not substantially acquire a winning ball by repeating high-speed opening in which one opening time is short in a big hit game in which 16 round games are played.

  Next, the small hit type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (D). As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the small hit of this embodiment is provided with a second small hit C which can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C occurs with a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol C at this time. Further, an opening pattern E is set to the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time and is provided to be capable of winning a prize ball by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning that the player intends to win a winning prize in the big winning opening 2103 by hitting the gaming ball into the gaming area, but a winning playing area in which the big winning opening 2103 is provided. It means a prize that can be acquired by the fact that the game ball which has been struck has accidentally flowed down the position where it can be won when the big winning opening 2103 is opened. In the second small hit C, if the player has hit the game ball with a right hit, the number of rounds and the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 can be expected so that a prize of about 1 to 2 balls can be expected accidentally. Is set. In the case where about one or two balls are won in the large winning opening 2103 by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 balls can be obtained.

  In the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided frequently so that the player continuously strikes the game ball by hitting the ball in the rush mode. It is possible to promote an accidental winning based on the second small hit C that occurs during, and the majority of the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the rush mode (total number of winning balls) which can be obtained during the rush mode. Will occupy In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum of 30 balls) of ST number (70 times) is generated in the rush mode, the winning balls (maximum of 2000 balls) or more by the large hit (maximum of 2100 balls) Because it can be expected), it will not cause a decrease in the interest of the game due to the occurrence of a small hit that can hardly obtain a prize ball. Rather, since the small hit game that occurs a plurality of times causes one's interest in the game to continue rather than one big hit game, it is possible to enhance the interest of a series of games in the rush mode.

  Moreover, with reference to FIG. 146 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 146 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of this embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). For the variation time of the first special symbol, 30 seconds to 60 seconds are set according to the presence or absence of reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second is set when the game mode is the rush mode It is set. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, 600 seconds is set when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second is set when the game mode is the rush mode.

  Here, the normal mode is a game mode that urges the player to win a game ball (ie, "left-handed") to the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101, and the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery Indicates a normal gaming state in which the normal state (low probability state) and the time saving function are not provided. In addition, the rush preparation mode is a game mode that urges the player to win a game ball (ie, "right-handed") to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery Indicates a high probability time short game state in which a probability change state (high probability state) and a time saving function are provided. The rush mode is a game mode that urges the player to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 (ie, "right-handed"), and the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a definite change state (high probability) State) and indicates a high probability non-time game state where time saving function is not provided. In addition, the high probability time short game state of rush preparation mode is a game state which can shift to generation of the above-mentioned 1st big hit A as a trigger.

  As described above, the above-described specs (hit probability, hit type, fluctuation time, and the like) of the special symbol game provided to the player change in accordance with the game state. The transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is the special ST number (70 times in this case) granted Triggered by the end of the symbol lottery (variation).

[Transition of gaming state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, control of simultaneous variation control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the transition of the gaming state and each gaming state will be described. FIG. 147 is a view showing the transition of the game state (game mode) of the present embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is the normal game state (normal mode). In the normal gaming state, aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500 and firing a game ball (so-called “left-handed”) causes the game ball to win a prize at the always winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101. Is the best playing method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment can be easily won simply by aiming the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and hitting (so-called “right-handed”) game balls following the flow-down path. Provided in The second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 2102 has a high probability of winning a small hit where a winning ball can be obtained (390/399 in the normal state, 44/45 in the definite variation state). In this case, the player strikes right from the start of the game to aim for winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the variation of the second special symbol in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) not recommending winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The time is set to change for a long time (600 seconds). As a result, since it takes a long time to stop and be displayed (if the lottery result becomes clear) when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it is possible to suppress the player from hitting the right. .

  In addition, since the 2nd starting opening 2102 of this embodiment is always open and winning is easy, in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102, the second special in the gaming state which does not recommend the winning Although the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second start opening 2102 into the easy-to-win state and the hard-to-win state is provided, and a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) not recommending winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 It may be set to a difficult state. In this embodiment, in order to provide a game in which the player can easily obtain points while avoiding the complication of the configuration and processing relating to the control of the state conversion member, it is possible for the player to change the fluctuation time according to the game state. I am induced to play in the best way to play.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a). Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, while the normal gaming state is continued, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode, Transition to the first advantageous gaming state). In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes the first big hit B, it shifts to high probability non time short game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state (generation of gaming state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability time short gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first jackpot A gives the player an advantageous benefit for the player of winning the prize ball and providing the probability changing function and the time saving function.

  In the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), the special game winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is achieved by aiming the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and firing the game ball (so-called "right strike"). It is the best game method for the player to make the game ball a prize.

  Here, when the right-handed game ball passes through the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the right play area 1100 of the center character 2500, since the time-saving function is activated, the common drawing lottery is derived in the normal symbol lottery (100% probability per common figure in time-shortened state). As a result, the movable piece (normal motorized combination) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, as described above, in the short time game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the winning opening 2101a. Since the player is set high, the player makes a right strike to aim at the special winning opening 2101b.

  Therefore, in the high probability time short game state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 (specially-provided winning opening 2101 b). And, when the result of the special symbol lottery becomes the losing continuously 70 times, it moves to normal game state (normal mode). In addition, when the result of becoming the first big hit A is derived by the special symbol lottery being executed 70 times, the number of STs is reset to 70 times and the main gaming state (the rush preparation mode, the first advantageous gaming state) To continue. In addition, when the result of becoming the first big hit B is derived by the special symbol lottery being executed 70 times, it shifts to high probability non time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability time short game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (generation of the gaming state transition triggered by the second jackpot of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high probability short time gaming state (lash preparation mode) to the high probability non-short time gaming state (lash mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first jackpot B gives the player an advantageous benefit for the player of winning the prize ball and providing the probability changing function.

  In the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the game ball is hit in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and fired (so-called "right-handed") to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 Is the best way for the player to play the game.

  Here, the second starting opening 2102 of the present embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500. For this reason, the game ball hit to the right reaches the second starting opening 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the common drawing gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b, but since the time saving function does not operate, the common drawing gate Even if it passes through 2301, a per-diagram hit (that is, an easy-to-win prize state of the special winning opening 2101 b by the operation of the movable piece 2111) does not occur. Therefore, the game ball hit to the right in the high probability non-short play state (rush mode) substantially wins the second starting opening 2102.

  Therefore, in the high probability non-short game state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery put on hold in the gaming state before the transition when the gaming state shifts. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the main gaming state is a result that is not a big hit continuously 70 times, it shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, when the result of becoming a big hit is derived by the special symbol lottery being executed 70 times, the number of ST is reset to 70 times, this game state (rush mode, 2nd advantageous game state) continue.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high probability non-short game state, when the big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hit game generated at this time, the player can obtain a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a winning ball which is smaller than the game balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main gaming state, the player can obtain a prize ball by the small hit game every execution of the second special symbol lottery until the next big hit. And, in this game state, up to 70 small hit games can occur continuously. That is, a series of second special symbol games until the next big hit occurrence becomes a bonus game that can obtain a winning ball.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high probability non-short game state is set to a short time (1 second). Since it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery in this gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time until the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes clear. It is also conceivable to do. However, in this embodiment, the application period of the probability variation function is controlled by the number of times of execution of the special symbol (the number of STs), and the number of STs is counted at the start of variation of the special symbol. For this reason, when the variation time of the first special symbol to which the probability change function is to be added becomes long, the first special symbol is provided with the probability change function but the second special symbol is not provided with the probability change function. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, the event with different probability states between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous variation state It prevents the occurrence (obscuring the end of the probability change state). As a modification, in the case of controlling the end of the provision period of the probability change function until the occurrence of the next big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol in the main gaming state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery in simultaneous variation, so it is not possible to obscure the termination of the definite variation state as described above. Does not occur.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) can obtain a prize ball in a series of small special games with a second special symbol even if a big hit is not derived, and the total number of prize balls Is more than the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the big hit game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high probability time short gaming state (the rush preparation mode, the first advantageous gaming state) but the high probability non-short gaming state (the rush mode, the second advantageous gaming state).

  The high probability non-short game state (rush mode) is a game state that can be generated when the first big hit B is derived in the first special symbol lottery, so the player first, normal game state (normal mode) or high In the short time game state (a rush preparation mode), a game aimed at winning a game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is played. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit B, the player next attempts to play a game aiming for the game ball to reach the second starting opening 2102 Do.

[Control timing chart of each gaming state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed. However, a big hit game or a small hit game using the attack device 2100 can not be generated redundantly in both games. Therefore, referring to FIGS. 148 and 149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each gaming state will be described.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart explaining the simultaneous fluctuation control of the present embodiment. FIG. 148A shows an example of interlocking stop control of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148B shows a first interlocking setting process in the rush mode (FIG. 133). Is an example of interlocking stop control of.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal mode (normal gaming state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability time short gaming state), the variation of the second special symbol when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 The time (second fluctuation time) is set to 600 seconds, and long-term fluctuation is started to be executed. And, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a or special opening winning opening 2101b), the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, and 1 Special symbol variation is executed.

  In the game of the first special symbol side, when the big hit is derived, the fluctuation is stopped by the stop symbol of the first big hit (step S502a), and the game of the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side The interlock flag (second interlock flag) to be set is set to the on state (step S505a). Then, the first jackpot game is executed (steps S190a and S200a).

  Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, in response to the second interlocking flag being turned on, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the second special symbol being changed is The display is forcibly stopped by the stop symbol of detachment (step S1003b).

  Here, the second interlocking flag is a big hit game or small hit in which the same as the second special symbol side is used when the first big hit game is executed where the first special symbol side uses the attacker device 2100. The flag is provided to avoid the game being executed, but is also a flag required to prepare for rush mode entry.

  Specifically, when the first jackpot B occurs in the normal mode (normal gaming state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability time short gaming state), the gaming state after the end of the first big hit game is the rush mode (high Transition to a certain non-time game state). In the rush mode after transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 is mainstream. At this time, if the change of the second special symbol started before the transition is continued, the game on the second special symbol side waits for the stop of the change and becomes the standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is also a flag necessary to start the game in the rush mode smoothly.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (B), immediately after the shift to the rush mode (high probability non-short game state), the variation of the first special symbol held in the game state before the shift is executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). And in rush mode, the game of the 2nd special symbol based on winning of a game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102 is mainstream. The second starting opening 2102 is a winning opening which allows winning even if the player is a game beginner, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to one second, so the variation of the second special symbol frequently occurs. In addition, the second special symbol that does not derive a big hit derives a small hit.

  Therefore, in the second special symbol side game, the variation of the second special symbol and the small hit game (second small hit game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurrence. Then, every time the second special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (step S502 b), the interlocking flag (first interlocking flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side to the second special symbol side is set to the on state Step S532b). Then, the second small hit game is executed (steps S230b and S240b), and when the second small hit game ends, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

  In the game on the first special symbol side, in response to the first interlocked flag being turned on, the first interlocked setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed. At this time, the first special symbol whose fluctuation has not started is put on standby so as not to start fluctuation (step S1021a), and the fluctuation is started when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol during change is forcibly stopped and displayed with the stop symbol of disengaging (step S1003a).

  Thus, in the normal mode and rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side is mainstream, the execution frequency of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the rush mode in which the game on the second special symbol side is mainstream Then, the frequency of execution of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In this embodiment, there is a concern that the hit game will be duplicated between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, so to avoid this, the game on one side is avoided When a hit is obtained, the game on the other side is controlled by interlock setting processing at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

  When the player starts the game in the initial state of the pachinko machine 1, such as when the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, the normal mode starts first. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to hit the left and aim at the constant winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101. Here, if the launch force of the game ball at the beginning of hitting is too strong to be right-handed and the game ball wins the second starting opening 2102, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is long Long-term fluctuations are performed.

  After that, when the player adjusts the launch force and strikes the left, and the gaming ball wins the regular winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds in accordance with the selected fluctuation pattern. In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the first big hit A is won, the variation is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol A, and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the on state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the long-term fluctuation state is forcibly displayed in the form of a disengaging symbol. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

  In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to aim at the special prize winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 by hitting right. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a time varying function is provided which performs a probability changing function of 70 times of ST times and a prize assisting control for facilitating a prize winning on the special prize winning opening 2101b.

  When the player performs a right strike and the gaming ball is won in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds in accordance with the selected fluctuation pattern. In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. And, at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one. When the first jackpot B is won when the count of the ST number is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol B, and the first jackpot game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the on state, but the state is maintained because the variation of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to hit the right and aim for the second opening 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the probability changing function of 70 times of ST times is provided. Here, the ST number at which the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is 68 is counted again from the count value of 70.

  Here, the player continues to hit the right. Since the time saving function does not operate, the right-handed game ball does not win a prize at the special prize winning opening 2101 b and wins at a second starting aperture 2102 further below. Since winning to the second starting opening 2102 is easy even for a game beginner, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 frequently occurs. Since the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol at this time is set to one second, the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, the second special symbol lottery in which the player wins a big hit with a probability of 1/45, and wins a small hit if the player does not win the big hit is executed. And, at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, when it is a small hit, the variation is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hit game is performed, the first interlocking flag is set to the on state.

  In addition, immediately after the rush mode is started, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b generated in the rush preparation mode before transition is on hold, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is It will be executed.

  In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol at this time is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, small hit games frequently occur in the second special symbol side game, so the first interlock flag is also frequently set to the on state. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped changing, if the first special symbol is changing, it is forcibly displayed in a disengaging symbol. And since the 1st interlocking flag is returned to an OFF state with the end of the 2nd small hit game, the change of the next 1st special symbol is started. And, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one.

  As described above, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are efficiently executed in a short time, so that the speed of subtraction of the ST number is also fast. Then, the variation of the second special symbol and the second small hit game are repeatedly executed alternately until the count value of the ST number becomes 0 or the jackpot is won next time.

  In the rush mode of the present embodiment, since the small hit is won when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the second small hit game occurs frequently. The number of award balls obtainable in the rush mode is 2100 when the number of times of ST number (70) is small hit, assuming that the number of prize balls for one second small hit game is 30 balls. This is larger than the maximum award ball number (2000 balls) obtainable by the jackpot game of the present embodiment. Therefore, a series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be a bonus game comparable to a big hit game. In addition, since there is also the possibility of becoming a big hit game with a probability of 1/45 even in the rush mode, the rush mode is the most advantageous (to be aimed) game mode for the player.

  It should be noted that the number of STs in the rush mode is more likely to be beneficial to the player if it is digested by the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable not to carry over the first special symbol on hold in the rush mode. Therefore, when it is determined that the transition to the rush mode is found, that is, when it is determined that the first jackpot B will be won in the game mode before the transition, the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is suppressed Control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled such that the operation stop of the short function and the prize assisting function are reduced when assisting the prize to the special prize winning opening 2101b. In addition, some notification effects may be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Control on peripheral control board side]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151.

[Submain processing]
FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the sub main processing of this embodiment. The sub main process is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs an initial setting process (step S3001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" is started (step S3002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. A process is performed to set the flag T and reset (set to 0) the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0".

  If 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” (YES in step S3002), peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “0” (step S3003), and then performs the 16 ms steady process. Execute (step S3004). In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100.

  After completing the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns to the process of step S3002 again, and repeats the process of steps S3003 to S3004 described above every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140 a does not set the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “1” (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”) (NO in step S3002), the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Execute loop processing.

[16 ms steady process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16 ms steady process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the above-mentioned sub main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 16 ms steady process of this embodiment.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes command analysis processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 4100 (step S3101). Next, presentation control processing is executed to control the contents of presentation to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control command (the received fluctuation pattern command and the like) analyzed in the command analysis processing described above (step S3102).

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process is performed to control the effects of the lamps and LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 (step S3104). In addition, processing for sending lighting signal of lamp / LED to lamp driving board 3041 and processing for sending driving signal to driving motor for operating various rendering units to motor driving board 3045, output information for executing rendering Information output processing is executed (step S3105). Thereafter, random number update processing for updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control processing of step S3102 is executed (step S3106), and the 16 ms stationary processing is ended.

  The 16 ms steady process is normally finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the 16 ms steady process from the beginning (the process of step S3101) when 16 ms has passed since the process was started. There is nothing to do. That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (step S3002) in the sub main process, and the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in the sub main process after the 16 ms steady process is completed. When it is determined (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady process is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random number updating process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub main process (FIG. 150) described above.

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) and the second based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 (2) A control structure capable of simultaneously changing the special symbol, and a winning area (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b, second starting opening 2102) that the player should aim for according to the gaming state or a game ball operation A plurality of gaming states are provided such that (right-handed (second game state), left-handed (first game state)) are different. In this embodiment, by providing the function display unit 1180 with a game state indicator 1183 including an LED capable of clearly notifying the player of the timing of performing “right-handed” (second game state), the game beginner can be Also, it is possible to switch the striking method (the striking operation) smoothly along with the transition of the gaming state without making a mistake between the "left strike" and the "right strike".

  Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sends a control signal for controlling the gaming state indicator 1183 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 to "right-hand" the player in the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may alert | report. Usually, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in a front view of the player (the end of the front line of sight). Therefore, when “right-handed” is notified in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player may switch to an appropriate striking method (driving-in operation) without shifting the line of sight to the front end left side (function display unit 1180). It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state (normal mode), a high probability short time gaming state (lash preparation mode), and a high probability non-short time gaming state (lash mode). And, in the rush mode, every time a second special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 that is easy for the game beginner to win is performed, the player gets a chance to win the winning ball (small hit game or Big hit game) is awarded. Further, the number of game balls obtainable by the player in the rush mode tends to be higher in the ratio of the number of game balls obtainable in the small hit game than in the big hit game. As a result, since a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be expected to be able to grant more game balls than the big hit game, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game for the small hit game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the high probability non-short game state rush mode (second advantageous game state) operates the short function generally considered to be advantageous to the player. The game state is more advantageous to the player than the mode (first advantageous game state). And, if the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function It controls to continue rush mode without operating. Since the small hit game of the present embodiment can provide a game that reverses the established concept that the time saving function is activated (given) is advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second winning opening 2102 based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special installed opening 2101b) When the second special symbol based on the simultaneous change, when one hit (big hit, small hit) is derived, the other during the change is forced to stop display with the off symbol. This avoids duplication of hits between the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game, and before and after transition when transitioning to another gaming state triggered by a big hit Can be prevented from running across the other.

Second Embodiment
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention is, as described above, a game ball to the first special symbol and the second start hole 2102 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2101 (always winning hole 2101a, special winning hole 2101b). And a second special symbol based on the winning of the second symbol. In such simultaneously variable control, in order to avoid that a specific game (small hit game, big hit game) occurs redundantly between the game of the first special symbol side and the game of the second special symbol side Control is required. In the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol stops changing with the stop symbol indicating the specific result (small hit, big hit), the stop symbol is replaced with the removed symbol if the other special symbol is changing. By controlling so that the other special symbol does not change during the specific game, a control structure that can change simultaneously is formed.

  In the second embodiment, various control patterns of the simultaneously variable control structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. About the member which has a function common to the game board 4 (refer FIG. 114) of above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 according to the second embodiment will be described.

  In the game area on the right side of the center role 2500 of the second embodiment, a regular drawing gate 2301, a second starting port 2102, a special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, and a special winning opening 2103 are disposed in order from the upstream ing.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming balls having flowed down the right passage 2545 first reach the spread gate 2301. Then, when the game ball passes through the common drawing gate 2301, the normal symbol lottery is executed. In addition, a second starting port 2102 is disposed below the general drawing gate 2301. The second starting port is also provided so as to be able to accept the game balls that have passed through the drawing gate 2301 and the game balls that have not passed. If the game ball is received in the second start opening 2102, the second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special start condition is established.

  The special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 is disposed immediately below the second starting opening 2102. The special prize winning opening 2101 b is provided with a pair of movable members (normally-powered prizes) 2111 opened at the top in a reverse “ha” shape to convert the gaming ball into a state easy to receive (acceptable state). The pair of movable members 2111 normally maintain a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) at an interval of about the diameter of the gaming ball. The special winning opening 2101 b is provided with the second starting opening 2102 at the upper side, so that the gaming ball can not be received when the movable member 2111 is closed. The movable member 2111 is converted from the closed state to the easy-to-accept state when winning the normal symbol lottery, whereby acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b is permitted. Then, in the case where the game ball is received at the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101, if the predetermined special start condition is established, the first special symbol lottery is executed.

  In addition, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery hit the opening operation under the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 and can receive the game ball which has flowed down the right passage 2545 at the time of operation An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attack device 2100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called combined tacker device that opens the special winning opening 2103 by the opening and closing operation of two opening and closing members (first opening and closing members 2106 a and second opening and closing members 2106 b) sliding in the front and rear direction. The details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front lower left portion of the front component 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the first embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with an LED capable of clearly indicating the timing of performing "right-handed" (second game state) in the gaming state indicator 1183. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming state display A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the vessel 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is disposed at the upper right portion of the center product 2500 and at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920 according to the gaming state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, although the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment and the gaming board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above have differences in configuration as described above, their gaming characteristics (recommended gaming mode transition , And the recommended driving operation in the game mode is the same.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 (A) to (C), the configurations of the attacker 2100, the function display unit 1180 and the 7-segment display 1920 of the second embodiment will be described.

[Attacker]
FIG. 153 (A) is a simplified structural view of an attacker device 2100 provided in the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

  Attacker drive mechanism 2121 for opening and closing the opening and closing members of the special winning opening 2103, the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106b, which can operate between the closed state and the open state, and 2 (FIG. Reference). The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is characterized in that one opening / closing port 2103 is provided with two opening / closing members (a first opening / closing member 2106 a and a second opening / closing member 2106 b).

  The first opening / closing member 2106 a and the second opening / closing member 2106 b normally maintain a closed state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed so that the gaming ball can not be received in the large winning opening 2103. It is configured as a part of a guiding channel 2110 for guiding the gaming ball having flowed down the right playing area to the playing area below the center character 2500.

  Then, when a hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, after the fluctuation display according to the lottery is finished, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 is performed, and the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing The slide opening / closing operation of the member 2106 b in the front-rear direction is performed. Opening and closing operations of the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

  Here, the first opening and closing member 2106 a and the second opening and closing member 2106 b are arranged in parallel on the upstream side and the downstream side of the induction flow channel 2110 at intervals. That is, the special winning opening 2103 has two openings which can receive the game ball when it is in the open state. The special winning opening 2103 is configured to merge internally regardless of which opening the gaming ball is received from, and the acceptance of the gaming ball is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

  In this manner, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment opens the big winning opening 2103 by opening the two places by the first opening and closing member 2106 a on the upstream side and the second opening and closing member 2106 b on the downstream side. The large hit hole 2103 is provided with a combi tucker structure that enables a plurality of gaming balls rolling on the induction channel 2110 from the upstream to the downstream in the opening of the game.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153 (B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100.

  The function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 consisting of two LEDs for notifying that it is the time to “right-hand” above the display unit 1181. Below the right-handed status indicator 1192 are four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit". A first special symbol storage indicator 1184 comprising a round indicator 1190, and two LEDs arranged below the round indicator 1190 to indicate the number of pendings regarding the acceptance of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 And the first special symbol lottery result (first special lottery result) disposed on the right side of the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 and drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 as the first special symbol A first special symbol display 1185 consisting of eight LED groups for display is provided. In addition, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol memory display 1187 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, and the second To display the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol arranged on the left side of the special symbol memory display 1187 and drawn by the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 as the second special symbol A second special symbol display 1186 consisting of eight LED groups is provided.

  In addition, below the display section 1181, there are a gaming state indicator 1183 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and a normal symbol consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding passage of the common view gate 2301. A memory indicator 1188 and an ordinary symbol indicator 1189 consisting of two LEDs for displaying an ordinary lottery result selected by the game ball passing through the regular drawing gate 2301 as an ordinary symbol are provided side by side. There is.

  The right-handed state indicator 1192 of this embodiment lights the LED when it is time to perform the “right-handed” (second gaming state) to notify the player of “right-handed”. It is to be noted that the LED is turned off when it is time to perform the "left-handed" (first gaming state).

  In this embodiment, the main control board is a signal that warns the player when passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301 generated by the “right strike” is detected when it is the timing of “left strike”. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message warning that the liquid crystal display device 1900 returns to the left, and sounds an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). After that, if “right strike” is detected as well, it is characterized in that penalty control is performed to impose a predetermined penalty which is disadvantageous to the player.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153 (C) is an enlarged front view of a 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 according to the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

  The 7-segment display 1920 displays the variable display (lottery processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and information on the number of reservations. A 7-segment display 1920 includes a first special symbol display portion 1921 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying variable display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and the number of reserved first special symbols. The first special symbol memory display unit 1922 consisting of two LEDs, the fourth symbol display unit 1923 consisting of one LED for displaying the fourth symbol related to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol A second special symbol display unit 1924 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying a display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display unit 1925 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending second special symbols A fourth symbol display unit 1926 including one LED for displaying a fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the second special symbol is provided.

  The 7-segment LEDs that make up the first special symbol display portion 1921 and the second special symbol display portion 1924 indicate that the variable display is in progress by repeating turning on and off (that is, blinking) of each segment in order, and a predetermined value is displayed according to the result. By lighting the segments, the fluctuation result (lottery result) is displayed. During the standby, the same segment is lit as when the lottery result is out.

  The two LEDs that make up the first special symbol storage display unit 1922 are off when the number of reservations is "0", the upper LED is on when the number of reservations is "1", and the lower LED is off, When the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs light, when the number of reservations is "3", the upper LED blinks, the lower LED lights, and when the number of reservations is "4" both LEDs It blinks.

  The two LEDs that make up the second special symbol memory display unit 1925 turn off when the number of reservations is "0", the upper LED lights up when the number of reservations is "1", and the lower LED turns off, When the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs are lit. In the present embodiment, it is possible to store “1” pieces of second special symbol hold.

  One LED constituting the fourth symbol display portion 1923, 1926 can emit light in red and green instead of single color light emission, repeats turning on and off in red during fluctuation display, and in green when the fluctuation result is out of color Lights up and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is hit (big hit, small hit).

  Then, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high probability time short gaming state (lash preparation mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variation display of the second special symbol Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. Also, when the gaming state is high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 Be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display device on which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed is switched according to the game state. In addition, the transition of the gaming state is triggered by the big hit as the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or the end of the provided ST number. When a big hit is triggered, the special symbol to be displayed is switched between the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 after the big hit game is over. Further, in the case where the end of the ST number is a trigger, when the final change of ST ends and the probability change flag is set to off (step S513a in FIG. 129, step S513b in FIG. 137), liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 7 The special symbol to be displayed is switched with the segment display 1920.

[Game specification of special symbol]
Subsequently, FIG. 154 shows an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment described above will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A) and FIG. 154 (B), in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the definite variation state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Also, the small hit winning probability is always 1/3.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), there are four types of jackpot types and there is no change, but the presence or absence of the time saving function differs depending on the gaming state in which each is won. In the present embodiment, the time-saving function is given to the big hit other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, in order to enter the rush mode, there is no alternative but to use the jackpot B of the first special symbol as a trigger. Further, as shown in the above-described time saving function setting process (FIG. 132), the time saving function is not given to the jackpot occurring in the rush mode.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (D), the number of types of small hits increases in this embodiment. In the small hit of this embodiment, a second small hit D is provided in addition to the second small hit C which can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C and the second small hit D differ in the opening mode of the large winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The open pattern E has a short open time (eg, 1.8 seconds) and is open only once, whereas the open pattern F has a further short open time (eg, 0.9 seconds). ), Opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a second small hit C or a second small hit D occurs with a probability of 50%.

  In the opening pattern E and the opening pattern F, the opening pattern F can be expected to win a prize in the special winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided with the large winning opening 2103 which can be opened at two places, upstream and downstream of the guiding channel 2110 where the gaming ball flows down, and can receive the gaming ball, so The expectation of winning of the game ball is larger in the case of the opening pattern F which is opened twice even if the opening time is short.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 154E, in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the variation result. The fluctuation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a hit is a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time when it is a losing is a long time fluctuation of 600 seconds. When the game mode is the rush mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is a shortened variation having a width of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of gaming state]
Subsequently, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the transition of the gaming state (FIG. 147) in the first embodiment described above will be described.

  In the first embodiment described above, the rush preparation mode can be shifted upon occurrence of the first big hit A (FIG. 146), but in the present embodiment the first big hit A, the second big hit A and the first in the normal mode It is possible to shift upon occurrence of 2 big hit B (Fig. 154). The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is a transition to the normal mode due to the variable number of STs or a transition to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first jackpot B. In addition, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) is due to the fluctuation of the ST number. In rush mode, the mode does not shift when any big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a hit (small hit, big hit), the fluctuation time is shortened by one second. Essentially, the game mode which urges the game balls to win the second starting opening 2102 is a rush mode, but it is highly likely that a win for the second starting opening 2102 will be aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, if the result of the second special symbol lottery derives the release, it is set to a long time fluctuation (600 seconds), or even after the small hit result is determined, the game ball may be launched toward the attacker device 2100. By setting the opening timing not to be in time for the opening of the big winning opening 2103 in the hit game, or making it difficult to estimate the opening pattern by providing a plurality of opening modes, the second in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode Suppress the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the winning of the special start winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, that is, the game in the rush preparation mode in which “right strike” is recommended, is diversified. In the first embodiment, even if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 2102 by "right-handed", the variation of the second special symbol is a long time, so the interest can be found only in the variation of the first special symbol It was not. However, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode takes a short time when deriving the hit result, and the short-time fluctuation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. And if it becomes a big hit result by the 2nd special symbol lottery, ST frequency is newly given and a time saving function will also be continued. For this reason, the interest can be found in the change of the second special symbol, and the game in the rush preparation mode is improved.

Control pattern
Next, referring to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The outline of the control pattern in the control structure capable of simultaneously changing with the second special symbol based on. FIG. 156 is a diagram for describing an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure. In the following, the outline of four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (D).

  First, FIG. 156 (A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. The basic control pattern is to forcibly replace the special symbol in the other change with the result and to stop the change, as described in the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol is hit and the result is hit. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), when the variation of the second special symbol stops at the small hit stop symbol, the first special symbol in change is the determined big hit stop symbol in a predetermined off stop symbol Replace and stop fluctuating with the off stop symbol.

  Specifically, in accordance with the control process of the first embodiment, in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) relating to the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is timed up, and the variation in the small hitting stop symbol When is stopped, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES in step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO in step S504b → YES in step S531b → S532b). Thereby, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) related to the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the variation of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a → Step S250a).

  Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the first special symbol in motion is stopped and displayed with a predetermined off symbol (YES in step S1001a → step S1002a → step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a hit (hit determination process) is a step of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) which is executed when the first special symbol is started to be varied. It is executed in S307a, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined along with the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the first interlocked setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stop symbol (here, the big hit symbol) is replaced with a predetermined off symbol.

  As described above, in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, the interlock flag for interlocking the game on the other special symbol side to the one special symbol side is turned on at the timing at which the one special symbol deriving the hit changes and stops. Set to state. For this reason, the other special symbol that occurs during the fluctuation of one special symbol is hit judgment processing because it is not possible to judge the presence or absence of the interlocking stop control at the start of the fluctuation despite the fact that the interlocking stop control forcibly results in disengaging I had to carry out (lottery processing).

  In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to ON at the timing when the special symbol deriving the hit starts to fluctuate, and the other special symbol interlocks when the fluctuation starts If is in the on state, an example will be described which is set so as to stop fluctuating with an out-of-design (without lottery) without executing the hit determination process.

  The details of the control process of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (B) is a timing chart showing the priority control pattern. The priority control pattern is to compare the results derived by the two special symbols and to preferentially execute the special symbol deriving the advantageous result for the player, and to stop the variation of the other special symbol with the detached symbol.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when a variation for deriving a small hit with the second special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol, both lottery As a result of the comparison of the results, the first special symbol for deriving the jackpot advantageous to the player stops fluctuating with the jackpot symbol. And, the second special symbol replaces the determined small hit stop symbol with a predetermined off stop symbol, and stops fluctuating with the off stop symbol.

  As described above, in the priority control pattern, the special symbol which is prioritized among the special symbols which simultaneously change in accordance with the lottery result derived by the special symbol is determined, that is, the special symbol which gives a more advantageous result for the player is prioritized It can be done. In the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, even if it is a special symbol that became a big hit in the hit judgment at the start of fluctuation, if the special symbol to be the other small hit first stops fluctuating forcibly, It has been set, but it is not unwilling to miss such special symbols that make a big hit. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine than the basic control pattern.

  The details of the control process of the priority control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern is to interrupt the other special symbol while the other special symbol is being played, while the other special symbol is to resume the fluctuation of the remaining time while the hit special game is derived. It is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), when the variation for deriving a small hit is performed with the second special symbol and the variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol is performed, the second special symbol is a small hit. The first special symbol suspends temporary fluctuation when it stops changing with the symbol. And the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the 2nd special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends fluctuation. When the small hit game is over, the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, it is possible to change and execute the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol as a result based on all acquired random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the simultaneously changing special symbols is forcibly set to be disassociated regardless of the acquired random number, but in the suspension control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( There is no overturning of the hit judgment result based on random numbers. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the above-described priority control pattern. In addition, since it is possible to make it appear that there is relevance to the hit game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the effect in the fluctuation at the time of restart, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  The details of the control process of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (D) is a timing chart showing a re-set control pattern. The reset control pattern is to reset the remaining fluctuation time when the other interrupted special symbol is resumed based on the above-mentioned interruption control pattern.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), when the variation for deriving a small hit is performed with the second special symbol and the variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol is performed, the second special symbol is a small hit. The first special symbol suspends temporary fluctuation when it stops changing with the symbol. And the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the 2nd special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends fluctuation. Up to this point, the control is the same as the above-described lottery control pattern. In the re-set control pattern, when the small hit game is finished and the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation, the fluctuation is newly set after setting the fluctuation time after the restart.

  As described above, in the re-set control pattern, the degree of freedom in the rendition variation is increased more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to provide a recommended game by setting the fluctuation time at the time of resumption according to the game situation.

  The details of the control process of the re-set control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, when the special symbol deriving a hit starts changing, the other special symbol's forced off flag is set to the on state, and the other special symbol has the forced off flag at the start of changing If it is in the on state, the control structure is characterized in that the movement stop is performed with the out-of-set symbol (without lottery) without executing the hit determination processing.

[First change start process]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first change start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation start processing (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after executing the processing of step S306a, determines whether or not the first special symbol forcible off flag is set to the on state to set the first special symbol to be misaligned at random. (Step S311a). Then, when the forced special release flag of the first special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S311a), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed to set the lottery result information, and the processing of step S307a and step S308a is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308a described above indicates a hit result (step S313a). And, if it is a flag indicating a hit result (YES in step S313a), a forced second flag of the second special symbol is used to make the second special symbol variation that occurs during the first special symbol variation be a result. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if it is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, if it is a flag indicating an out result (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to step S309a without executing the process of step S314a.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a sets the flag indicating the first special symbol's disconnection result and the deviation information command when the first special symbol's forced off flag is on (YES in step S311 a) (step S312a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S309a.

  As described above, in the first variation start process, when the first special symbol derives a hit result, the forced release flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state, which occurs after the variation start of the first special symbol. The second special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a shift result in no lottery.

[First jackpot game processing]
FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first jackpot gaming process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first jackpot game processing (FIG. 131) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced release flag of the second special symbol to the off state when the first big hit game is over (step S751a).

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  If the first special symbol is in motion (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the first out-of-pattern that has already been determined in step S312a of the first variation start process (FIG. 157) described above. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004a.

[Second variation start process]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the second variation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second variation start processing (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after executing the processing of step S306b, determines whether or not the second special symbol forced deviation flag is set to the on state to set the second special symbol to be out of no lottery (Step S311 b). Then, if the compulsory release flag of the second special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S311 b), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed to set the lottery result information, and the processing of step S307 b and step S308 b is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308b described above indicates a hit result (step S313b). And, if it is a flag indicating a hit result (YES in step S313b), the forced flag of the first special symbol for making the change of the first special symbol occurring during the change of the second special symbol be the result of detachment Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if it is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, if it is a flag indicating an out result (NO in step S313 b), the process proceeds to step S309 b without executing the process of step S314 b.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a second special symbol's disconnection result and an out-of-order information command (step S311 b) (YES in step S311 b). S312b). Then, it transfers to the process of step S309 b.

  As described above, in the second variation start process, when the second special symbol derives a hit result, the forced release flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state, which occurs after the variation start of the second special symbol. The first special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a shift result in no lottery.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as that of the second big hit game processing (FIG. 139) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the second big hit game is over, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forcible release flag of the first special symbol to the off state (step S751b).

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second small hitting game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as that of the second small hitting game processing (FIG. 141) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the second small hit game is over, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forcible release flag of the first special symbol to the off state (step S951 b).

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocked setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  If the second special symbol is in motion (step S1001 b), the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 is the second out-of-out symbol that has already been determined in step S312 b of the second variation start process (FIG. 160) described above. Display on the special symbol display device (step S1101 b). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004b.

[Right-handed penalty setting process]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right strike penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 regarding the warning and the penalty to the “right strike” when it is the timing of “left strike”.

  In this processing, a warning is given first when “right hitting” is performed in the gaming state where “left hitting” is recommended, and a penalty is applied when “right hitting” is performed even after the warning. Settings are made.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the current game mode is in the normal mode (low probability non-short time state) (step S1201). Then, if the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether "right-handed" has been detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of “right-handed” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the game area on the right side of the center character 2500. It should be noted that the acceptance detection of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 may be performed.

  Main control MPU 4100a ends the present process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201) or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). Do.

  Then, when the “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S1202), main control MPU 4100a determines whether a warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to "left strike". Whether or not the warning has been executed may be checked whether the warning executed flag set when the warning timer described later has timed out is in the on state.

  When the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a sets a time (warning timer) for giving a warning (step S1204). When the warning timer has timed out (YES in step S1205), the warning execution completion flag is set to the on state (step S1206), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when warning has been executed (YES in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a determines that “right-handed” is continued despite warning, and therefore imposes a predetermined period penalty.

  The main control MPU 4100a first sets a penalty timer which is a period for applying a penalty (step S1211), and sets the forced special release flag of the second special symbol to the on state (step S1212). Then, until the penalty timer times up (NO in step S1213), the forced special release flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

  When the penalty timer has timed out (YES in step S1213), main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol forcible removal flag and the warning execution completion flag to the off state (step S1214), and ends this processing.

  As described above, when “right strike” is detected in the normal mode in which “left strike” is recommended, the player is first warned to return to “left strike”. Then, if the "right strike" is continued, the "right strike" is given, and even if the game ball wins on the second starting opening 2102, a penalty period is given which results in a gap in no lottery. Then, since the player is notified (suggested) that the penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be induced to perform a proper driving operation according to the game mode.

  Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the procedure of liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short time state) (step S3201). Then, if the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, if it is the normal mode (low probability non-short state) or the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) (NO in step S3201), the second main control MPU 4100a It is determined on the special symbol side whether or not the hit variation for deriving the hit result is executed (step S3202). Then, if the hit variation is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit variation is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a normal display effect (step S3204).

  Here, blackout refers to a display effect such as the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 being dark and having noise. The blackout is started when the special symbol to be subject to variable display on the 7-segment display 1920 starts the fluctuation for deriving the hit result, and is continued until the hit symbol is determined by the fluctuation. The special symbol displayed on the 7-segment indicator 1920 is due to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening not recommended to the player in the game mode. Therefore, it can be said that blackout is also a pre-announcement effect notifying that the hit variation has occurred due to the special symbol not recommended in the game mode.

[Right-handed penalty notification process]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notification processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding warning and penalty notification for “right-handed” when it is time to perform “left-handed”. It is one. In addition, it is an effect process corresponding to a right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether the current game mode is in the normal mode (low probability non-short time state) (step S3301). Then, if the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether "right-handed" has been detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of “right-handed” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the game area on the right side of the center character 2500. It should be noted that the acceptance detection of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 may be performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the present process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302). Do.

  Then, when the “right-handed” detection is detected (YES in step S3302), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether a warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a side.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a time for giving a warning (warning timer) (step S3304). The warning timer may acquire timer information from the main control MPU 4100a described above. Then, a warning notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a message "Please return to the left" (step S3305). At this time, a warning sound may be emitted for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and a warning may be suggested. Until the warning timer times out (NO in step S3306), warning notification is performed (step S3305), and when the warning timer times up (YES in step S3306), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if warning has been executed (YES at step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a is determined to continue “right-handed” despite the warning, and therefore main control MPU 4100a performs a predetermined operation. A period penalty is imposed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a penalty timer (step S3311). Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes penalty notification to notify that a penalty has been imposed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer times up, and when the penalty timer times up (YES in step S3313), this processing ends.

<Effect by basic control pattern>
As described above, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence or absence of interlocking stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol deriving the hit starts to change, so the other special symbol started thereafter is hit when the change starts It is possible to stop fluctuating with an out-of-pattern (without lottery) without executing the determination process. Since wasteful processing can be omitted in the other special symbol for which the result of forcedly being set is set even if the hit determination processing is executed, the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the priority control pattern, the special symbol that gives the player an advantage is given priority by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is controlled to stop fluctuating with the missing symbol. It is characterized by its structure.

[First change start process]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first change start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation start processing (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  After the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the process of step S307a, it is compared with the variation of the second special symbol whether or not the present variation of the first special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player. The first priority determination process to be determined is executed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S308a and ends the present processing.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 167).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the second special symbol is changing (step S361a). Then, if there is no second special symbol being changed (NO in step SS 361a), this processing is ended because there is no comparison object.

  If there is a second special symbol being changed (YES in step S 361 a), main control MPU 4100 a acquires the result of the determination processing of the second special symbol being changed (step S 362 a), and It compares with the result of the hit determination processing of step S307a of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

  If the first special symbol is advantageous for the player (YES in step S364a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second special symbol is a result of detachment (step S365a). Then, if the result is an out result (YES in step S365a), the process ends. On the other hand, if the result is not the off result, that is, if it is the small hit or the big hit result (NO in step S365a), the forced removal flag for forcibly disengaging the second special symbol is set to the on state (step S366a ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (NO in step S364a), main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the first special symbol hit determination process to be out of step (step S367a). ), End this processing.

  As described above, in the first priority determination process, if there is a second special symbol being changed when the change is started with the first special symbol, it is determined which change result is advantageous for the player, If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is the disengaging result. If the first special symbol is not the advantageous result, the first special symbol is the disapproval result. Make sure that the game does not occur twice with the special symbol.

[Process during first change]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the first variation-in-progress process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. In addition, about the process in common with the 1st process in a fluctuation | variation (FIG. 129) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501a, and then determines whether or not the forced special release flag of the first special symbol is on. (Step S551a). The forced removal flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S551a), main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with out, and turns the forced off flag into the off state. It sets (step S552a).

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the first special symbol in change is replaced by the second special symbol that is subsequently changed by the second special symbol that has been changed, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is removed. replace.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is being changed in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forcible disengagement flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a ). The forced removal flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S1111a), main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with out, and turns the forced out flag into the off state. The setting is made (step S1112a). In addition, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is not included in the collision determination process at the start of the change (step S307a of the first change start process) It is the result.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the out-of-stop symbol determined in the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, when the first special symbol in fluctuation is replaced by the second special symbol which is subsequently fluctuated by the second special symbol started to be fluctuated, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol than the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol When the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with the removal.

[Second variation start process]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second change start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second variation start processing (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  After the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the processing of step S307b, it is compared with the variation of the first special symbol whether or not this variation of the second special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player. The second priority determination process to be determined is executed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S308b and ends the present processing.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart of a second priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-described second change start process (FIG. 171).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the first special symbol is changing (step S361 b). Then, if there is no first special symbol being changed (NO in step SS361 b), this processing is ended since there is no comparison object.

  If there is the first special symbol in motion (YES in step S 361 b), main control MPU 4100 a acquires the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol in motion (step S 362 b). It compares with the result of the hit determination processing in step S307b of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

  If the second special symbol is advantageous for the player (YES in step S364 b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first special symbol is a result of detachment (step S365 b). Then, if the result is an out result (YES in step S 365 b), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a result of losing, that is, if it is a result of big hit (NO in step S365b), a forced removal flag for forcibly disengaging the first special symbol is set in the on state (step S366b). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is advantageous to the player (NO in step S364 b), main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol to be out of step (step S367b). ), End this processing.

  Thus, in the second priority determination process, if there is a first special symbol that is changing when the change is started with the second special symbol, it is determined which change result is advantageous for the player, If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is the disengaging result. If the second special symbol is not the advantageous result, the second special symbol is the disapproval result. Make sure that the game does not occur twice with the special symbol.

[Process during second change]
FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second variation in process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  After determining that the variation time of the second special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced second flag of the second special symbol is on. (Step S551 b). The forced removal flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S 366 a of the above-described first priority determination process (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S 551 b), main control MPU 4100 a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with out, and turns the forced off flag into the off state. The setting is made (step S 552 b).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502 b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the second special symbol in fluctuation is replaced by the first special symbol that is subsequently fluctuated by the first special symbol, the stop symbol determined at the start of fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is torn off replace.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is being changed in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forcible disengagement flag of the second special symbol is on (step S1111b ). The forced removal flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S 366 a of the above-described first priority determination process (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S1111 b), main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with out, and turns the forced out flag into the off state. The setting is made (step S1112b). In addition, when the forced removal flag of the second special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S1111 b), the second special symbol is not included in the collision determination process at the start of the change (step S307 b of the second change start process). It is the result.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the out-of-stop symbol determined in the process of step S307 b or step S1112 b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113 b). Therefore, it is a case where the second special symbol in change is replaced by the first special symbol which is later changed by the first special symbol started to change, and the change stop of the first special symbol is more than the change stop timing of the second special symbol. When the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with the removal.

  Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

  As described above, the special symbol whose forced release flag is set to the on state is replaced with the shift stop symbol at the change stop timing. Since such special symbols are the stop symbols before replacement (a small hit, a big hit), the display content (such as reach effect) of characters etc displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the change stop time There may be a sense of incongruity with the display content of the For example, it is unnatural if it suddenly switches to defeat although the character on the player's side is superior in battle production and is near the victory. Since many players recognize the variation result by effect display such as a character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is desirable to avoid the unnaturalness (uncomfortable feeling) that occurs in the transition of the effect display.

  Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the process of delaying the variation result notification timing (effect indication representing a misplacement) of the special symbol by the effect indication of the character or the like in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is delayed from the variation stop timing of the special symbol. Run.

[Forced off stage production addition processing]
FIG. 175 (A) is a flow chart showing a procedure of forced removal effect addition processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The forced removal effect addition processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a of peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the forced release flag is set to the on state with respect to the special symbol replaced with the stop symbol which is hit and stopped at the variation stop timing. When the forced release flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the off state (NO in step S3321), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the forced control flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on in the peripheral control MPU 4140a (YES in step S3321), the special symbol for which the forced release flag is set on is It is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an object to be variably displayed (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol varies in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. Then, when the special symbol whose forced removal flag is set to the on state is not a target to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4140a adds the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the special symbol whose forced release flag is set to the on state is a target to be variably displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322). An out-of-box notification effect is set (step S3323), and the process ends.

  Here, the additional release notification effect is an effect (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in the battle effect of the character) informing the deviation in a predetermined period by the effect display such as a character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Show. The display contents excluding the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

  FIG. 175 (B) is a timing chart of the special symbol variation and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional release notification effect is set in the above-described forced release effect addition processing.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that switches from the hit stop symbol to the off stop symbol at the change stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the effect during change is a game It is highly likely that the effect is that the player is expected (a character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). Even if such an effect is being executed, it is unnatural when the out-of-focus confirmation effect (defeat of the player's character) is executed suddenly at the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, an additional out-of-focus notification effect is executed after the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the transition from the expected effect (predominant) to the expected effect (defeat) to be the effect transition without a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to provide the effect in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort (unnaturalness).

<Effect by priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the special symbol that derives an advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed by comparing the result derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is Since the variation stop is performed with the out pattern, the special symbol for deriving the big hit by the variation stop timing as in the basic control pattern is not processed into the removal result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original game characteristics (game characteristics) of the gaming machine than the basic control pattern.

  In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the special symbol that derives an advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Not limited to. When deriving a big hit together, priority may be given to the special symbol that has started changing first, or the priority result may be ranked according to the game mode, and the special symbol to be prioritized may be determined according to the rank. .

  In addition, when the effect of the special symbol which is forced to be distracted is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the additional disapproval notification effect is set so as to end the character display effect delayed from the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Thereby, even if the effect display accompanying the hit result can be transitioned to the effect display for deriving the outlier result, it is possible for the player who reads the result from the effect display such as a character or the like to recognize the outlier without discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the strange effect presentation.

<Suspend control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed by the hit result that one special symbol is derived, the other special symbol stops the fluctuation, and features a control structure that resumes the remaining fluctuation after the corresponding game is over. Do.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the on state in the processing of step S100a. In the first embodiment described above, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol in the outlying symbol forcibly, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the first (2) Since the game on the side of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) while the hit game is being performed on the side of the special symbol, no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends the present process when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the first embodiment described above, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the out-of-place symbol is executed, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment (1) While the hit game is being performed on the special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, although the other special symbol suspends fluctuation with the occurrence of a hit game on the side of one special symbol, the corresponding game will continue if the effect performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after resumption There is a possibility that it may not be appropriate as a later effect.

  Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the restart effect changing process is executed to change the effect after restart of the interrupted special symbol from the specified effect which has been selected at the start of fluctuation and has been performed before the interruption.

[Resume effect change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the restart effect changing process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The restart effect change processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a hit is currently being played (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the interlock flag is set to the on state at the start of the hit game, and is set to the off state at the end. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the on state. If the hit game is not in progress (NO in step S3331), there is no suspended change to be subjected to the effect change, and the process ends.

  Next, if the hit is a hit game (YES in step S3331), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether there is a suspended change (step S3332). This may be determined whether the first processing flag or the second processing flag is "2". The first processing flag or the first processing is performed when the first processing during fluctuation (FIG. 129) or the second processing during fluctuation (FIG. 137) is performed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating) The 2 processing flag is set to "2". Then, if there is no suspended change (NO in step S3332), this process is ended because there is no target of the effect change.

  Next, if there is a suspended fluctuation (YES in step S3332), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the fluctuation is a hit (step S3333). Then, if it is a hit (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether the hit is more advantageous to the player than the hit currently being played (step S3334). Here, the judgment as a hit that is advantageous for the player may be a benefit that can be obtained by the player, a predetermined priority, etc., as in the determination of which special symbol to prioritize in the above-mentioned priority control pattern. Be done accordingly.

  When peripheral control MPU 4140a derives a winning game advantageous to the player than the currently-running fluctuation game (YES in step S3334), step-up effect as an effect after resumption Are set (step S3335), and the process ends.

  In addition, when the surrounding control MPU 4140a derives a hit game which is not the same as the currently running hit game (NO in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a bonus effect as the effect after resumption (step S3336), this processing ends.

  In addition, when the suspended control derives a release (NO in step S3333), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a related effect as the effect after resumption (step S3337), and ends the present process.

[Example of resuming production]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects after restart in the restart effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, the second special symbol variation that derives the hit first is executed, and at the stop timing of the variation, the variation of the first special symbol to be started later is interrupted leaving the remaining time t as an example. Explain to.

  Case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, and then big hit B occurs due to the first special symbol. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to a change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, a step-up effect that appears to have evolved from small hit C to big hit B is set to be executed . Specifically, the wave after the small hit game changes to a rough wave, and the effect that a big hit arrives is performed.

  Case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, the big hit A occurs due to the previous second special symbol, and then the big hit B occurs due to the first special symbol. In the jackpot A of the second special symbol and the jackpot B of the first special symbol, the jackpot A of the second special symbol is provided with advantageous benefits for the player. In this case, it is as if the big hit game of the first special symbol was granted accompanying the big hit game of the second special symbol as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after reopening. Set the bonus effect to be shown to be executed. Specifically, a rough wave after a big hit game is once settled and changed to a rough wave again, and an effect that a big hit arrives is performed. In addition, in the bonus effect, particularly when the interruption variation derives a small hit, the release timing of the big winning opening 2103 at the small hit game is notified by countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. A small hit game can be shown as an additional benefit added to the hit game which is executed at the time of fluctuation interruption.

  As described above, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the first special symbol side hit game and the second special symbol side hit game are a series of hits (the action of the attack device 2100 in the double hit game is a series of actions). The production is made to appear as if it were there. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the rendition after resuming becomes the rendition which is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to show the successive hits in a series of hits to enhance the interest, so the game is highly playable. A game can be provided.

  Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, a small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, but the first special symbol to be interrupted at this time is the disengaging result. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to a change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, a related effect such as an aftermath of a small hit game (such as expecting development from a small hit game) Set to run. Specifically, after the small hit game, a wave rises temporarily but returns gently, and an effect is performed without shifting to a new hit game.

  In the case where the suspended change derives the out result as in the case (C) described above, a rendering effect that brings relevance to the front and back hit games such as step-up effects and bonus effects can not be obtained. , May resume the fluctuation.

  In the following, with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181, as a modification of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern which ends the fluctuation without restarting when the interrupted fluctuation is derived will be described. Do. A different control process will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a first interlocking setting process in a modification of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol already determined at the start of the change of the first special symbol is off. (Step S1121a). Then, if it is an off (YES in step S1121a), the determined off symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). Then, the process concerning the fluctuation | variation stop of a 1st special symbol is performed by the process after step S1004a.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a continues the current state, that is, the aforementioned interruption, when the determined stop symbol of the first special symbol in change is not the disjunction, that is, it is the hit (NO in step S1121a). As in the control pattern, the process is temporarily stopped (suspended state) (step S1021a), and the process ends.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second interlocking setting process in a modification of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol already determined at the start of the change of the second special symbol is off. (Step S1121 b). Then, if it is an off (YES in step S1121 b), the determined off symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122 b). Then, the process concerning the fluctuation | variation stop of a 2nd special symbol is performed by the process after step S1004 b.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a continues the current state, ie, the above-mentioned interruption, when the determined stop symbol of the second special symbol in change is not a disconnection, that is, a hit (NO in step S1121b). As in the control pattern, the process is temporarily stopped (suspended state) (step S1021b), and the process ends.

  Thus, in the modification of the suspension control pattern of this embodiment, the control for forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the variation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits in the above-mentioned basic control pattern, and suspension The combination control with the control to temporarily stop the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one hit in the control pattern and to restart after the corresponding game is performed.

  In the modified example, it is stopped only when the other special symbol comes off at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one hit, and it is interrupted when it comes to a hit. As a result, the aforementioned related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. For this reason, the restart effect due to the fluctuation interruption is either the step-up effect or the bonus effect, and it is possible to set the execution of the restart effect itself as the advance notice effect (hit determination effect) having a high degree of expectation.

<Effect by suspension control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably executed as a result based on all acquired random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the simultaneously changing special symbols is forcibly set to be disassociated regardless of the acquired random number, but in the suspension control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( There is no overturning of the hit judgment result based on random numbers. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  Further, in the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed according to the hit result that one special symbol is derived, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuation is resumed after the corresponding game is over. At this time, the effect (resumption effect) corresponding to the resumed fluctuation is newly set according to the previous and subsequent gaming situations (one winning game on the side of the special symbol and the game derived from the fluctuation). As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the user feel uncomfortable even if the suspended change is resumed. In addition, when it is possible to make it appear that the corresponding game is related to the hit game on the side of one of the special symbols by the restart effect when the suspended fluctuation derives the hit game, the interest of the game may be enhanced. it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the re-set control pattern, while a hit game is being performed according to the hit result that one special symbol is derived, the other special symbol interrupts the fluctuation, and the fluctuation interrupted after the corresponding game is reviewed according to the gaming state Control structure to resume after the

[Process during first change]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart of the first variation-in-resetting process in the second embodiment. In addition, about the process in common with the 1st process in a fluctuation | variation (FIG. 129) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the process of step S501a expires. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the OFF state before the process of step S521a (step S561a).

  Here, the re-set flag is set to the on state in the process of step S1134a of the later-described first interlocking setting process (FIG. 183). The reset flag is a flag that is set to the on state when reset setting processing is performed to reset the suspended fluctuation time according to the game state.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the reset flag is in the on state (step S1131a). When the re-set flag is on (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended) as in the above-described suspend control pattern (step S1021a). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the re-setting flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first fluctuation timer (step S1132a). Then, the obtained timer value is reset in accordance with the game state (step S1133a), and the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134a), followed by terminating the present process. Here, the processing of step S1132a to step S1134a is referred to as re-set setting processing. It should be noted that the target to be reset in the suspended fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control content that takes fluctuation time, such as fluctuation pattern.

  As described above, in the re-set control pattern, when the change of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the re-set setting process for the change after resumption is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the off state, and is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and execution of the first variable processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, fluctuation). Is resumed).

[Process during second change]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a second variation-in-resetting process in the re-set control pattern according to the second embodiment. The same processing as in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521 b until the variation time of the second special symbol in the process of step S501 b times out. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the OFF state before the process of step S521 b (step S561 b).

  Here, the re-set flag is set to the on state in the process of step S1134b of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the on state when reset setting processing is performed to reset the suspended fluctuation time according to the game state.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a second interlocking setting process in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the reset flag is in the on state (step S1131b). When the re-set flag is on (YES in step S1131 b), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended) as in the above-described suspend control pattern (step S1021 b). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the re-set flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131 b), main control MPU 4100 a acquires the timer value of the second fluctuation timer (step S1132 b). Then, the obtained timer value is reset in accordance with the gaming state (step S1133b), and the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134b), followed by terminating the present process.

  Thus, in the re-set control pattern, when the change of the second special symbol is interrupted, first, the re-set setting process for the change after resumption is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the off state, and is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second fluctuation processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, fluctuation) Is resumed).

<Effect by reset control pattern>
According to the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment, it is possible to change and execute the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated similarly to the above-mentioned interruption control pattern as a result based on the acquired random numbers. Therefore, the re-set control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  In addition, the re-set control pattern changes the remaining fluctuation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the game state. Here, the change interruption of the special symbol is caused by the hit game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode after the corresponding game has been shifted to another game mode. Therefore, when the fluctuation due to the fluctuation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is resumed as it is, the player may feel discomfort. Therefore, according to the re-set control pattern, the control content such as the fluctuation time is reviewed with respect to the fluctuation to be resumed after the hit game, so that the fluctuation corresponding to the gaming state to be executed is provided without giving the player a sense of discomfort be able to. In addition, since the degree of freedom in the rendition at the time of resumption increases more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Specifically, it may be reviewed in accordance with the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described above (FIG. 154 (E)). For example, if the variation leading out of the second special symbol out results are interrupted, if the game mode after transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it will be reset to long-time variation, and the game mode after transition will rush In the case of the mode, it may be reset to a short time fluctuation.

  Also, if the game mode is the rush mode, I would like to digest the number of times ST and make the small hit C and small hit D of the second special symbol occur frequently. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 186, the reset setting in the case where the first special symbol for deriving a big hit occurs in a state where the number of STs remains in the rush mode will be described.

  FIG. 186 is a timing chart for explaining the reset setting process of the interruption variation in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. As described above, when the first special symbol for deriving the big hit is generated with the number of ST remaining in the rush mode, the first special symbol of the first special symbol is preferably digested after as many times as the number of ST given in the current game I want to welcome a big hit game (ie, grant of new ST number).

  Therefore, when a big hit fluctuation occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining ST number is less than a predetermined number (here, less than 5), the big hit fluctuation is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol The fluctuation time after restart, which is reset when it is set, is set to t1 for a long time. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which a small hit game can be expected to occur.

  Then, while the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol resumes the fluctuation of t1 for a long time, the small hitting fluctuation of the second special symbol occurs, and the stop timing of the small hitting fluctuation is reached. And again, the big hit fluctuation is interrupted. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short fluctuation of 1 second (Fig. 154 (E)), so the ST number is digested with good tempo.

  Then, when the number of remaining STs is one, the fluctuation time after restart to be reset is set to the short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time that does not end the fluctuation even if the second special symbol fluctuation in which the number of times of ST becomes 0 is generated is there. As a result, the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol causing frequent interruptions can be stopped in the definite change state determined to be the big hit result, that is, the ST number is effective, thus disturbing the original gameplay of the gaming machine I have not.

  As described above, according to the re-set control pattern, the fluctuation time after the fluctuation resumption of the special symbol to be interrupted can be adjusted according to the gaming state, and therefore, not only the fluctuation control of the special symbol to be interrupted, The variation efficiency of the special symbol in the gaming state can also be adjusted. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly cope with various game possibilities, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the re-set control pattern as well as the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, the presentation (resumption presentation) corresponding to the resumed fluctuation is played before and after the game situation (one special symbol side hit game and the game for which the fluctuation is derived) By setting a new setting in accordance with the above, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the user feel uncomfortable. In addition, when it is possible to make it appear that the corresponding game is related to the hit game on the side of one of the special symbols by the restart effect when the suspended fluctuation derives the hit game, the interest of the game may be enhanced. it can.

  As described above, according to the present invention, a control structure employing one or a combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the re-set control pattern described in the first and second embodiments is provided. Between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, it is possible to prevent the specific game (small hit game, big hit game) from being generated redundantly, and to allow simultaneous change. Here, even if winning of the game ball to the winning area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are on standby state to the winning area. The difference between the winning tempo of the game ball (i.e., the game tempo of the player) and the lottery game tempo causes a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present invention, the simultaneous change control can prevent the above-mentioned decrease in the interest of the game.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, although the game mode is shifted from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode triggered by the end of the big hit game, the rush preparation mode is not triggered by the end of the big hit game. It may be made to shift to the rush mode. Such an example will be described below as a third embodiment.

[Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the player operates the handle device 500 to play a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium. A frame-shaped front component 1110A, which partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game area 1100 into which the character is inserted, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

  The game panel 1200 of this example is a plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is divided by the front component 1110A, and a transparent panel plate 1210 formed smaller than the front component 1110A. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000 A function display unit 1180 disposed at a position that can be viewed from the player through the transparent panel board 1210 and can be viewed from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) mounted on the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the back side Substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIG. 187, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position along the way. A center character 2500 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center character 2500.

  Further, behind the center character 2500, there is provided an effect display device 1900 for displaying effects with a large area in front view so as to attract attention from the player. As the effect display device 1900, a suitable display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decoration symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

  Further, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided which has a smaller display area than the liquid crystal display device 1900 to realize an auxiliary display effect. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information and the like obtained by combining the decoration symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like.

  On the other hand, the second big winning opening 2103b and the second starting opening 2102 of the second attacker device 2100b are provided in order from the upstream from the right area to the lower area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100. On the other hand, from the left side to the lower side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, from the upstream, the regular drawing gate 2301, the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special opening winning opening 2101b), the first attacker A first large winning opening 2103a of the device 2100a is provided. Also, in the lower left area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided.

  Here, the first starting opening 2101 is a regular winning opening 2101a in which the game ball is always able to win at a position substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the liquid crystal display device 1900 It is configured to have a special winning opening 2101 b in which the game ball can be won only when the electric winning combination 2111 is operated. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101 a, special opening winning opening 2101 b), the first starting opening sensor 3131 (see FIG. 188) enters the same winning ball (winning) It is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the first special symbol random number described below is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. The 1st special symbol lottery (1st special determination) about the hit which becomes the operation trigger of one attack device 2100a is performed, and the 1st special symbol dynamically displayed on the 1st special symbol display 1185 changes only for a predetermined time Is displayed. When the player wins a hit, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of the first attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 188) described later, which is configured to have a solenoid or the like, is performed, thereby making the first attacker The device 2100a is opened and closed. In this way, after the first attack device 2100a is opened and closed, it is possible to shift to the time saving game state where improvement of the easiness of winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is achieved. .

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment, a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided, and the first special symbol is changed by starting the change of the second special symbol. It is not possible to set the symbol variation according to the result of the symbol lottery as the variation start waiting state.

  Further, the common drawing gate 2301 is provided above the special prize winning opening 2101 b, and is configured to allow passage of a game ball driven into the left side area of the center character 2500. Then, when the game ball is received (passed) to the common drawing gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 188) that the game ball is received.

  At this time, if the predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normally based on the random number for the regular symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within the predetermined numerical range, if the predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied. A determination process (normal determination) is performed on a normal hit which is an operation trigger of the motorized part) 2111, and the normal symbol dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the player wins a normal hit, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of the ordinary combination product drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 188) configured to include a solenoid and the like is performed. By this drive control, acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is permitted through an opening operation in which the pair of movable pieces 2111 pivots the upper end outward around the lower end.

  That is, the special prize winning opening 2101b is played only when there is an opening operation by the movable piece 2111 (rotation operation to the outside of the upper end centering on the lower end of the movable piece 2111) in response to the normal hit. It is provided to be able to win a ball. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 can not enter the gaming ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (a refusal ball aspect) and a mode enabling the same ball (permission It can be said that it is operable to switch between the ball mode and the ball mode, and is maintained in the refusal mode as long as the drive control of the common item driving mechanism 3114 is not performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), almost no winning of the game ball occurs. On the other hand, in the time saving game state, the game ball is to be hit in the left side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 as in the normal game state (non time saving game state). The game characteristic centered on the game (the first special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball to the special prize winning opening 2101b whose improvement of the easiness of acceptance is being achieved is realized.

  In addition, the second starting opening 2102 is provided below the second large winning opening 2103b of the second attachment device 2100b, and is driven into the right area of the center character 2500, and the second large opening of the second attachment device 2100b. The game ball which has not been accepted by the winning opening 2103 b is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when the game ball is entered into the second start port 2102, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 3132 (see FIG. 188). At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the second attacker based on the random number for the second special symbol periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. The second special symbol lottery (the second special determination) is performed for the hit serving as the operation trigger of the device 2100b, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Ru. Then, when the hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the drive control of the second attacker drive mechanism 2121b (see FIG. 188) described later, which is configured to have a solenoid etc., is performed. 2) The attacker device 2100b is opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is the left side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100 when it is open below the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special opening winning opening 2101b). In the open state above the first attachment device 2100a which is capable of receiving the game ball hit into the area and the second start port 2102, the game ball hit into the right area of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100. And a second attachment device 2100b capable of receiving the second information.

  The first attacker device 2100a has a first large winning opening 2103a, a first opening / closing member 2106a operable between a closed state and an open state, and a first attacker drive mechanism 2121a (opening / closing drive for driving the first opening / closing member 2106a 188, and is normally closed by the first opening and closing member 2106a so that the game ball can not be received in the first large winning opening 2103a.

  The second attacker device 2100a has a second large winning opening 2103b, a second opening / closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an open state, and a second attachment driving mechanism 2121b (opening / closing drive of the second opening / closing member 2106b) 188, and is normally closed by the second opening / closing member 2106b so that the game ball can not be received in the second large winning opening 2103b. When drive control of the second attachment driving mechanism 2121b is performed, the second opening / closing member 2106b rotates the upper end in the right direction (clockwise) centering on the lower end of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2103b Acceptance will be accepted.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment, as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special opening winning opening 2101b) When one special winning opening 2103a is opened (the first special symbol side hit game), the second special winning opening 2103b as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 At the time of opening (the second special symbol side hit game), it is decided to adjust the number of balls for which the game ball can be received by changing the control mode according to their opening.

  That is, when a big hit is obtained as the determination result of the first special determination, the first attacker device 2100a causes the player to open the first large winning opening 2103a by the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 2106a. It is intended to generate a big hit gaming state as an advantageous benefit. In addition, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a determination result of the second special determination, the second attacker device 2100 b opens the second large winning opening 2103 b by the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2106 b. A big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit advantageous to the player. Therefore, three gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (first starting opening sensor 3131) and the second starting opening 2102 (second starting opening sensor 3132), When the game ball wins in the first large winning opening 2103a (count sensor 2122a) and the second large winning opening 2103b (count sensor 2122b) provided for execution of the big hit gaming state and small hit gaming state is 15 gaming balls It is supposed to be paid out. It should be noted that ten gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133).

  By the way, in the time saving game state (the rush preparation mode in the third embodiment), the variation time of the normal symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2111 is opened after the variation stop of the normal symbol (special winning opening) The time maintained at the outer position where the game ball can be won in 2101b) is "5.5 seconds". That is, the game ball always wins normally when the game ball passes the regular drawing gate 2301, and then the time it takes for the passed game ball to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2111 is shorter (0 By stopping the variation of the normal symbol in .08 seconds), the game ball which is the trigger of the normal hit is made possible to win the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 as it is.

  It should be noted that after the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (the position where the gaming ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", the movable piece 2111 is in the closed state (the gaming ball is in the special winning opening 2101b) Act to be an unacceptable position).

  Therefore, in the time-saving game state (lash preparation mode), the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is maintained at the outer position for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, hitting the left facilitates the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time saving game state (the rush preparation mode), the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 2500 so that many game balls win the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (so-called "right It is considered to be advantageous for the player to strike ").

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in the third embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is predetermined fluctuation time By setting the second), it is impossible to accept the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101.

  It should be noted that depending on whether or not the game is in the non-time-short game state, it is different whether it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the left or right of the center character 2500 depending on whether or not it is the probability variation game state. In the normal gaming state (normal mode) which is not a non-time-saving gaming state and not a probability changing gaming state, the left side of the center character 2500 is set so that many gaming balls will win the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. It is considered advantageous for the player to aim and shoot the game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Also, in the high probability non-time game state (rush mode) in which the non-time-short game state and the big hit winning probability is higher than the normal game state, there are many game balls in the second starting opening 2102 It is considered more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right strike") aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 to win a prize.

  In addition, as the time saving function, control to increase the winning probability of the above normal symbol than the non time saving game state, control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the above normal symbol than the non time saving game state, of the first starting opening 2101 Control to extend the period to maintain the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b at the outer position (open position) than the non-time short game state, the number of times to move the movable piece 2111 to the outer position (open position) non-time short game state It is also possible to execute any one or any combination (or all) of more increasing control.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the back side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened and the opening which penetrates the back wall 3010a in the front and back direction where the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which a 3010 b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back up rendering unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010, and a back box A lower back rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010 b within the 3010, and a lower right back corner disposed between the lower back rendering unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the front right lower corner of the back box 3010 A presentation unit 3600 is mainly provided. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position where it can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 188) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 is provided. There is.

  The game board 4 of the third embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can roll sufficiently between the outer periphery of the left side of the center role 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A) A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board 1210 in the area on the left side of the center product 2500 in the game area 1100.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500 (is hit with a strength higher than a predetermined strength), this game ball is upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center character 2500 from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width allowing game balls to flow one ball at a time, and the game ball having flowed down the right passage 2545 is decelerated by the stopper 1114, and then the second attack device 2100b is started. Is guided to the movable region of the second opening and closing member 2106 b. The gaming ball flowing down the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and converted to the downward direction, and then guided to the movable area of the second opening / closing member 2106 b of the second attacker device 2100 b. Therefore, when the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attack device 2100b is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed down the right passage 2545 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2103b with a probability close to 100%.

  In the movable area of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attachment device 2100b, the gaming ball not accepted by the second opening / closing member 2106b at the second large winning opening 2103b is decelerated again by the second guiding portion 2902, , And guided to the second start port 2102. The game balls flowing down the right side passage 2545 are guided to the second starting opening 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless entering the second large winning opening 2103 b.

  As described above, in the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the game ball which is right-handed and flows down the right side passage 2545 is received by the second starting opening 2102 with a probability of almost 100%. Note that the game ball that has been hit to the right is not limited to one that can be received by the second starting opening 2102 with a probability of almost 100%, and may be received by the second starting opening 2102 at a rate smaller than that. For example, it may be made to be able to be received by the 2nd starting opening 2102 at a rate of about 1/8.

  Then, as a result of such right-handed gaming being performed, when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2102 and a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a determination result of any of the above-mentioned second special determinations, a second attack By opening and closing the second large winning opening 2103b by the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as a benefit advantageous to the player is generated.

[Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, among the control configurations of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment described above, different control configurations will be described.

  The attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is driven into the left side area of the center character 2500 in the gaming area 1100 when the attacking device is open below the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101 a, special opening winning opening 2101 b) Of the first attachment device 2100a, which is enabled to receive the game ball, and the game ball, which is driven into the right area of the center service 2500 in the game area 1100 when open, above the second starting port 2102 And a second attacking device 2100b. Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the game ball received to the first big winning opening 2103a of the first attachment device 2100a, and the second winning of the first count sensor 2122a and the second attachment device 2100b. A detection signal from a detection signal from the second count sensor 2122b for detecting the game ball received in the mouth 2103b is via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b It is supposed to be input.

  In addition, main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from main control I / O port 4100b to main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the first attacker device is transmitted through panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to a first attachment drive mechanism 2121a for opening and closing the first opening and closing member 2106a of 2100a and a second attachment driving mechanism 2121b for opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second attachment device 2100a. There is.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the third embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the on state in the processing of step S100a. In the first embodiment described above, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol in the outlying symbol forcibly, but in the third embodiment, the first special symbol in the second embodiment As with the interruption control pattern, while the game is being played on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  In addition, while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, measurement of the first variation time is interrupted. In other words, while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the process of subtracting the first fluctuation timer (step S521a) which has been executed in the first fluctuation process (FIG. 129) is not executed. As described above, when the measurement of the first fluctuation time is interrupted, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is controlled to the non-display state (the unlit state) or the first special symbol display 1185 is shifted to stop the symbol display The variation of the first special symbol may be temporarily suspended to interrupt the game on the first special symbol side by letting the character be controlled, or the control content of the first special symbol display 1185 corresponding to the variation pattern is The LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is not displayed by interrupting the switching of the control data shown in time series and repeatedly executing the control of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the control data being executed The current fluctuation (such as fluctuation speed) may be continued without being controlled to the state or causing the first special symbol display 1185 to stop and display the shifted symbol. In addition, while the game is being played on the second special symbol side, when stopping the variation of the first special symbol, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the decoration is varied corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. It is possible to temporarily suspend the variation of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) by changing the symbol (the first decorative symbol) to the non-display state or stopping and displaying the off symbol, or corresponding to the variation pattern. The control contents of the first special symbol display 1185 are interrupted in time series and the switching of control data is interrupted, and the control of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the control data being executed is repeatedly executed. The current fluctuation (fluctuation speed etc.) is continued without controlling the LED of the special symbol display 1185 in the non-display state (turned off) or making the first special symbol display 1185 stop displaying the shifted symbol. Switching the control data in which the control mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and changing corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown in time series Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by repeatedly executing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) based on the control data being executed by interrupting the control and responding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol The present fluctuation (such as fluctuation speed) may be continued without changing the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) that fluctuates from being displayed to the non-display state or causing the display to be stopped and displayed with the outlying symbol. In addition, while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, while the effect related to the second big hit game is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the decoration which fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol Display the variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) to be displayed by reducing the symbol (first decorative symbol) on the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like or corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol A control may be performed to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (paused) by interrupting or interrupting the game.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the third embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends the present process when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the first embodiment described above, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed in which the second special symbol is forcibly moved and stopped with the disappointing symbol, but in the third embodiment As with the interruption control pattern, while the game is being played on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  In addition, while the hit game is being played on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side may be interrupted by stopping the variation of the second special symbol, or the second variation time While interrupting the measurement and interrupting the switching of the control data in which the control content of the second special symbol display 1186 is shown in time series, the current fluctuation (such as fluctuation speed) is stopped without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol You may make it continue. In addition, while hitting the game on the first special symbol side, when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the decorative symbol executed corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 The change of (the second decorative symbol) may be stopped, and the measurement of the second change time is interrupted and the switching of the control data in which the control content of the second special symbol display 1186 is shown in time series is interrupted. When continuing the present fluctuation (such as fluctuation speed) without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol by doing, the decorative symbol executed in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( By interrupting the switching of control data in which the control mode of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is shown in time series, the current fluctuation (such as fluctuation speed) may be continued without stopping the fluctuation. In addition, while the hit game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the effects related to the first big hit game are executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the second special symbol is executed corresponding to the fluctuation The variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is displayed on the upper left of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, or the variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is executed corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol. Control to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted by interrupting the display of the second special symbol May be performed.

[First variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of first variation pattern setting processing according to the third embodiment. The same processing as the first variation pattern setting processing (FIG. 128) of the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the variation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the gaming state if the flag indicating that the big hit is won is set (YES in step S401a) (step S402a ), It is determined whether or not the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (step S408a). The rush preparation mode in the third embodiment indicates a gaming state (high probability time short gaming state) in which both the probability changing function and the time saving function are operating. Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether the probability change flag is in the on state and the time saving flag is in the on state.

  If the current game mode is not the rush preparation mode (high probability time short game state) (NO in step S408a), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S404a without operating the time reduction flag. In this case, when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the above-mentioned first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130), the time saving flag is set to the OFF state.

  On the other hand, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high probability time short game state) (YES in step S408a), the main control MPU 4100a turns the time short flag off to stop the time saving function. After that (step S409a), the process proceeds to step S404a.

  Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high probability time short game state), when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result is started ( Stop the time saving function and shift to the rush mode (high probability non time saving state) when triggered by the start of the variable display. The probability change flag is set to the off state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 by the processing of step S506a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129). That is, the rush mode (high probability non-short state) starts the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol lottery that becomes a big hit and then starts the big hit game based on the result of the first special symbol lottery Continue until

[Game specification of special symbol]
FIG. 192 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the third embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment described above will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), in the big hit of the third embodiment, the first big hit A and the first big hit B which can be generated in the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery can be generated A total of four types of jackpots are provided: a second jackpot C and a second jackpot D.

  The first jackpot A occurs with a probability of 12% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol A at this time. In addition, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 88% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, at this time the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol B.

  The second big hit C occurs with a probability of 5% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol C. Also, the second big hit D occurs with a probability of 95% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, at this time the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol D.

  These four types of big hit transition the game state after the end of the big hit game to a definite change state with probability of 100%, and continue the definite change state until the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the big hit game is executed 70 times It is provided to be able to give a function. In addition, a time-saving function is provided for jackpots other than the jackpot of the second special symbol (second jackpot C, second jackpot D). That is, the time saving function is not provided to the jackpot of the second special symbol generated in the rush mode. As described above, when the big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol occurs in the rush mode, the rush mode is set again even after the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the opening mode of large winning opening 2103 (large winning opening 2103a, large winning opening 2103b) is set according to the type of the big hit, the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit C, and the second As for the big hit D, open patterns A, B, C and D are set respectively. Here, the number of winning balls obtainable by the player is changed by the opening pattern, and the interest of the big hit game is enhanced.

  The opening patterns A to D are set so that the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 (big winning opening 2103 a, big winning opening 2103 b) is long and the player can obtain a sufficient winning ball. For example, the opening pattern A is a big hit game in which 15 round games are played, and the opening time and the maximum winning number for each round are set so that the player can obtain 2000 balls as a winning ball, and the opening pattern B is The opening time and the maximum number of winnings of each round are set so that the player can earn 500 balls as a winning ball in a big hit game in which four round games are played, and the opening pattern C is a row of 11 round games. The opening time and the maximum number of winnings of each round are set so that the player can obtain 1500 balls as a winning ball in a big hit game to be played, and the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which seven round games are played. The opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings are set so that 1000 balls can be obtained as a winning ball.

  In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode) of the third embodiment, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is a normal gaming state (low probability non-short state; normal mode The second small hit C is frequently generated by changing the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) which is shorter than the high probability time-short state (lash preparation mode). In addition, the opening mode of the large winning opening 2103b in the small hit game is provided such that one opening time is short, and it is possible to obtain a winning ball by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning that the player intends to win in the large winning opening 2103b by hitting the gaming ball into the gaming area, but is obtained in the gaming area where the large winning opening 2103b is disposed. It means a prize that can be won when the game ball that has been struck has accidentally flowed down the possible prize winning position when the large winning opening 2103 b is opened. In the second small hit C, if the player is hitting the game ball with a right hit, the number of rounds and the opening time of the big winning opening 2103b can be expected so that a prize of about 1 to 2 balls can be expected accidentally. Is set. In the case where about one or two balls are won in the large winning opening 2103 b by the second small hit C, it is possible to obtain a prize ball of about 15 to 30 balls.

  Also, in the rush mode, it is possible to promote the accidental winning based on the second small hit C generated in the rush mode by continuously letting the player hit the game ball with a right strike, and an award that can be obtained The number of balls becomes the majority of the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtainable during the rush mode. In the third embodiment, the second small hit C (30 balls at the maximum) frequently occurs in the rush mode, and the winning balls (2000 balls) or more by the big hit as described above can be expected, so most of the awards are There is no decrease in the interest of gaming due to the occurrence of small hits where balls can not be obtained. Rather, since the small hit game that occurs a plurality of times causes one's interest in the game to continue rather than one big hit game, it is possible to enhance the interest of a series of games in the rush mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the third embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). If the game mode is the normal mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 seconds to 120 seconds according to the presence or absence of reach effect, and in the rush preparation mode, the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost 3 seconds are set in the case, and 300 seconds or 600 seconds are set in the case of the big hit. Further, as the variation time of the second special symbol, 600 seconds is set when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 5 seconds is set when the game mode is the rush mode. When the game mode is the rush mode, the fluctuation time is not set since the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not newly started.

  As described above, the above-described specs (hit probability, hit type, fluctuation time, and the like) of the special symbol game provided to the player change in accordance with the game state. The transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is the special ST number (70 times in this case) granted Triggered by the end of the symbol lottery (variation).

  The number of winning balls that can be acquired during the rush mode may be changed by varying the variation time of the first special symbol when entering the rush mode. For example, in the above-described example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first jackpot, the fluctuation of either one of 300 seconds and 600 seconds according to the fluctuation pattern determined regardless of the type of the first jackpot Although what was set to time was shown, you may make it correspond fluctuation time to each classification of the 1st big hit beforehand. Specifically, in the case of the first big hit, if it is the first big hit A, it is determined as a variation pattern having a variation time of 300 seconds, while if it is the first big hit B, it is a variation pattern having a variation time of 600 seconds. As decided, it is possible to provide the fluctuation pattern table according to the type of the first big hit, and in this case about 500 balls less than the first big hit A which can obtain about 2000 winning balls. Even if it becomes the first big hit B which can be obtained, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in the rush mode which is executed over a long period of time, so it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game fun. In this way, as the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game is smaller (the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game is lower), the longer fluctuation time is selected and control is made so that the duration of the rush mode becomes longer. It may be possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in the rush mode than a big hit with a large number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game (a big hit with a high expectation value of the prize balls obtainable in the big hit game).

  In the case of a first big hit, if it is the first big hit A, it will be determined as a variation pattern having a variation time of 600 seconds, while if it is a first big hit B, it will be a variation pattern having a variation time of 300 seconds May be provided with a variation pattern table according to the type of the first big hit, in which case it will be executed for a longer period of time when it becomes the first big hit A where about 2000 prize balls can be obtained As it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls during the rush mode, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls which can not be obtained by one big hit game only when the first special lottery result is the first big hit A. This makes it possible to improve the game interest. That is, as the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game is large (the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game is high), the longer fluctuation time is selected to control the duration of the rush mode to be long. It is also possible to further increase the value (the degree of advantage to the player) of the big hit (the high expected value of the number of winning balls obtainable in the big hit game) with a large number of winning balls obtainable in the big hit game.

  Also, as described above, according to the type of big hit game, the player can obtain the number of award balls that can be obtained, and in this example, about 2000 balls in the big hit game executed when it becomes the first big hit A. It is possible to predict in advance that about 500 balls can be won in the big hit game executed when becoming the first big hit B, but as described above, for each type of the first big hit Since it is not possible to judge the degree of advantage only by the jackpot type by associating the fluctuation time in advance, it is possible to focus on the duration of the rush mode and improve the game interest. That is, since the duration of the rush mode is in proportion to the number of winning balls obtainable during the rush mode, the duration of the rush mode can be noticed.

  In addition to the control to change the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode by changing the variation time of the first special symbol when entering the rush mode as described above, or (1) The second special symbol fluctuation time (second special symbol pattern) which is executed during the rush mode separately from control for changing the number of prize balls obtainable during the rush mode by varying the fluctuation time of the special symbol The number of winning balls that can be acquired during the rush mode may be made different by executing control to make the second special symbol variation pattern table in which the variation time is set different. For example, the rush mode A (high probability non-shorting state A) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always set to 5 seconds as the rush mode (high probability non-short state) and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always 10 It is possible to control in either one of rush mode B (high probability non-short condition B) set to seconds, or it can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and 10 Rush mode A (high probability non-time short state A), which is more likely to be set to 5 seconds than seconds (for example, set to 5 seconds with an 80% probability and set to 10 seconds with a 20% probability), Similar to rush mode A, it can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds as fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and it is highly likely to be set to 10 seconds than 5 seconds (for example, to 10 seconds with 80% probability) Set it to 5 seconds with a probability of 20%) And Yumodo B (high probability non-time reduction state B), may be controlled in one of. As described above, transition control can be made to a plurality of rush modes in which the variation time of the second special symbol differs or the appearance ratio of the variation time of the second special symbol differs, which is advantageous only in the duration of the jackpot type or rush mode As the degree of merit can not be judged, and the degree of advantage can be judged only by comprehensively judging the big hit type, the duration of the rush mode, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is possible to further pay more attention to the game. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds, transition control to the rush mode B is performed, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to a fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds In order to control the shift to the rush mode A, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the variation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. (1) A difference can be made between the degree of advantage of each of the two types of rush modes (lash mode A and rush mode B) that occur triggered by the start of variation of the special symbol, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a variation time of 600 seconds If it is decided on, that is, if the rush mode continues over a long period (in this example, rush mode A), many prize balls can be obtained. To become, it can suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest by paying attention to the occurrence of rush mode.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds, transition control to the rush mode A is performed, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to a fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds In order to control the shift to the rush mode B, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the variation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. (1) Since it is possible to obtain the same level of winning balls even if any of the two types of rush modes (lash mode A and rush mode B) occurs triggered by the start of variation of the special symbol, the rush mode Not only can improve the game interest when there is a problem, but also the variation time of the second special symbol in the above two types of rush modes is considered to be the same Duration which is disadvantageous for the player if it is possible to enhance the advantageous degree of short rush mode A. That is, since the number of winning balls obtainable in each of the two types of rush modes is approximately the same, rush mode A executed in a shorter time increases the number of winning balls obtained per unit time and thus is more for the player. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the rush mode A having a short duration because of the advantageous state.

  In addition, if it is the first big hit A (15 rounds), the transition control to the rush mode A is controlled, and if it is the first big hit B (four rounds), the second special symbol of the second special symbol As the variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the first big hit type of the first big hit, that is, a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the release mode (the number of rounds) determined by the big hit type may be provided. In the case of the rush mode, since the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode can be further increased when the first big hit A where about 2000 prize balls can be obtained is reached. A large number of prize balls can be obtained and the first special lottery result is only the first jackpot A, but the number of jackpots that can not be won in one jackpot game The gaming interest becomes possible win of the winning balls can be improved. That is, the number of prize balls obtainable in the first jackpot as the first jackpot is large (the expectation value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the jackpot game is high) is determined to be the type of the jackpot, the second variation time is short The variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol in the rush mode is increased to execute the control to frequently generate the second big hit and the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery, the first big hit It is possible to further increase the jackpot value (the degree of advantage to the player) of the type in which the number of prize balls obtainable among the above is high (the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the jackpot game is high).

  In addition, if it is the first big hit A (15 rounds), it controls to shift to the above rush mode B, and if it is the first big hit B (four rounds), it shifts to the above rush mode B and it controls the second special symbol As the variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided according to a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the first big hit big hit type, that is, the release mode (the number of rounds) determined by the big hit type. In some cases, it is possible to execute during the rush mode even if it becomes the first big hit B which can obtain about 500 balls less than the first big hit A which can obtain about 2000 balls. (2) Since it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in the rush mode by increasing the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun. Thus, the number of prize balls obtainable in the first jackpot as the first jackpot is small (the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the jackpot game is low) and the first variation is as short as possible. (2) The variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol in the rush mode is increased to execute the control to frequently generate the second big hit or the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery, the first Increase the jackpot value (advantagement level to the player) of the type where the number of winning balls that can be won among the big hits is small (the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be won in the big hit game is low). It is also possible to suppress the decrease in the fun of the game based on the big hit of the type in which the number of winning balls is small (the expected value of the number of winning balls obtainable in the big hit game is low).

[Transition of gaming state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194, the transition of the gaming state according to the third embodiment and the control of the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state will be described. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the third embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is the normal game state (normal mode). In the normal gaming state, aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500 and firing a game ball (so-called “left-handed”) causes the game ball to win a prize at the always winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101. Is the best playing method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment is easily achieved by aiming the gaming area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and hitting (so-called “right-handed”) gaming balls along the flow-down path. It is possible. The second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 2102 has a high probability of winning a small hit where a winning ball can be obtained (390/399 in the normal state, 44/45 in the definite variation state). In this case, the player strikes right from the start of the game to aim for winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192 (E) described above, the second special symbol in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) not recommending winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The fluctuation time is set to long time fluctuation (600 seconds). As a result, since it takes a long time to stop and be displayed (if the lottery result becomes clear) when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it is possible to suppress the player from hitting the right. .

  In addition, since the 2nd starting opening 2102 of the 3rd embodiment is always open and winning is easy, in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102, the second in the gaming state which does not recommend the winning Although the variation time of the special symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second start opening 2102 into the easy-to-win state and the hard-to-win state is provided, and a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) not recommending winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 It may be set to a difficult state. In the third embodiment, the player is prevented from changing the configuration and processing involved in controlling the state conversion member and changing the fluctuation time according to the game state in order to provide a game in which the player can easily obtain points. Is induced to play in the best way to play.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a). Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, the normal gaming state is continued, while the result of the first special symbol lottery is a first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) After the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit, transition to the high probability time short game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state (generation of gaming state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability time short gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) gives the player an advantageous benefit for the player of winning the prize ball and giving the probability changing function and the time saving function.

  In the high probability time short game state (a rush preparation mode), as in the normal game state (a normal mode), the game ball 1100 is fired by aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500 (so-called "left strike"), It is the best game method for the player to make the game ball win in the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101.

  Here, when the left-handed game ball passes through the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500, since the time-saving function is activated, the common drawing lottery is derived in the normal symbol lottery (100% probability per common figure in time-shortened state). As a result, the movable piece (normal motorized combination) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, as described above, in the short time game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the winning opening 2101a. Since the player is set high, the player strikes the left to aim for the special winning opening 2101b.

  Therefore, in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 (specially installed winning opening 2101 b). And, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes lost continuously 70 times, it shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In addition, when the first big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the high probability is triggered by the start of the variation of the first special symbol. Transition to the non-time-shortened state (rush mode, second game state). This high probability non-short game state (rush mode) is to be continued until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started.

  As described above, in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the high probability short time gaming state (lash preparation mode) to the high probability non short time gaming state (lash mode) will be described.

  In the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the game ball is hit in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and fired (so-called "right-handed") to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 Is the best way for the player to play the game. In the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 also when the big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or small hit is derived, the second attacker Since the second large winning opening 2103b is opened by the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, the same right strike is performed as in the case of winning a game ball in the second starting opening 2102. That is, in the high probability non-short play state (rush mode), it is sufficient to maintain the right strike. On the other hand, in the gaming state other than the high probability short time gaming state (lash mode) (normal gaming state (normal mode) or high probability short time gaming state (lash preparation mode)), the first strike is achieved by left striking as described above. If it is the best game method for the player to win the game ball in the starting opening 2101, and a big hit is derived in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101, Since the first large winning opening 2103a is opened by the opening and closing operation of the first opening and closing member 2106a of the first attachment device 2100a, the left strike is performed as in the case of winning the game ball in the first starting opening 2101. That is, in the gaming state other than the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), it is sufficient to maintain the left strike. Therefore, it is necessary to switch from left-handed to right-handed when transitioning to the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), and switch from right-to-left when the high probability non-time short game state (lash mode) is ended.

  Here, the second start port 2102 of the third embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500, and the game ball hit to the right in the high probability short time gaming state (lash mode) is substantially The second start hole 2102 is won.

  Therefore, in the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the second special symbol lottery mainly based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is executed. In addition, in the high probability non-short game state, since the first special symbol variation based on the first big hit is under execution, based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 a new first special Without performing the symbol lottery, even if the player has made a left hit, it is not possible to obtain a prize ball in the game of the first special symbol.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), a small hit is always derived if a big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45. Then, in the small hit game generated at this time, the player can obtain a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a winning ball which is smaller than the game balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, when the game state is reached, the player obtains a prize ball by the small hit game every execution of the second special symbol lottery until the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot is over. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in high probability time short state (lash preparation mode), and high probability non-time short In the case of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol that triggers the transition to the gaming state (lash mode), the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S170a) and the first fluctuation start One of 300 seconds and 600 seconds is set as the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern determined by comparing the first fluctuation random number read in step S304a in the process. Ru. In addition, although execution of the second special symbol lottery is recommended in the high probability non-short game condition (lash mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. And in the third embodiment, since it has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special hit based on the first big hit when the variation time of the second special symbol ends. In the first big hit when you execute the big hit game which occurs when the small hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol by interrupting the variation display of the special symbol, and the big hit game which occurs when the big hit is derived Continue to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol based on, and resume the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol when the small hit game or the big hit game is over There is. For this reason, in the high probability non-short game state, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol of up to 60 to 120 times, so up to 60 to 120 small hit games and big hit games occur continuously It can. That is, a series of second special symbol games from the start to the end of the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot become a bonus game capable of acquiring a prize ball. In addition, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol that may fluctuate during that period increases as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the high probability non-short game condition (rush mode) increases. Thus, the number of times a small hit game or a big hit game can be generated continuously increases, and the number of winning balls that the player can obtain increases. In this example, high probability non-time short game is set by the case where it is set to 600 seconds as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the high probability non-short game condition (rush mode) and 300 seconds. Make the state (rush mode) duration different. In this way, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) is made different, and is set to 600 seconds as the variation time of the first special symbol. The number of prize balls that the player can earn is increased more than when set to 300 seconds.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) is a series of the first regardless of the derivation of the second jackpot (second jackpot C, second jackpot D) in the second special symbol lottery 2) It is possible to obtain a prize ball in a small hit game of a special symbol, and the total number of prize balls is equal to or more than the number of prize balls obtainable in a big hit game. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high probability time short gaming state (the rush preparation mode, the first advantageous gaming state) but the high probability non-short gaming state (the rush mode, the second advantageous gaming state).

  The high probability non-short game state (lash mode) is a game state that can be generated when the derivation of the first jackpot is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), so the player is First, a game aimed at winning a game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is performed. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high probability non-short game state (rush mode) triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the first big hit, then, the player plays the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 Play a game aimed at winning a prize.

  When the derivation of the first jackpot is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), high probability non-time short triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot After shifting to the gaming state (rush mode), the game state (lash mode) is continued unless the variation time of the first special symbol is ended. And when the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol based on the 1st big hit ends, the big hit game based on the 1st big hit is executed. For this reason, when the derivation of the first big hit is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (rush preparation mode), it shifts to the high probability non time short game state (rush mode), Not only can you win a prize ball by a series of second special symbol games from the start to the end of the variation time of the first special symbol based on one jackpot, but also by the big hit game based on that first jackpot It is possible to obtain a great number of winning balls since it is also possible to win winning balls. At this time, since the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit becomes the duration of the rush mode (high probability non-short state), the liquid crystal display device 1900 changes from the game mode to the rush mode The elapsed time, the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time controllable to the rush mode), etc. are displayed, and the player is made to recognize that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit. It is supposed to be.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode) ends, after executing the big hit game based on the first big hit, the high probability time short game again Transition to the state (rush preparation mode). For this reason, as long as the result of the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode) does not result in losing continuously for 70 times, there is no transition to the normal game state (normal mode). That is, as long as the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode) is executed 70 times, the high probability time short game Since the transition from the state (lash preparation mode) to the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) is repeated, the transition from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode) is significant. It is possible for the player to expect for the achievement of a good number of winning balls.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 194 is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transition in the third embodiment.

  When the player starts playing the game in the initial state of the pachinko machine 1, such as when the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, the normal mode (normal state: low probability non-short time state) starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to aim at the constant winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101 and the special winning opening 2101 b by hitting left. Here, if the launch force of the game ball at the beginning of hitting is too strong to be right-handed, and the game ball wins the second starting opening 2102, the variation of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 192 (E) A long time fluctuation (600 seconds) in which the time (second fluctuation time) is long is executed. Therefore, when the game mode is the normal mode and the game ball wins the second starting opening 2102, a display (please hit the left!) Is displayed to prompt the player to hit the left.

  After that, when the player adjusts the launch force and strikes the left, and the gaming ball wins the regular winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101 or the special winning opening 2101b, the first special symbol is changed and the first special symbol is executed. (1) The variation of the first decorative symbol is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the variation of the special symbol. As described above, in the normal mode, since the left-handed game is the best for the player, the variation of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the variation of the second special symbol is hardly executed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed at the central portion, and effects corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol are executed, while the second decorative symbol is reduced to the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is difficult for the player to notice the existence by being displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at all during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, so that the presence of the second decorative symbol is less likely to be noticed, or during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode. The second special symbol display 1186 may turn off the LED and not display the second special symbol at all to make it difficult to notice the presence of the second special symbol.

  In addition, the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol in the normal mode is either 3 seconds to 120 seconds in accordance with the fluctuation pattern to be selected. In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and the decorative symbol changing corresponding to the first special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the first special symbol After making a stop display with the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol, the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the on state, the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, the suspended variation of the second special symbol is resumed, and the game mode changes from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) Migrate to

  Even in the rush preparation mode (high probability time reduction state), it is best for the player to aim at the constant winning opening 2101 a and the special opening winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 by left-handling as in the normal mode. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a time varying function is provided which performs a probability changing function of 70 times of ST times and a prize assisting control for facilitating a prize winning on the special prize winning opening 2101b. In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 2102 even in the rush preparation mode, the long time fluctuation (600 seconds) of the second fluctuation pattern (the second fluctuation time) is long as shown in FIG. 192 (E). In order to be executed, when the game mode is in the rush preparation mode and the game ball wins the second start port 2102, a display (please hit left! Etc.) is displayed to prompt the player to hit the left. .

  When the player performs a left strike in the rush preparation mode (high probability time reduction state) and the gaming ball is won in the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 or the special winning opening 2101b, the variation of the first special symbol is executed The variation of the first decorative symbol is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is disapproval, the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is either 3 seconds to 120 seconds according to the fluctuation pattern to be selected, and the first special symbol is selected. If the result of the symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), the variation time of the first special symbol (first variation time) is one of 300 seconds and 600 seconds according to the variation pattern to be selected It is assumed. In the game on the first special symbol side in the rush preparation mode (high probability / shorting state), a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won is executed with a probability of 1/45. And when the number of ST is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the count of ST number is 70 or less, if it wins the big hit of the first special symbol (first big hit A, first big hit B), As shown in 192 (E), a long time fluctuation (300 seconds or 600 seconds) in which the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is long is executed. Then, the short time flag is set to the off state with the long time fluctuation start of the first special symbol, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) to the rush mode (high probability non time short state).

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to hit the right and aim for the second start port 2102. Therefore, when the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, the liquid crystal display device 1900 notifies that it has shifted to the rush mode or displays prompting the player to hit the right (lash mode rush! Please hit right! Etc.). Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the probability changing function of 70 times of ST times is provided. Here, the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is reset, and the ST number is again counted from the count value of 70.

  The right-handed game ball wins the second start hole 2102. Since winning to the second starting opening 2102 is easy even for a game beginner, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 frequently occurs. Since the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol at this time is set to 5 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  As described above, in the rush mode, the right-handed game is the best for the player, and the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed, while the first special symbol is subjected to the variation for a long time and stopped during the rush mode Will not be displayed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed at the central portion, and effects corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the first decorative symbol is a liquid crystal display It is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left portion of the device 1900 or the like, making it difficult for the player to notice its presence. The present invention is not limited to the above as long as it makes it difficult to notice the presence of the first decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the rush mode. For example, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the rush mode. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol may not be displayed at all, and the first decorative symbol may be displayed while the second decorative symbol is not displayed at all when the rush mode is finished and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Similarly, during the rush mode, the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 can be turned on to display the second special symbol, while the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is turned off and the first special symbol is not displayed at all. In this way, when the rush mode ends and the normal mode is entered, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 can be turned on to display the first special symbol, while the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 is turned off. The second special symbol may not be displayed at all.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, when the player wins a big hit with a probability of 1/45, and does not win a big hit (probability of 44/45), a second special symbol lottery where a small hit is won is executed. And, at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, when it is a small hit, the variation is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hit game is executed, the first interlocking flag is set to the on state to suspend the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the first interlocked flag is turned off with the end of the second small hit game. Is returned to and the suspended fluctuation of the first special symbol is resumed.

  In addition, at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol, the ST number is decremented by 1 and updated. When the number of times of ST becomes 0, the definite change flag is set to the OFF state, and the game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, the rush mode is ended when the number of times of ST becomes 0 without winning in the big hit of the second special symbol. In addition to rush mode, even if the number of STs is 0 without winning the second special symbol jackpot, the first special symbol when the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation has passed, or the second special symbol Even when the jackpot is won, it ends and shifts to the normal mode. However, when winning the big hit of the second special symbol, when the second big hit game is started, the definite change flag is set to the OFF state and the rush mode is ended, but when the second big hit game is ended again The definite change flag is set to the on state, and the rush mode is resumed after the end of the second big hit game (the rush mode run). As described above, in the rush mode, the variation of the second special symbol and the second big hit game or the second small hit game are alternately and repeatedly executed. It should be noted that the ST number may be subtracted and updated only due to the variation start of the first special symbol without subtracting and updating the ST number due to the variation start of the second special symbol. In this case, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery during rush mode does not become a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D), until the fluctuation time of the long time variation of the first special symbol passes Since it becomes possible to control the rush mode continuously, it is possible to prevent the rush mode from ending during the long time fluctuation of the first special symbol and reducing the number of award balls obtainable by the player.

  Further, as described above, while 70 times is set as the ST number in this embodiment, the probability of winning the second special symbol in the positive variation state (high probability state) is set to 1/45, so the theory The big hit of the second special symbol will occur once before the number of times of ST becomes 0. In addition, if it becomes a big hit of the second special symbol during the rush mode, the rush mode is temporarily ended, but the rush mode is substantially continued because the rush mode is resumed after the second big hit game is over. It is in a state of That is, the largest factor as the condition for ending the rush mode is that the fluctuation time of the long time fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses. Therefore, when transitioning to the rush mode, the elapsed time from the transition of the game mode to the rush mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled to the rush mode) , Etc. are displayed, and the player is made to recognize that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, the big hit symbol (symbol A, symbol B) is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the variation time of the long time variation of the first special symbol has passed, and the probability change flag is set to the off state After setting the second interlocking flag to the on state, the first big hit game is started. As a result, the rush mode is ended and the transition to the normal mode is made, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted. It should be noted that when the first big hit game is over, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the on state, and after the first big hit game is over, the rush preparation mode is entered.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the long time fluctuation of the first special symbol passes during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted with the start of the first jackpot game, and the end of the first jackpot game The suspended change of the second special symbol is resumed with. That is, the second big hit game or the second small hit game is executed according to the result of the change of the second special symbol resumed in the rush preparation mode after the end of the first big hit game. In the rush mode (high probability non-short state) in the case of big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol, rush mode (high probability non-short state after the end of the second big hit game If the second big hit game is executed in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), the shift to the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) after the end of the second big hit game. That is, the jackpot of the second special symbol (second jackpot C, second jackpot D) is to change the game mode after the end of the second jackpot game according to the game mode at the time of starting the second jackpot game It has become. Specifically, if the time saving function is in operation at the time of starting the second big hit game, the time reducing function is activated even after the end of the second big hit game, and the time saving function is stopped at the time of starting the second big hit game If it is, it will be in the stopped state without activating the time saving function even after the end of the second big hit game. As a result, immediately after the shift from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, it is possible to suppress the shift to the rush mode again, and to suppress the excessive improvement of the portability.

  In addition, you may be made to shift to rush mode (high probability non-short time state) after the end of the second big hit game when it becomes the big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol In this case, attention can be paid to the change of the second special symbol resumed immediately after the shift from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and the expectation of re-entry to the rush mode can be improved.

  Further, in the rush mode of the third embodiment, when the big win is not won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit is always won, the probability is 44/45, so that the second small hit game frequently occurs Become. Moreover, since the second variation time in the rush mode is 5 seconds, if the variation time of the long time variation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is about 120 times in the rush mode If it is executed and the fluctuation time of the long time fluctuation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed about 60 times during the rush mode. The number of STs is set to 70 as described above, and during the rush mode, the number of STs is subtracted and updated due to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the number of remaining times of ST is 69 times, it shifts to the rush mode, and assuming that the second special lottery result is not a big hit all but a small hit during that rush mode, the variation of the second special symbol is When the game is played 69 times, the game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, if the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol becomes 600 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed 120 times at least once unless the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery Since the rush mode is to be ended before, if the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, at least one big hit and at most 119 times to continue the rush mode over this whole period It is necessary to generate a small hit of On the other hand, if the variation time of the first special symbol for a long time variation is 300 seconds, the rush mode ends while the remaining number of ST is 69 times and the mode shifts to the rush mode with the first special symbol for a long time variation. Up to 60 small hits occur without doing. Here, about 30 balls can be obtained in one second small hit game, and about 1000 to 1,500 balls can be obtained in one second big game. That is, when the player wins a jackpot in rush mode and wins 119 small hits, it is possible to obtain approximately 4570 to 5070 balls, and when it wins 60 small hits in rush mode, it is 1800 balls. It will be possible to win the prize ball. This is equal to or greater than the maximum award ball number (2000 balls) obtainable by the jackpot game of the third embodiment. Therefore, by changing to the rush mode, it is possible to improve the game interest. In addition, as described above, it is not always necessary to win a small hit if the player does not win the big hit in the second special symbol lottery in the definite change state (especially rush mode (high probability non-short state)). (2) If you do not win the big hit in the special symbol lottery, it is fine as long as you win the small hit with a much higher probability than the probability of being out, but also in this case small small hit games frequently occur A large number of winning balls can be obtained during the rush mode by setting the winning probability (for example, a winning probability of 80% or more).

  In addition, after the rush mode ends, the first big hit game is started. As it is possible to obtain about 500 to 2,000 prize balls in one first jackpot game, it is possible to obtain about 2300 to 7070 prize balls by winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode. Become. Therefore, even if it becomes the first big hit B which can only get about 500 winning balls by being executed a big hit game in which four round games are performed, the winning balls obtained in the rush mode are added up If you do, you can win more prize balls than the 1st big hit A that can get about 2000 big balls by running the round game over 15 times, discouragement because it became the 1st big hit B Can be deterred, and the decline in gaming interest can be deterred. In addition to winning balls won in rush mode, winning balls for the first jackpot A can win many balls, which is twice the number of winning balls that can be won in one first jackpot game. Expectations for the mode and the first jackpot A can be increased, and a decline in gaming entertainment can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the lottery process whether or not to win a big hit as a second special symbol lottery and whether to win a small hit is executed, but at least a small hit as a second special symbol lottery As long as the lottery process whether or not to win is executed, the jackpot game may not be executed in the second special symbol side game by not executing the lottery process whether or not to win the big hit well. In addition, only the lottery process whether or not to win the small hit without executing the lottery process whether or not to win the big hit as the second special symbol lottery only at least in rush mode (high probability non-short state) In the second special symbol side game in rush mode by doing, it may be controlled so that it can not perform a big hit game while a small hit game can be executed. In this way, in the game on the second special symbol side during rush mode, control is performed so that only the small hit game can be executed, whereby the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hit game are repeatedly executed during the rush mode As a result, game modes other than the rush mode that earns a bunch of prize balls at once by the execution of a big hit game (may be 100%) and the rush mode that gradually increases the prize balls obtained by the execution of small hit games Since one pachinko machine 1 can provide different playability, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to suppress the decrease in the fun of playing. In addition, during the rush mode, a big hit game is not executed, and it is not possible to obtain a large number of prize balls (1000 to 1500 organized balls) in a single shot (in a short time), Because the game to increase the is executed, it is possible to aim at the occurrence of more small hits and to concentrate on the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun.

  In addition, even if it executes the lottery process whether or not to win the big hit as a second special symbol lottery and whether to win a small hit if small win if it wins a big hit as the second special symbol lottery Similar to a hit game (by opening a big hit game etc. by opening a big winning opening 2103b that opens and closes the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second attachment device 2100b with the opening pattern E). It may be possible to distinguish between a game mode other than the rush mode in which a large number of award balls are acquired at a stretch and a rush mode in which the number of award balls is gradually increased. In addition, at least in rush mode (high probability non-short time state) same as small hit game when the result of the second special symbol lottery becomes big hit (the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second attack device 2100b in the opening pattern E In the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 b for opening and closing the) may be performed a big hit game. As described above, when winning a big hit as the second special symbol lottery, it is similar to a small hit game (the opening pattern of the special winning opening 2103b for opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second attachment device 2100b in the opening pattern E) A small hit game can be executed in the second special symbol side game in the rush mode described above by executing the big hit game of the above), while the same effect as controlling it so that the big hit game can not be executed It becomes possible to play.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is displayed before being displayed as a big hit symbol, and thus the first At the time of starting the change of the special symbol (triggered the start of the change of the first special symbol) to shift to the rush mode where the expectation value of winning balls is higher than in the normal mode (low probability non-short state), Providing surprise and surprise to the player by transitioning to rush mode (lash mode is generated) suddenly at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to the variation of the symbol and the first special symbol Since it is possible to pay attention to the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment. In addition, not only the first big hit game executed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery, also by transitioning to the rush mode, the game will be motivated by controlling in an advantageous state where a large number of prize balls can be obtained. In addition to being able to improve, because it can be made to pay attention to games other than the stop symbol of the 1st decoration symbol which fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol, it corresponds to the big hit symbol of the 1st special symbol Even in the period before the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  In the third embodiment, when the big win symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129), the probability change flag is set to the off state. The rush mode is configured to end, but it is sufficient if the rush mode is ended before the first attachment device 2100a opens and closes at least in the first big hit game, for example, the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130) When the time saving flag is set to the off state in step S604a), the probability change flag may be set to the off state. That is, in this example, the rush mode is controlled triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, but within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) Even if it is after the change time (the 1st change time) of the 1st special symbol not only controlling to a rush mode limited but continuing to a lash mode until at least opening and closing operation of the 1st attacker device 2100a is carried out Control may be performed.

  Also, in the third embodiment, until the big hit (1st big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the variation time of the second special symbol (1st big symbol) (2 fluctuation time) is a long-time fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, so the big hit (first big hit A, the first in the first special symbol lottery Before winning one jackpot B), only the first special symbol side game is to be executed. That is, the state before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of pachinko machine 1 Can be said to be in a restricted state. And, when winning the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the 1st special symbol lottery, it is before the stop display of the 1st special symbol with the big hit symbol and the time to start the variation of the 1st special symbol (In response to the start of the change of the first special symbol) to release the restriction and shift to the rush mode to allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side, and improve the expectation value for winning balls more than the normal mode It is possible to realize a novel game that the rush mode is suddenly switched (a rush mode is generated) at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol. As a result, it is possible to give the player surprise and unexpectedness, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest by paying attention to the establishment of the start condition while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode.

  In the third embodiment described above, until the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the variation time of the second special symbol is Stop display frequency of the second special symbol stop display frequency of the first special symbol by performing long-term fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) that the (second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds By significantly reducing the frequency compared to the first special symbol lottery in the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) by being directed to run only the game of the first special symbol side before winning the winning Although it was substantially configured to limit the game on the second special symbol side, until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) In order to make it impossible to hit the right, the launch intensity of the gaming ball by the striking device launcher 500 may be reduced below a predetermined intensity, or the entering of the gaming ball launched with a predetermined intensity or more by the striking launch device 500 into the right area of the center character 2500 of the center Do not detect the entry of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 by interrupting by the member etc, or by stopping the detection by the second starting opening sensor 3132, or the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2102 Even if a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 3132, the detection signal is ignored (in the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first and second start opening winning process (FIG. 125) A big hit (first big hit A, a first big hit B) If the flag indicating that it was won is set, it is determined that there is no winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102) In the first special symbol lottery, it is not possible to execute the game on the second special symbol side, and the first special symbol is won when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. The rush mode (high probability non-short state) to shift to the rush mode (high probability non-short time state) before starting to stop display in the big hit symbol and starting the variation of the first special symbol (at the start of the variation start of the first special symbol) During the probability non-short state), the game on the second special symbol side may be performed. This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the first special symbol side game or the second special symbol side game) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  Also, in the third embodiment, until the big hit (1st big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the variation time of the second special symbol (1st big symbol) (2 fluctuation time) is a long-time fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, so the big hit (first big hit A, the first in the first special symbol lottery It can be said that the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially limited before winning one jackpot B). And when the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the frequency to display the 2nd special symbol stop display triggered by the fluctuation start of the 1st special symbol (the 2nd special symbol The second special symbol and the second special symbol suddenly when the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is started to increase the frequency at which the fluctuation is started) A novel game can be realized in which the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of is increased, which can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, the second decorative symbol is changed by increasing the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol (the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started) corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The first special symbol because it can improve expectations for being displayed with a small hit symbol corresponding to the large hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. And, by making the variation start of the first decorative symbol fluctuating corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game entertainment. That is, even if the first decorative symbol is not displayed with the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol even if it is not stopped and displayed, the second special symbol and the second special symbol change corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol The probability that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol per unit time due to the increase in stop display frequency and the second decorative symbol is the big hit symbol and the second corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol In addition to the fact that the probability of being stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the special symbol can be improved to improve the game intention, the variation corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be played, but also the game while paying attention to whether the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases. You can , The first special symbol and the first special symbol that change corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first special symbol big hit symbol and the first special symbol big hit symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol big hit Even in the period before the stop display is made with the symbol), it is possible to suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  In the third embodiment, until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) is the variation time of the second special symbol (first (2 fluctuation time) substantially restricts the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol by performing long-term fluctuation which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds When the big win (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the symbol lottery, the frequency to stop and display the 2nd special symbol triggered by the fluctuation start of the 1st special symbol is started (the 2nd special symbol changes In the first special symbol lottery, until the big hit (1st big hit A, the first big hit B) is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the second special symbol and Second special view In the first special symbol lottery, the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response is regulated so as not to be stopped, and the first special symbol is jackpotted with the first special symbol when it is won in the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B). Before the stop display, at the time of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol (with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol) to shift to the rush mode (high probability non-shorting state) rush mode (high probability non-shorting During the state only, the restriction may be released to stop and display the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in correspondence with the second special symbol. For example, if it is determined in step S501b of the second variation processing (FIG. 137) that the second variation time has elapsed (the second variation timer has become 0), the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag is confirmed and the rush is If it is a game mode (normal mode (low probability non-short state), rush preparation mode (high probability time short state)) other than the mode (high probability non-short state), it corresponds to the second special symbol and the second special symbol The second special symbol and the second special symbol that fluctuates based on the transition to the game mode other than the rush mode, ending the processing without displaying the second decorative symbol to stop (2) The decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the first special symbol side game or the second special symbol side game) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  Also, in the third embodiment, until the big hit (1st big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the variation time of the second special symbol (1st big symbol) 2 Fluctuation time) performs long-term fluctuation much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, and the big hit in the first special symbol lottery (first big hit A, first big hit B) Corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol to shorten (change) the variation time of the second special symbol (second variation time) to 5 seconds, triggered by the start of the variation of the first special symbol when winning The fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) until the stop display of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol suddenly at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates is shortened (changed) It is possible to realize the novel game of being Next, whereby it is possible to provide surprise and unexpected to the player. In addition, the variation time until the stop display of the second decorative symbol that corresponds to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (changed), so that it corresponds to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol which fluctuates, but also the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol which fluctuates corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol, it is possible to suppress the decline of the game fun. That is, the first decorative symbol changing corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Even if it is not stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol), the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped (changed) is shortened (changed) The stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol changing corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, and thereby the second changing corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol per unit time A big hit symbol (a big hit symbol of a second special symbol and a big hit symbol of a second decorative symbol corresponding to a big symbol of a second special symbol) or a small hit symbol (a small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a second special symbol) Corresponding to the small hit pattern of (2) Since the probability of being stopped and displayed by the small symbols of the decorative symbol is improved, the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol which fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened is displayed (changed ) Can improve the game intention. Thus, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second that changes corresponding to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol A first decorative symbol that can be played while letting you pay attention to whether or not the variation time (second variation time) of the decorative symbol is shortened, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol vary in response to the variation It is possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest even before the stop display with the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol).

  In the third embodiment, until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol ( The second fluctuation time) performs long-term fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, and the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B in the first special symbol lottery) The rush mode when transitioning to the rush mode by shortening (changing) the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol to 5 seconds, triggered by the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, when winning in). Although the thing which shortens the fluctuation time (the 2nd fluctuation time) of the 2nd special symbol is shown rather than the game mode (the normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than, but rushing to rush mode at least it shows rush mo It is sufficient that the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is changed rather than the game mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the game mode, and the game mode other than the rush mode when shifting to the rush mode The variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol may be longer than the (normal mode, rush preparation mode). In this case, the variation time until the stop display of the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is changed to correspond to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The stop display frequency of the changing second decorative symbol changes, and accordingly, the second decorative symbol changing corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol per unit time is a big hit symbol (of the second special symbol A big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the big hit symbol and the second special symbol) and a small hit symbol (a small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a second decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol) The probability of being stopped and displayed in small hit symbols) is improved or decreased, so that the change time until the second decoration symbol that is changed corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped is changed Change the willingness to play by It can be. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variation time (second variation time) of the symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol that varies in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment even in a period before it is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol).

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the state before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, And because part of the function of the pachinko machine 1 is limited, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first The control of the second big hit game can be started upon the start of the change of the special symbol. That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit, the control of the first big hit game is started triggered by the stop display of the first special symbol with the big hit symbol (first big hit A, first big hit B) On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first special symbol lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit start fluctuation As it is possible to start control of the second big hit game by shifting to rush mode as an opportunity, it becomes possible to realize the novel game that the second big hit game and the small hit game are suddenly started after the change start of the first special symbol This can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, by making it possible to pay attention to the change start of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol while expecting the occurrence of the second big hit game, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game fun. In addition, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game is started not only when the stop display is displayed with the jackpot symbol), but also at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. In addition to being able to pay attention to other than the stop symbol of the 1st decoration symbol which fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol and the 1st special symbol, it becomes possible to be able to play because it becomes possible to obtain the prize ball by obtaining. And, it is possible to improve the gaming intention, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game.

  In the third embodiment described above, the second special symbol side game is substantially restricted before the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (2nd big hit C, 2nd big hit D) or a small hit, the second special symbol is triggered by the start of fluctuation when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit In order to be able to start control of the big hit game and the small hit game, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first special The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game can be started without the start of the fluctuation that the result of the first special symbol lottery of the symbol becomes the big hit, but the big hit in the first special symbol lottery (first big hit A, As mentioned above before winning the first big hit B) The result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (the second big hit C, the second) by making it impossible to execute the game on the second special symbol side, or by restricting the second special symbol not to be stopped and displayed. When it is a big hit D) or small hit, the second big hit game or small hit game is made by shifting to the rush mode triggered by the start of fluctuation when the result of the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes the big hit Control may be started. If the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, then the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started thereafter. Control of the first big hit game will always be started, and in order to get double pleasure by generating hit (big hit, small hit) continuously, the game will be improved by lowering the game interest. It can be deterred.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before the control of the first big hit game is started. In order to enable the winning of the winning balls by the game of the second special symbol side, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol during the execution of the game of the first special symbol side The prize ball is controlled by controlling the first big hit game based on the stop display with the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol) It is possible to provide a new game that defeats the conventional common sense of being able to earn a player, and to give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, since it is possible to obtain the winning balls by shifting to the rush mode other than the first big hit game, the game motivation is improved, and the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol Because it is possible to make the game while paying attention to other than the stop symbol, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first Even in the case where the stop display is not made with the first decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol big hit symbol, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest.

  Further, in the third embodiment, during the rush mode, the result of the second special symbol lottery is controlled so as to be a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before starting the control of the first big hit game when the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol side The second big hit game and the small hit game control based on the big hit (second big hit C, the second big hit D) and the small hit are always started as a result of the second special symbol lottery whenever the game of is executed It will be That is, the game on the second special symbol side is executed during the rush mode, or the second special hit based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit The game is started by the control of the game or small hit game, etc. The player then changes the first special symbol and the first special symbol according to the variation of the first decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (the first special symbol big hit It can be inferred that the stop display will be performed on the jackpot of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the symbol and the first special symbol, and that it will be controlled to the first jackpot game. In this way, the game on the second special symbol side is executed during the rush mode, or the second special symbol lottery result is based on the big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or small hit. When control of the big hit game and the small hit game is started, it can be recognized that the hit (big hit, small hit) will occur continuously, and the game will be improved by gaining double pleasure, so the game It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, since the game on the second special symbol side can be executed even in the game modes other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode), the game modes other than the rush mode (normal mode) If the result of the second special symbol lottery is big hit (2nd big hit C, 2nd big hit D) or the control of the 2nd big hit game or the small hit game based on the small hit being started even in the rush preparation mode) There is. In other words, the game of the second special symbol side is executed, or the result of the second special symbol lottery is the big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or the second big hit game or small based on the small hit Even if the control of the hit game is started, the first big hit game may not be controlled thereafter. That is, the game of the second special symbol side is executed, and the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a second big hit game or small based on the small hit. The start of the control of the hit game implies the control of the first jackpot game, and does not necessarily indicate that it is executed. In addition, before winning the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the 1st special symbol lottery, as described above, it is not possible to execute the game on the 2nd special symbol side as described above, or the 2nd special symbol When the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started by restricting the stop display so as not to be stopped and displayed, the first big hit game may be controlled after that.

  In the third embodiment, the first special symbol variation display when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) The expectation of the prize ball than the normal mode (low probability non-short time state) during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) from the start to the stop display with the big hit symbol By controlling to the rush mode (high probability non-short state) which is high in value and advantageous to the player, the first special symbol and the first special symbol during the variation display of the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to Suddenly, the rush mode can generate surprises and surprises to the player. In addition, even before the stop display of the first special symbol with the big hit symbol, the player can advantageously proceed the game by generating the rush mode during the variable display of the first special symbol Thus, it is possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game.

  In the third embodiment, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the first special symbol display 1185 starts the variation display of the first special symbol in step S409a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). Thus, although the rush mode (high probability non-short time state) is started, the rush mode may be started at least after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the rush mode is ended by setting the probability change flag to the OFF state when the big special symbol display symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S 502 a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129) Although configured as described above, it is sufficient if the rush mode is ended before (at the time when the variation time of the first special symbol elapses) before the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. For example, the rush mode is started by setting the time saving flag to the OFF state before the variation time of the first special symbol in step S501a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129), or the first special symbol of The rush mode may be ended by setting the positive change flag to the OFF state before the change time elapses. That is, in this example, the rush mode is controlled from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol based on having won the big hit in the first special symbol lottery to the stop display with the big hit symbol, but the first special symbol It is good if during variable display (during the period of fluctuation time of the first special symbol), start rush mode from the middle of variable display of the first special symbol, or start rush mode in the middle of variable display of the first special symbol. It may be finished.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) is won until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery Because the second fluctuation time) is to perform long-term fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, the big hit (first big hit A, in the first special symbol lottery) Before winning the first big hit B), it is intended to cause only the game on the first special symbol side to be executed. That is, the state before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of pachinko machine 1 Can be said to be in a restricted state. And, when winning a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to the stop display in the big hit symbol During the variable display of (during the period of the first special symbol's fluctuation time), the shift is made to the rush mode to release the restriction, allowing the second special symbol side to execute the game, and winning the prize ball over the normal mode Improve their expectations. For this reason, during the variable display of the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of the variation time of the first special symbol), the transition to the rush mode is suddenly restricted. Can be given surprises and surprises to the player because the second special symbol side game is allowed to be executed. In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the transition to rush mode to release the restriction and allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side. By performing such a game, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the change in the second special symbol until the big hit (first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) Stop the display frequency of the second special symbol by making a long time fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol that the time (the second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds stop the first special symbol By significantly reducing the frequency compared to the display frequency, in the first special symbol lottery to direct the first special symbol side only to play the game before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) The game has been configured to substantially limit the game on the second special symbol side, but until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (the game mode shifts to the rush mode) The ) To lower the launch intensity of the gaming ball by the hitting launch device 500 to less than a predetermined intensity so that the player can not hit the right, or the game sphere launched at a predetermined intensity or more by the hitting launch device 500 enters the right area of the center character 2500 To prevent the game ball from entering the second start port 2102 by stopping detection by the second start port sensor 3132, or the game ball enters the second start port 2102. Even if a detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132 as a ball, the detection signal is ignored (the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first and second starting opening winning process (FIG. 125) If the flag indicating that the jackpot has been won in the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is set, it is determined that there is no winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 If it is decided not to be able to execute the game on the second special symbol side by doing so, or if the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol During the change display of (during the change time period of the first special symbol), it may be possible to execute the game on the second special symbol side by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short state). This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the first special symbol side game or the second special symbol side game) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) is won until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery Because the second fluctuation time) is to perform long-term fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, the big hit (first big hit A, in the first special symbol lottery) It can be said that the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially limited before winning the first big hit B). And, when the big hit (1st big hit A, the 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), the variation display of the 1st special symbol (1st special symbol) In the period of fluctuation time), the frequency to stop and display the second special symbol (the frequency at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started) is increased by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short state) . That is, the first decorative symbol changing corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Even if the stop display is not displayed with the jackpot symbol), the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, so the second per unit time (2) The probability that the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponds to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol The probability of being stopped is improved. In this manner, by suddenly transitioning to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol performed during the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of the first special symbol fluctuation time) Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, by performing transition to rush mode during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), by executing a novel game that the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases It is possible to suppress the decline in amusement of the game.

  In the third embodiment, until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) is the variation time of the second special symbol ( The second variation symbol) substantially limits the variation stop of the second symbol by performing long-term variation which is significantly longer than the variation period (first variation period) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds. When winning a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the special symbol lottery, in the variation display of the first special symbol (during the variation time of the first special symbol), rush mode (high probability non- Although it was configured to increase the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (the frequency at which fluctuation of the second special symbol is started) by transitioning to the time saving state, the big hit (first big hit in the first special symbol lottery) A, 1st jackpot B In the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is not displayed until it is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). If you win the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B), in the lash mode (high probability non-short time state) during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) By shifting, the restriction may be canceled and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, if it is determined in step S501b of the second variation processing (FIG. 137) that the second variation time has elapsed (the second variation timer has become 0), the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag is confirmed and the rush is If it is a game mode (normal mode (low probability non-short state), rush preparation mode (high probability time short state)) other than the mode (high probability non-short state), it corresponds to the second special symbol and the second special symbol The second special symbol and the second special symbol that fluctuates based on the transition to the game mode other than the rush mode, ending the processing without displaying the second decorative symbol to stop (2) The decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the first special symbol side game or the second special symbol side game) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) is won until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), the second fluctuation time) performs long-term fluctuation which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds. If you win the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B), in the lash mode (high probability non-short time state) during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) By shifting, the variation time of the second special symbol (second variation time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, the first decorative symbol changing corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Even if stop display is made with the jackpot symbol), the fluctuation time until the stop display of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (changed) In the second special symbol and the second special symbol, the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol increases, and thereby the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol per unit time The probability and the probability that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol corresponding to the large hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol of the second special symbol are improved. In this manner, by suddenly transitioning to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol performed during the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of the first special symbol fluctuation time) Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, by performing transition to rush mode during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), by executing a novel game that the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases It is possible to suppress the decline in amusement of the game.

  In the third embodiment, until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to rush mode), the variation time of the second special symbol is Performs long-term fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) where the (second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, and the big hit in the first special symbol lottery (first big hit A, first big hit When the player wins B), the second special symbol changes by transitioning to the rush mode (high probability non-shorting state) during the first special symbol change display (during the first special symbol change time period) The time (second fluctuation time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, although the one that shortens the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol than the game modes other than the rush mode (the normal mode and the rush preparation mode) is shown when transitioning to the rush mode, at least the rush mode If it is something which changes the fluctuation time (the second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol than the game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) when it shifts to the case, it shifts to the rush mode The variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol may be longer than the game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode). In this case, the variation time until the stop display of the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is changed to correspond to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The stop display frequency of the changing second decorative symbol changes, and accordingly, the probability that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol per unit time and the second decorative symbol of the second special symbol As the probability of being displayed stopped by the small hit symbol corresponding to the large hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol of the second special symbol increases or decreases, it fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol By changing the change time until the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change the game intention. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variation time (second variation time) of the symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol that varies in response to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is Even if stop display is performed with the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol), it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the second special symbol is selected until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The second special symbol lottery result is a big hit or small hit because the second variation time (the second variation time) performs long-term variation that is significantly longer than the first special symbol variation time (the first variation time) of 600 seconds. Control of the second big hit game and the small hit game based on being to be rarely started. On the other hand, when the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), the variation display of the 1st special symbol (1st special symbol) Of the second special symbol lottery in order to shorten the second special symbol fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) to 5 seconds by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-short state) in the fluctuation period of The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game can be frequently started based on the result being a big hit or a small hit. That is, when winning a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variation time of the first special symbol), the rush mode By shifting to (high probability non-short time state), the probability that the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started is improved. In this manner, by suddenly transitioning to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol performed during the first special symbol and the first special symbol (during the period of the first special symbol fluctuation time) Since the start frequency of the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game increases, and the chance of the player to win the winning ball increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the transition to the rush mode increases the start frequency of the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game increases. By executing the game, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In the third embodiment described above, by substantially restricting the game on the second special symbol side before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, It is configured to only rarely control the second big hit game and the small hit game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery becoming a big hit or a small hit, but the second big hit game or the small hit game It may not be possible to start control of the For example, before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, as described above, it is not possible to execute the game on the second special symbol side as described above, or the second special symbol If the result of the second special symbol lottery becomes a big hit or a small hit by restricting so as not to stop the display, the first special symbol lottery result of the first special symbol always becomes a big hit fluctuation start By shifting to the rush mode as an opportunity, control of the second big hit game or small hit game may be started. As a result, when control of the second big hit game or small hit game is started based on the result of the second special symbol lottery becoming a big hit or small hit, control of the first big hit game is always started thereafter , And the player's willingness to play can be improved and the decline in amusement can be suppressed, since double joy is obtained by continuously generating hits (big hits, small hits).

  In the third embodiment, the first special symbol variation display when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) In middle (during the period of variation time of the first special symbol), it is possible to obtain a prize ball by the game on the second special symbol side by transitioning to the rush mode (high probability non-short state). That is, the first decorative symbol changing corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Even if the stop symbol is displayed with the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the second The big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the special symbol) and the small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol of the second special symbol) The winning balls can be obtained by controlling the second big hit game and the small hit game based on the stop display. Thus, the first decorative symbol changing corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decoration corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Unexpectedly and surprises for the player because the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game can be started by switching to the rush mode suddenly even if the stop display is not displayed with the big hit symbol of the symbol). Can be given. In addition, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Not only start the control of the first big hit game when it is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol), but also during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variation time of the first special symbol), rush mode (high probability) In the case of transition to the non-time-saving state, the player can start controlling the second big hit game and the small hit game, thereby increasing the opportunity for the player to win the winning balls, thereby suppressing the decline in the game interest. be able to.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) is won until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), the second fluctuation time) performs long-term fluctuation which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds. If you win the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B), in the lash mode (high probability non-short time state) during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) By shifting, the variation time of the second special symbol (second variation time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. Then, the rush mode is ended when the variation time of the first special symbol has passed, and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is a big hit symbol (of the first special symbol The control of the first big hit game is started when it is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. That is, when the second special symbol fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) is shortened by shifting to the rush mode, it is always followed by a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit in the first special symbol lottery) It can be made to recognize that it is controlled by the 1st big hit game based on having won B). For this reason, even during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the second decorative symbol of which the second special symbol and the second special symbol change according to the change. It is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game by performing a novel game in which attention can be paid to whether or not the change time (second change time) is changed.

  In the above-described third embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), the time saving function is stopped and the rush is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Although it was configured to shift to the preparation mode (high probability non-short state), the timing to stop the time saving function (the occurrence timing of the rush mode) is not limited to the start of fluctuation, and stops fluctuation of the first special symbol The timing for stopping the time saving function (the occurrence timing of the rush mode) may be set as appropriate within the period up to. For example, it may be possible to stop the time saving function 5 seconds after starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol becoming a big hit in the rush preparation mode and shift control to the rush mode, or the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol starts to change according to the type of the first big hit or the type of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a plurality of kinds of time predetermined (for example, 0 seconds) When the time determined from (the start of fluctuation), 5 seconds, and 10 seconds has elapsed, the time saving function may be stopped to shift control to the rush mode.

  In the first to third embodiments described above, when performing transition control to the rush mode, an advantageous state different from a big hit or a small hit can be obtained by performing display etc. Although it is made to let the player recognize that the occurrence has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not perform display to notify the shift control to the rush mode, and in the case of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the rush is In the preparation mode, when the big hit game performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in relation to the first big hit game is continuously executed even after the end of the first big hit game (first In the effect display during the big hit game, the number of rounds is added and updated until the rush mode is ended (for example, the rush mode is started after 16 rounds of execution of the first big hit game In this case, the number of rounds added to the number of rounds of the first big hit game is displayed when the second big hit game or small hit game is started during the rush mode.) End of the first big hit game and start of the rush mode May be made to show rush mode integrally with the first big hit game, and in this case, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit game is outstanding compared to the conventional game machine (( In the above example, it is possible to increase the value of the jackpot by the illusion as increased by about 2), so that it is possible to improve the fun of the game and, in the third embodiment, in the rush preparation mode. 1 When a big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery, according to the lottery result in accordance with the lottery result, the game ball is thrown into the right area of the center character 2500 during the variation of the decorative symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 You may make it perform the production which shows rush mode integrally with reach production by performing such reach production, and in this case, it is possible to obtain a prize ball even while the reach production is being performed. In the third embodiment, the first big hit game is started when the rush mode is started based on the big hit as a result of the first special symbol lottery as the rush preparation mode. After notification of the effect, the effect display during the first big hit game is started, and is continued until the first big hit game is over (the first big hit is the effect display during the first big hit game executed with the start of the rush mode) By adding and updating the number of rounds until the end of the game) it may be possible to show the rush mode and the first big hit game integrally, also in this case once Since the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game can be illusively increased as compared with the conventional game machine to a great deal (about twice in the above example), the value of the big hit can be improved, so the game entertaining It can be improved. In addition, when the first big hit game is started, the effect to notify the start of the first big hit game and to notify switching to the right is executed, and in the first big hit game, the game ball is thrown into the right area of the center part 2500. It is supposed to Therefore, when the effect display in the first big hit game is executed at the start of the rush mode, or even if the effect display in the first big hit game is continued until the rush mode is ended even after the first big hit game, the game Does not give a disadvantage because the player can hit the game ball in the right area of the center character 2500 and win the game ball in the second large winning opening 2103b, and it is possible to obtain the ball by this. . As described above, in this example, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the rush mode, the result is either one of the small hit and the big hit, and it does not become a loss. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is performed in the rush mode, the small hit game or the first big hit game is always executed and the winning balls can be acquired. That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the state in which the winning ball can be acquired by controlling the shift to the rush mode after the end of the first big hit game (the first big hit game and the second big hit game or small hit in rush mode) A game is continuously generated, and in the third embodiment, a state in which a winning ball can be acquired continuously occurs by performing transition control to the rush mode before the start of the first big hit game. For example, by executing a series of effects (for example, reproducing a moving image composed of a series of stories) while the continuously generated prize balls can be acquired, the second game in the first big hit game and the rush mode is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine the big hit game and the small hit game. Also, as a reach effect to be executed over the period from the start to the end of the rush mode in the third embodiment, for example, after displaying the battle mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second big hit game or the like in the rush mode When the small hit game is started, the player is made to hit the right by displaying the message, “Right hit and shoot the shell into the enemy army!” And the like, and the player hit the right and the second large winning opening 2103b In response to the reception of the game ball, the enemy army may be bombarded with a shell to reduce the number of enemy troops. Also, as described above, in order to perform an effect of causing the player to hit the game ball into the right area of the center character 2500 as an effect of showing the first big hit game and the rush mode integrally, the center character The game ball can be hit in the right area of 2500 and the second big winning opening 2103 b can be made to win a game ball, and therefore, there is no disadvantage because it is possible to obtain a winning ball.

  In the third embodiment, the first variation pattern setting process (when the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) In order to start the rush mode (high probability non-short state) by setting the short time flag to the off state when starting variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 in step S409a of FIG. 191) Although it was constituted, it may be constituted so that rush mode may be started after the start of change display of the 1st special symbol. For example, after the start of variation display of the first special symbol, the time saving flag is set to the OFF state before the variation time of the first special symbol in step S501a of the first variation processing (FIG. 129), (1) The rush mode may be configured to be started during the change display of the special symbol (during the change time of the first special symbol). That is, in the third embodiment, when winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, one of 300 seconds or 600 seconds is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. And when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the time to control the rush mode (high probability non-short state) is made different by setting the short time flag in the off state, but the first special symbol changes Even when the start timing of the rush mode is changed by changing the time from the start of display until the short time flag is set to the off state, the rush mode is ended after the rush mode is started (variation of the first special symbol The time until the lapse of time changes, and the time to control the rush mode can be made different.

  As described above, a specific example in which the start timing of the rush mode is made different during the first special symbol variation display (during the first special symbol variation time period) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 195 is an example of a variation pattern table selected in the high probability short time state (lash preparation mode), and FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing the contents of an effect executed when the start timing of the rush mode is changed An example of

  As shown in FIG. 195, the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the variation pattern table selected in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) A variation pattern table and a variation pattern table in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected at the time of losing are set. In addition, in the variation pattern table selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, the first big hit B), four types of variation patterns of big hit variation patterns A to D are set. In the variation pattern table in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected at the time of losing, two kinds of variation patterns of losing time variation patterns A and B are set. Then, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode), the step of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191) Select the variation pattern table when the result of the first special symbol lottery is big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) as a variation pattern table according to the high probability time short condition (lash preparation mode) in S402a, The fluctuation pattern of one of the patterns A to D is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be lost in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode), the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) in step S403a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191) As a variation pattern table according to the result of the first special symbol lottery selects the variation pattern table at the time of the loss, the variation pattern of one of the loss time variation patterns A and B is determined.

  In the big hit time fluctuation patterns A to D, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from the start to the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set and the timing to set the time saving flag to the off state (( The start timing of the rush mode is set. In this example, 70 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol for the jackpot variation pattern A to D, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. The first big hit game is to be executed based on what has been done. Moreover, in big hit time fluctuation pattern A-D, the timing (the start timing of rush mode) which sets the time saving flag to off state is made different, first, with big hit time fluctuation pattern A, fluctuation indication of the 1st special symbol Since the shift to the rush mode (high probability non-short state) is made by setting the short time flag to the off state when starting the, 70 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes the time to control to the rush mode ing. In the big hit variation pattern B, the transition to the rush mode by setting the time saving flag to the OFF state 20 seconds after starting the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation time of the first special symbol The remaining time of 50 seconds is the time to control the rush mode. Moreover, in big hit time fluctuation pattern C, it changes to rush mode by setting the time saving flag to OFF state 40 seconds after starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, so the fluctuation time of the first special symbol The remaining time of 30 seconds is the time to control the rush mode. Thus, in this example, although the variation time of the first special symbol is the same, the earlier the timing (time to start the rush mode) to set the time reduction flag to the off state, the longer the time to control to the rush mode Therefore, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode increases, and the number of times of execution of the second small hit game based on having won a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode Because of the increase, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode.

  Moreover, in the big hit time fluctuation pattern D, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes, the shift flag is set to the off state so that the shift to the rush mode (high probability non-short time state) is not made. As described above, when the big hit variation pattern D is executed, the second small hit game may be executed based on having won the small hit in the second special symbol lottery without shifting to the rush mode. It is difficult. That is, only the first big hit game based on having won the big hit in the first special symbol lottery after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, only the first big hit game can be executed, and the winning balls can be acquired only by the first big hit game .

  In the lost time fluctuation patterns A and B, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to the end thereof is set. In this example, 70 seconds which is the same as the big hit time fluctuation patterns A to D is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol with respect to the loss time fluctuation pattern A, and the first special for the loss time fluctuation pattern B Three seconds are set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. Also, in the lost time change patterns A and B, the short time flag is not set to the off state, and the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) continues even after the change time of the first special symbol has elapsed. There is.

  Next, the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the big hit time change patterns A to D and the loss time change pattern A are executed will be described. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, during the variable display of the first special symbol based on the big hit time fluctuation pattern A to D and the lost time fluctuation pattern A, the rush mode (high probability non time short state) by setting the time saving flag to the off state The effect to be notified whether or not to shift to) is executed, and when the shift to the rush mode is not made, the effect to be notified of whether or not to execute the first jackpot game is executed. In more detail, "the pounding effect 1" is executed as an effect of being notified whether or not to shift to the rush mode at a stage of 0 to 20 seconds in 70 seconds which is a variation time of the first special symbol, and 20 to 20 At stage of 40 seconds, "Skipling effect 2" is executed as an effect to be notified whether or not to shift to the rush mode, and at stage of 40 to 70 seconds, after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first As an effect for which it is notified whether or not to execute the big hit game, "The pounding effect 3" is executed.

  Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the time saving flag is set to the off state to set the rush mode. Since the transition to the (high probability non-short time state), during the variable display of the first special symbol, as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect that is notified that it is in the rush mode is executed There is. In addition, when the big hit time fluctuation pattern B is executed, as shown in Figure 196 (B), rush mode by setting the time saving flag to OFF state 20 seconds after starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol It shifts to (high probability non-short time state), but the rush of the main character attacking the enemy character as a successful effect of “The thrilling effect 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds The effect of being notified of the transition to the mode is executed. After that, as the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol, an effect of notifying that it is in the rush mode is executed.

  In addition, when the big hit time fluctuation pattern C is executed, as shown in Figure 196 (C), rush mode by setting the time saving flag to OFF state 40 seconds after starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol The enemy character attacks the main character as a failure effect of “the pounding effect 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, though transitioning to (high probability non-short time state), 20 to 20 At the stage of 40 seconds, as the success effect of “the throbbing effect 2” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect that the main character is notified to shift to the rush mode by avoiding the attack of the enemy character is executed There is. After that, as the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol, an effect of notifying that it is in the rush mode is executed.

  Also, when the big hit variation pattern D is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (D), when the variation display of the first special symbol is started 70 seconds after the start of the variation display, the time saving flag is turned off. The enemy character attacks the main character as a failure effect of "the pounding effect 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds although it is set to the state, and at the stage of 20 to 40 seconds, The main character scolds the attack of the enemy character as a failure effect of "the pounding effect 2" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the stage of 40 to 70 seconds, the "throbbing effect 3" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 As a success effect, an effect is given that a first big hit game is to be executed after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed by the leading character rising. As described above, the rush mode (high probability non-short time state until the success effect is executed in any of “diki effect 1”, “diki effect 2”, and “drill effect 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Because it can not be determined whether to shift to) or to execute the first big hit game after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the player pays attention to the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with expectation. can do.

  Also, when the lost time fluctuation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (E), the time saving flag is not set in the off state, but 0 of 70 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol Enemy characters attack the main character as a failure effect of "the pounding effect 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a stage of -20 seconds, and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a stage of 20 to 40 seconds As a failure effect of "Don't React 2", the main character scolds the attack of the enemy character, and in 40 to 70 seconds, the main character falls as a failure effct of "Don't Effect 3" displayed on the liquid crystal display 1900 The effect is notified that the first big hit game is not performed. As described above, even during the variable display of the first special symbol based on having been determined to be lost in the first special symbol lottery, “the pounding effect 1”, “the pounding effect 2”, “the pounding effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900. By performing the effect 3 ", the player can pay attention to the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 until the end.

  In addition, when the lost time fluctuation pattern B is executed immediately before the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on any of the big hit fluctuation patterns B to D and the lost time fluctuation pattern A, the first based on the lost time fluctuation pattern B During the variable display of the special symbol, a leading effect that the main character meets the enemy character may be executed as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the lost time fluctuation pattern B, there is a hold waiting for execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the next first special in the hold state It is determined in advance whether or not to execute any of the big hit time change patterns B to D and the lost time change pattern A as the change display of the design (so-called, pre-reading), and the big change time display of the next first special symbol If it is determined in advance that one of the fluctuation patterns B to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A is to be executed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 precedes during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the loss time fluctuation pattern B. It will do as long as the effect is performed. Then, when the preceding effect is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed thereafter, based on either the big hit fluctuation pattern B to D or the lost time fluctuation pattern A Since it is possible to recognize that effects such as “stroke 1”, “stroke 2”, “stroke 3”, etc. are executed, the player's expectation can be raised before such a presentation. .

Fourth Embodiment
In the third embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is configured to execute control to shift the game mode to the rush mode triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the first special Control to shift to rush mode triggered by the change start of the first special symbol at a predetermined rate when the result of the symbol lottery is not a big hit (Before starting the first big hit game after starting the change of the first special symbol ) May be executed as long as the control to shift to the rush mode is executed. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out during the rush preparation mode (high probability / shorting state), the first variation pattern setting process is executed and the first variation pattern is selected, the first The game mode may be shifted to the rush mode at the start of the change of the special symbol. By configuring in this manner, since the chance of winning a winning ball increases, it is possible to focus attention on the occurrence of the rush mode when fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest. Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment will be described.

[First variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of first variation pattern setting processing according to the fourth embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation pattern setting processing (FIG. 191) of the third embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects a variation pattern table at the time of losing according to the gaming state if the flag indicating that the big hit is won is not set (NO in step S401a) (step S403a The variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read out in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a ').

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the determined variation pattern is a particular variation pattern (the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198 (E) described later has a variation pattern of 180 seconds and a variation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the deviation) If it is a specific fluctuation pattern, the time saving flag is turned off to stop the time saving function (step S409a), and the process proceeds to step S405a.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the determined fluctuation pattern is a specific fluctuation pattern (the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198 (E) described later corresponds to the 180 second fluctuation pattern and the 300 second fluctuation pattern If not (NO in step S408a '), the process proceeds to step S405a without operating the time saving flag.

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high probability time short game state) and the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, at the time of starting variable display of the first special symbol based on the result (stopped by start of variable display), stop the time saving function and shift to the rush mode (high probability non-short state). As described above, the probability change flag is set to the off state when the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game reaches 70 times. That is, the rush mode (high probability non-short state) is continued until the total number of times of fluctuation between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 70 times after the end of the big hit game. In addition, by setting the probability change flag to the off state at the time of the change stop based on the specific change pattern of the first special symbol, or by setting the time saving flag again to the on state at the change stop of the specific change pattern of the first special symbol It may be made to shift to the rush mode until the fluctuation based on the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped, and in this case, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the second fluctuation start process executed in the rush mode The rush mode may not be ended until the fluctuation based on the specific fluctuation pattern of at least the first special symbol is stopped by not subtracting the ST number when starting the.

[Game specification of special symbol]
FIG. 198 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 192) in the above-described third embodiment will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 198 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). If the game mode is the normal mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 seconds to 120 seconds according to the presence or absence of reach effect, and in the rush preparation mode, the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost In the case of 3, it is set to any of 3 seconds, 180 seconds, and 300 seconds, and in the case of a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds are set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out in the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state), a specific variation pattern (300 seconds as the variation pattern of the first special symbol , 600 seconds), it shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-short time state). That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, the variation time of the first special symbol is made to differ according to the type of the outlier variation pattern of the first special symbol. The rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and the specific variation pattern is executed is more advantageous to the player than the rush mode that occurs when the big hit occurs. Is set to be low. Specifically, in the rush mode which occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the operation continues for 180 seconds or 300 seconds, while the big hit In the rush mode which occurs when it becomes, it continues for 300 seconds or 600 seconds. That is, in rush mode which occurs when it becomes a big hit, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out when it falls off, and the value equal to or more than rush mode which occurs when a specific variation pattern is executed It is given to the player. In the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out and the specific variation pattern is executed, the equivalent value to the rush mode that occurs when the big hit occurs (300 (Seconds or 600 seconds) may be given, and in this case, the expectation for the rush mode can be further improved.

  Further, the probability that the specific variation pattern is executed is set to be lower than the winning probability in the high probability state (for example, about 1/500). Thus, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, it is possible for the player to have an opportunity to obtain the winning balls by generating a state advantageous to the player (lash mode) even when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost. The expectation for the occurrence of rush mode can be improved. In addition, although the fluctuation time has been prolonged in recent years, when the above-mentioned reach effect is performed for a long time and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit is gradually increased with the expectation for the big hit gradually It is effective to improve the game interest because it can be generated, but when the disappointing symbol is stopped and displayed, not only the expectation for the big hit is gradually increasing but also the discouragement from the state is large and the waste over a long period There is a possibility that it may decrease the game interest rather by being recognized as having spent a certain time. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol is varied over a long period of time when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, but it is advantageous for the player within the variation time of the first special symbol. Since a state (rush mode) is generated to enable winning balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment based on the result of the long-term fluctuation being lost.

  In addition, control is performed to differentiate the variation time of the second special symbol that is executed during the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out and a specific variation pattern is executed. By doing this, the number of winning balls that can be acquired during the rush mode may be made different. For example, the variation time of the second special symbol is always 10 as a rush mode (high probability non-short time state) that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out and a specific variation pattern is executed. One of rush mode C (high probability non-short condition C) set to seconds and rush mode D (high probability non-short condition D) where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always set to 15 seconds The second special symbol can be set to 10 seconds and 15 seconds, and is more likely to be set to 10 seconds than 15 seconds (for example, 10 seconds with an 80% probability) Set to 15 seconds with 20% probability and set to 10 seconds and 15 seconds as with rush mode C as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and set to rush mode C (high probability non-shorting state C) Possible, 10 seconds Also likely to be set to 15 seconds (for example, set to 15 seconds with an 80% probability, set to 10 seconds with a 20% probability) rush mode D (high probability non-time short state D) It may be controlled to one or the other. As a result, the degree of advantage can not be determined only by the type of the first special symbol outlier fluctuation pattern or the duration of the rush mode, and the type of the first special symbol outlier variation pattern, the duration of the rush mode, and the second special symbol Since the degree of advantage can be judged only by comprehensively judging the fluctuation time of the game, it is possible to further pay attention to the game and to improve the game interest. Also, in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out and the specific variation pattern is executed, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs when it becomes a big hit It is set that the player's degree of advantage is lowered by changing the second special symbol in a change time (10 seconds or 15 seconds) longer or equal to the change time (5 seconds or 10 seconds). That is, in rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, and the value equal to or more than rush mode that occurs when a specific variation pattern is executed Is given to the player. In addition, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs in the case of a big hit also in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes out of place, and a specific variation pattern is executed The second special symbol may be varied in a variation time (5 seconds or 10 seconds) equivalent to the variation time of. In this case, the expectation for the rush mode can be further improved.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes out of place, the change time of the second special symbol in rush mode to shift control when it is determined to a specific change pattern is the change of the first special symbol out of change It may be made to differ according to the type of pattern. For example, in the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is out and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined as the fluctuation pattern of 180 seconds as the specific fluctuation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific fluctuation pattern, the first special pattern fluctuation pattern table is controlled to shift to the rush mode C. A plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol. In this case, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, and a specific variation pattern is executed. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of each of the two types of rush modes (lash mode C and rush mode D) that occur. If the result of the symbol lottery is out and the rush mode continues over a longer period if the specific variation pattern is executed (in this example, it is possible to obtain many winning balls) Therefore, the generation of rush mode can be noticed and the decline in amusement can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes out of control, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific fluctuation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 180 seconds as the specific variation pattern, the first special symbol variation pattern table is controlled to shift to the rush mode C. A plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol. In this case, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, and a specific variation pattern is executed. Even if any of the two types of rush modes (lash mode C and rush mode D) that occur in the event occurs, the same prize ball is obtained Therefore, it is not only possible to improve the game entertainment when rush mode occurs, but it is disadvantageous for the player if the variation time of the second special symbol in the above two types of rush modes is the same. It is possible to increase the advantage of the rush mode C, which has a short duration. That is, since the number of winning balls obtainable in each of the two types of rush modes is approximately the same, rush mode C, which is executed in a shorter time, increases the number of winning balls obtained per unit time and thus more for the player. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the rush mode C, which has a short duration, from the advantageous state.

[Transition of gaming state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 199, transition of the gaming state according to the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that parts different from the third embodiment will be described, and redundant description will not be made.

(Rush preparation mode)
As in the third embodiment, in the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (specially configured winning port 2101b). As a result of the special symbol lottery 70 consecutive times, the fluctuation pattern other than the specific fluctuation pattern which it mentions later (non-specific fluctuation pattern; the fluctuation pattern where fluctuation time 3 seconds is set in this example) If the first special symbol has been changed 70 times in a row (if it has become nonspecific), it shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In the third embodiment, the first special symbol is triggered only when the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times. As, transition to high probability non-short state (rush mode, second game gaming state), but in this embodiment based on a specific variation pattern even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost When the first special symbol is changed (specification is lost), it is shifted to the high probability non-short state (rush mode, second game gaming state) triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the high probability non-short play game state (rush mode) continues until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started, but as described above If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of place and the specific variation pattern is executed, the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol continues until reaching 70 times It has become.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the generation trigger of the rush mode is increased as compared with the third embodiment. That is, in the third embodiment, the rush mode is generated only upon occurrence of a big hit in the rush preparation mode, but in the fourth embodiment, a specific variation pattern is generated even if a big hit does not occur in the rush preparation mode. The rush mode is generated when the is selected. When the rush mode is to be generated, specifically, when the variation of the first special symbol based on the specific variation pattern is started, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, "rush mode rush! Hit right!" ) And sound output from a speaker (for example, “rush mode entry. Please hit right.”), Lighting modes of the lamp and LED (lighting mode prompting right hit, for example, door surrounding the outer periphery of the game window 101 The transition control of the lamp and the LED provided on the frame 5 to the lash mode, etc. by the manner in which light moves from the emission rail 660 toward the right area of the center character 2500, etc., and switching to right strike A player is notified.

  In addition, the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of place and a specific variation pattern is executed is the number of times of variation between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. Since the total number continues until reaching 70 times, during the rush mode, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the remaining number of possible changes to stay in the rush mode, and the chance time occurs in the player, chance time It is made to recognize that there is a time limit. When the rush mode is terminated when the variation of the first special symbol based on the specific variation pattern is stopped, the elapsed time since the transition of the game mode to the rush mode to the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like , And displays the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled to the rush mode), etc., to make it possible for the player to recognize that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time is limited. It is also good.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, and the first special symbol is changed based on a specific change pattern (in the case of being specified otherwise), the first Although the shift control to the rush mode has been shown triggered by the start of the change of the special symbol, it is controlled to shift to the rush mode due to the first special symbol being changed with a specific change pattern and the out-of-point symbol being stopped and displayed. You may For example, when the change of the first special symbol based on the change pattern is to be stopped when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, the specific change pattern is processed in step S515a of the first change processing (FIG. 129) If the first special symbol is determined to be changed based on the specific variation pattern and it is determined that the first special symbol is changed based on the specific variation pattern, the time saving flag is turned off to stop the time saving function You may In this case, since the transition control to the rush mode is performed after the variation of the first special symbol, the relationship between the variation time of the specific variation pattern (180 seconds or 300 seconds in the above example) and the duration of the rush mode is lost. It is not necessary to change the first special symbol over the long period (180 seconds or 300 seconds) as described above.

  Further, in this case, the rush mode is continued until the number of STs becomes 0, but after transition control to the rush mode (high probability non-short state), the first special symbol lottery is performed before the number of STs becomes 0. When the result is a big hit, the rush mode is ended, and after the first big hit, the transition control to the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) is performed.

  Further, in the rush mode, in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, and the first special symbol is changed based on a specific change pattern and transition control is performed due to the stop display of the outlying symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are both variable. As described above, since the result of the second special symbol lottery does not become off during the rush mode, it is better to change only the second special symbol during the rush mode, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of winning balls that the player can earn is greater than fluctuating both. In the present example, as described above, the first starting opening 2101 is disposed in the left side area of the center combination 2500, while the second starting opening 2102 is disposed in the right side area of the center combination 2500 and 1 A game ball can be entered into the first start hole 2101 but a game ball can not be entered into the second start hole 2102 and when hit to the right a game ball can be entered into the second start hole 2102 1 A game ball can not be entered into the starting opening 2101. Therefore, if it is controlled to shift to rush mode, and if you only hit the right without hitting left, the first special symbol's fluctuation will be executed and the number of STs will be subtracted until the first hold number counter becomes 0. After the 1st number-of-retentions counter reaches 0, the variation of the first special symbol does not start and small wins or big hits are generated at all remaining times of ST count, and it is possible to obtain a prize ball .

  In the above example, the pachinko machine 1 performs so-called sequential change control in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied each time a start winning occurs, but the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol. Even in the case of the pachinko machine 1 that is subject to priority variation control, even if it is assumed that the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, the first special symbol variation is based on a specific variation pattern It may be made to be able to control to the rush mode which carries out transition control on the basis of having stopped and displayed a misplaced symbol. In this case, it is a case where the result of the 1st special symbol lottery becomes a release, and it is rush mode which carries out transition control on the basis of having stopped and displayed the 1st special symbol based on a specific change pattern and having made the stop display stop. Since it is possible to always perform the second special symbol variation and not start the first special symbol variation by right-handing during the movement, the number of STs at the time of shift control to the rush mode is By changing the second special symbol in all the remaining times to generate a small hit or a big hit, winning balls can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, and a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol according to the lottery result Although the transition control to the mode is configured, the transition control to the rush mode may be performed when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific disconnection. Specifically, while providing a first out-of-order symbol random number determining the out-of-place symbol as random numbers related to the first special symbol lottery process, the first out-of-place symbol random number when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes out of order Based on the specific out-of-design pattern or the non-specific out-of-pattern design, it will be configured to shift control to the rush mode when the lottery result of the specific out-of-pattern is obtained May be

Fifth Embodiment
In the third embodiment described above, the variation time of the special symbol is made different according to the game mode (game state), and the game mode is the normal mode (normal state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state). Is set to 600 seconds as the variation time of the second special symbol, and 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol when the game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short state). That is, although the variation time of the second special symbol is made different by the transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, the variation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode starts the rush preparation mode It may be made different depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol required to shift to the rush mode (the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol mainly because the game on the side of the first special symbol is performed in the rush preparation mode). Such an example will be described below as a fifth embodiment different from the third embodiment.

  First, in the fifth embodiment, after the first big hit game based on the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode is finished, the game mode is a rush preparation mode (high probability) Transition to the time saving state), but after shifting to the rush preparation mode, 1 is added to the variation count counter of the special symbol each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the variation count of the special symbol in the rush preparation mode It is counting. In addition, since the game on the side of the first special symbol is performed in the rush preparation mode, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol is mainly counted. Then, after the variation display of the first special symbol based on the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is started in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, the game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short time State), but the number of times the variation of the special symbol counted before the transition to the rush mode is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (50 times in this example) or less than the predetermined number during the rush mode 2 The variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the special symbol is different.

  As shown in FIG. 200, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the rush mode, two kinds of fluctuation patterns in which 5 seconds and 10 seconds are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are set, and the rush mode is set. Among them, one of the two variation patterns is determined. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the rush mode, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is 50 times or less, and is less than 50 times In the case and the case, the probability of determining each of the two variation patterns is made different. Specifically, if the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 or more, 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol The probability of determining the fluctuation pattern is 80%, and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 20%. On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, then 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the pattern is 20%, and the probability of determining the variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 80%.

  As described above, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 or more, 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol The probability of determining the variation pattern in which 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of determining the variation pattern. In addition, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is 50 or more, the variation of the second special symbol than in the case of less than 50 Among the time, the variation time is shortened to increase the probability of determining 5 seconds. For this reason, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time to control the rush mode (the first special symbol fluctuation time), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation time is shortened. By increasing the probability of determining, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode increases, and the second based on having won a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode Since the number of times the small hit game is executed also increases, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. That is, if the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is large, the variation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is determined to be shorter. By increasing the probability of doing this, it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. And as the number of times the special symbol changes from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode increases, the player's dissatisfaction and frustration tend to increase, but it can be acquired during the rush mode By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to eliminate such player's dissatisfaction and frustration.

  On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, then 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of determining the pattern. Also, if the number of times the variation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is less than 50 times, the variation of the second special symbol than if it is 50 times or more The probability of determining 10 seconds as the fluctuation time of the time is increased. Therefore, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time to control the rush mode (the first special symbol fluctuation time), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation time is lengthened. By increasing the probability of deciding, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode decreases, and the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode is based on having won a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Since the number of times the small hit game is executed also decreases, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode decreases.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is equal to or more than the predetermined number (50 times in this example), the predetermined number Although it is configured that the probability of determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol's fluctuation time shorter than the case of being less than the case is higher, the number of times of fluctuation of such special symbol is a predetermined number of times (this In the example, if it is less than 50 times, you may be configured to increase the probability of determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol's fluctuation time shorter than when it is more than the predetermined number of times . For example, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, then 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol The probability of determining the pattern is 80%, and the probability of determining the variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 20%, while the number of variations of the special symbol is 50 times or more The probability of determining the variation pattern in which 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 20%, and the probability of determining the variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 80% And it is sufficient. In such a configuration, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is smaller, the variation time of the variation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is shorter. By increasing the probability of deciding on the result, it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. And, as the number of times of variation of the special symbol required from entering the rush preparation mode to transitioning to the rush mode decreases, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode increases, so that the rush preparation mode can be selected. Can play the game with a sense of tension.

  Moreover, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times of the variation of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is 50 or more or less than 50. (2) Although the variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the special symbol is configured to be different, the number of variations of such special symbol is not the number of times of fixing as 50 times, but preparation for rushing It may be configured to be the number of times of variable according to the type of big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) that has triggered the transition to the mode. For example, when the big hit that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first big hit A, the number of times of the special symbol variation required to shift to the rush mode after starting the rush preparation mode is 20 or more If the big hit that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first big hit B, the rush preparation mode is started and then the rush mode is entered. It may be determined depending on whether it is 50 times or more or less than 50 times as the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol required. And, as in the fifth embodiment, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is 20 times (first big hit A) or 50 times (first big hit B) In the rush mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened compared to when it is more than 20 times (the first big hit A) or 50 times (the first big hit B). If it is configured such that the probability of deciding to be high is increased, the first jackpot B causes the more than 20 times to be set to 20 times due to the first jackpot A as the number of fluctuations of such special symbols Since the probability is higher than 50 times set to 50 times, the probability of being executed with the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shortened during the rush mode is high, and acquired during the rush mode It is possible to increase the Rukoto is capable of winning balls. That is, for each type of big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode, the judgment criteria at the time of shift from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode (second in rush mode) By changing the criteria for determining whether the variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the special symbol is different, the winning balls that can be acquired during the rush mode will also be different, so While being able to make it pay attention to which type the big hit which becomes the opportunity which transfers to a preparation mode is, it is possible to prevent the mannerism of the game during the rush preparation mode.

  In the fifth embodiment, whether the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the shift to the rush mode is equal to or more than a predetermined number (50 times in this example) or less than a predetermined number In the rush mode, the variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be different, but the number of variations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is The variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol may be configured to be different upon reaching the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example). For example, if the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is less than a predetermined number (50 times in this example), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. The probability of deciding is increased, while the variation time of the second special symbol if the number of variations of the second special symbol after the shift to the rush mode is more than a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) The probability that the variation time is shortened can be determined to be high. In such a configuration, the variation time of the variation time of the second special symbol is triggered when the variation number of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example). Although the probability of deciding on a longer one is higher, the probability of deciding on a variation of the second special symbol having a shorter variation is changed to a high probability, but, conversely, the second special Even if the probability of determining that the fluctuation time is shortened among the fluctuation times of the symbol is high, the probability of determining that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased may be changed to a high probability. Good. That is, the variation time of the variation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is triggered by the number of times of variation of the second special symbol reaching the predetermined number (50 times in this example) after the shift to the rush mode. By changing the probability of deciding to be short (long), even while in the same rush mode, a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) as the number of times of variation of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode Before and after the game (the frequency of execution of the second small hit game based on winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery) will be different before and after, preventing the game becoming renown in rush mode be able to.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game machine to which the pachinko machine 1 is applied is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited. Also, the number of round games shown in FIGS. 146, 154, 192, 198 and 200, the opening pattern, the type of hit (big hit, small hit), the winning probability, the fluctuation time, etc. The present invention is not limited to the above, and any modification can be made as long as the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

Sixth Embodiment
[Overall composition of the game board]
Next, the whole structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of 6th Embodiment is demonstrated in detail with reference to FIG. 201 thru | or FIG. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the right front, FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the left front, and FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 205 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 206 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 207 is a front view of a front component and a front unit on the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 262) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player Attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open to accept the game balls driven into the game area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 always openable to receive the ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 In accordance with the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by the second game, it is possible to receive the game ball according to the result of the second lottery, and the first special game lottery by receiving the game ball to the first game opening 2002 or the second game machine 2004 The first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided, in each of which a game ball can be accepted according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second large winning opening 2006 is configured by two large winning openings of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b disposed in one flow path through which the game balls circulate (see FIG. See 207).

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the right and left direction in the technique area 5a, and has the first start port 2002 and the first big winning port 2005, and the start port unit 2100 The lower side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the mouth unit 2100 and having the three general winning openings 2001 and the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A frame shaped like a side unit upper 2300 and a general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006 which are attached substantially at the center of the game area 5a. The center character 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a lock attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 for removably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in a front view in the back box 3010 and discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the center character 2500; It is attached near the front end of the front view lower right corner in the back box 3010, and the second big winning opening 2006 and the second of the center character 2500 Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is rotatably mounted on the upper relay substrate 3040 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay substrate cover 3041 covering the back side of the upper relay substrate 3040, and the back surface of the back box 3010. Box-shaped effect driving board box 3042, effect driving board 3043 accommodated in effect driving board box 3042, panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010, and panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay substrate cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the cover.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 which penetrates in the front and back direction in a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear side. Further, in the panel holder 1120, a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes are formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1111 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 205).

[Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206 and 262. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200 .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail but two LEDs based on the status display consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and the normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball against the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in the lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after fluctuating display of the normal symbol by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 Of the two, a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending displays, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established, and the acceptance of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by Of the first special symbol display for displaying the LED of the first special lottery result in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result, and of the variation display of the first special symbol pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 By the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of pending that is the number of the variable display that does not hold the start condition, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start winning) The second special symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of eight LEDs based on the second special lottery result that has been drawn, and then the eight special LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result Among the variable display of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second display opening 2004, the symbol display and the number of holdings which is the number of the variable display for which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied yet L When the second special hold number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the number of repetitions of the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 It mainly comprises a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying (the number of rounds).

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 206. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 262) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 262). reference).

[Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 207. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixed piece projecting outward from the right side in the front view. And 1602. In the main liquid crystal display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward, the two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in the frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lower the locking mechanism 3020 It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it.

[Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 201 to FIG. 203 and FIG. 205 to FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, which can receive game balls in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results.

  Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a in a front view. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the gaming area 5 a is disposed immediately above the second start opening 2004. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed above the first large winning opening 2005 on the right side in a front view of the first starting opening 2002.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the second large winning opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 is a second upper large winning opening 2006a and a second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of In the second large winning opening 2006, the second upper large winning opening 2006a is disposed near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper large winning opening 2006a. It is located on the left and down.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the right and left direction in the technique area 5a, and has the first start port 2002 and the first big winning port 2005, and the start port unit 2100 The lower side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the mouth unit 2100 and having the three general winning openings 2001 and the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A frame shaped like a side unit upper 2300 and a general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006 which are attached substantially at the center of the game area 5a. The center character 2500 is provided.

[Starting mouth unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 208 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first big winning opening 2005.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is a flat unit base 2101 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction and having a first big winning opening 2005 penetrating therethrough, A ball receiving portion 2102 which protrudes forward from an upper portion substantially in the left-right direction above the large winning opening 2005 and forms a first starting opening 2002, and a rear side of the unit base 2101 is attached A ball guiding portion 2103 for guiding the gaming ball received in 2002 downward, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the ball guiding portion 2103 and detecting the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002, and And a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first prize winning opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first large winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end has the same size as the first large winning opening 2005 and opens forward. A horizontally-long rectangular flat-plate-shaped first winning opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first large winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attachment solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first large winning opening door member 2112, and a member attached in the unit case 2111 and received by the first large winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting the game ball and the upper surface of the unit case 2111 are attached. The first opening unit relay board 2115 relaying the connection between the mouthpiece sensor 2104, the first attachment solenoid, and the first large winning hole sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310, and the lower portion of the unit case 2111 A starting opening unit decoration substrate (not shown) for emitting and decorating the winning opening 2005 is provided.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting opening 2002 is open upward in a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is opened forward in a size that allows a plurality of (for example, four to six) gaming balls to be received at one time.

  In the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 2104, it can be discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first starting opening sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first starting opening sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting opening It is determined in 2002 that the game ball has been accepted. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent action due to the insertion of a fraudulent tool into the first starting port 2002.

  In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attachment unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first opening winning opening door member 2112 of the first attachment unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the back into the mouth 2005 and closes the first big winning hole 2005. The first big winning opening door member 2112 is mounted upright by closing the first big winning opening 2005 by the unit case 2111 at the left and right ends of the lower side, and the upper side is the front. The first large winning opening 2005 can be opened from the closed state by rotating it so as to move downward.

  The first winning opening port door member 2112 of the first attachment unit 2110 is upright in the normal state (the first attachment solenoid 2113 is in the non-energized state) to close the first winning hole port 2005. Then, when the first attachment solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the state of being located. That is, the first large winning opening door member 2112 is inclined to be higher from the lower side of the first large winning opening 2005 to the front.

  In this state, when the gaming ball flows down the front of the first large winning opening 2005 and contacts the first large winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the gaming ball is from below due to the inclination of the first large winning opening door member 2112 It changes backward and is accepted by the first large winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. The gaming balls received in the first big winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2114.

[Below side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side unit in the front unit, and FIG. 209 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side unit. The lower side unit 2200 extends in a circular arc along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The lower side unit 2200 is a flat unit base 2201 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2201 It communicates with the three ball receiving portions 2202 which are open at the rear and each forms the general winning hole 2001 and the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201 And a hook portion 2203 for guiding the gaming ball received by the winning opening 2001 backward.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. The three ball receiving portions 2202 project from the front surface of the unit base 2201 apart from each other to the left and right. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a size that can receive only one game ball at a time.

  With the lower side unit 2200 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the general winning opening 2001 on the leftmost side in the front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the upper side unit 2300. The lower side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1112 by the hooks 2203 respectively. The gaming ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning hole sensor 3015 mounted in the back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 of the back lower movable displacing unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 245). Is detected and discharged downward.

[On side unit]
Next, the side unit upper 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the lower side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a.

  The upper side unit 2300 has a flat unit base 2301 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 and a shelf 2302 projecting forward from the front of the unit base 2301 and extending left and right so that the right end in the front view is low. And have. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

  With the side unit upper 2300 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf 2302 approaches the inner rail 1002, and the gaming ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is right by the shelf 2302 It can be induced to the direction (the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a).

[Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213. FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the center part of the front unit, and FIG. 211 is a rear perspective view of the center part of the front unit. Moreover, FIG. 212 is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path on the right side in center goods in a cross section. Further, FIG. 213 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attachment unit in the center product, and FIG. 213 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F in FIG.

  The center role 2500 is located slightly above the center of the front view slightly above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a, and is located on the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize from the front the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit and the like provided in the back unit 3000 through the frame. it can. The center product 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006.

  The center character 2500 is a flat frame-like flange 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening 1112 that penetrates widely at the center of the panel plate 1112 and the front from the flange 2511 A frame shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 which protrudes to prevent the game ball from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 which protrudes backward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112 A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the position of the front circumferential wall 2512 is slightly highest on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is a warp entrance 2520 in which the game balls in the game area 5a are opened so that the game balls in the game area 5a can enter on the outer peripheral surface of the front circumferential wall 2512 of the center base 2510. A warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball entering the warp inlet 2520 to the lower end of the left side in the front circumferential wall 2512 and a game ball circulated through the warp passage 2521 can be released and headed backward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521 The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 207) opened and the gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2522 to the center side in the left and right direction along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510 behind the flange 2511 The guiding path 2523 to be guided and the gaming ball guided by the guiding path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in front view And a stage 2530 that extends laterally along the lower side within the frame of the central portion of the center base 2510 in the left and right direction, and rolls the supplied game balls into the game area 5a after rolling it in the left and right direction. Have.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends of the front view left and right sides are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest It's out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W shape with a gentle slope. The stage 2530 is formed at the top of a slightly higher portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is lowered toward the front and is a fan-shaped central guiding portion 2531 which spreads slightly to the left and right; And fan-shaped side guide portions 2532 which are respectively formed at the lowermost two portions on both the left and right sides of the and which become lower toward the front and expand to the left and the right.

  The stage 2530 enters the warp entrance 2520 in the gaming area 5a when the gaming board 5 is assembled, and the gaming ball supplied to the stage 2530 through the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guide path 2523 is It is discharged forward from either the central guiding portion 2531 or the side guiding portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and is returned (returned back) into the gaming area 5a again. In the stage 2530, when the gaming board 5 is assembled, the first starting opening 2002 is located directly below the central guiding portion 2531 and the gaming ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 into the gaming area 5a. , Very likely to be accepted in the first starting port 2002.

  As shown in FIG. 212, in the center character 2500, a part of the front peripheral wall 2512 extends downward substantially vertically from the right end in the front view to the vicinity of the approximate center in the vertical direction on the upper side of the center base 2510. Front wall with the right end side slightly lower to the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000) with the gaming board 5 assembled from the lower end of the vertical wall 2512a and the upper right vertical wall 2512a An upper right lateral wall 2512b in which a portion of the portion 2512 extends to the right, and a right falling wall in which a portion of the front peripheral wall 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right lateral wall to substantially the same height as the stage 2530 A lower right lateral wall 2512 d in which a part of the front peripheral wall 2512 extends leftward so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right falling wall 2512 c toward the center in the left-right direction. , And a.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is formed in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 on the outer peripheral side of the upper right vertical wall 2512a and the upper right horizontal wall 2512b, and the upper right distribution space 2541 where game balls can flow, The gaming ball is formed below the lower right lateral wall 2512d, communicating with the right flow passage 2542 in communication with the right flow passage 2542 and communicating with the right flow passage 2542. And a lower right circulation space 2543 which can be circulated and can communicate with the game area 5a. The right hitting distribution area 2540 in the gaming area 5a is formed by the upper right distribution space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right distribution space 2543.

  The upper right distribution space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size in which the dimensions in the vertical and horizontal directions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball can flow down along a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the lower end portion extending vertically downward extends obliquely to the lower left in the front view, and the width in the lateral direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the gaming ball The game ball can be made to flow down in a line in the vertical direction.

  The lower right circulation space 2543 extends leftward from right below the part communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end in the front view becomes lower, and then opens a second attack passage 2543a opening leftward; A discharge passage 2543b communicating with the right end in front view of the two-attachment passage 2543a and extending downward, and a game ball can pass through the flange portion 2511 at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b and open backward And a second outlet 2543c. The second attachment passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose height in the vertical direction is about twice the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the left and right dimensions of the discharge passage 2543b are outside the gaming ball The passage is a little wider than the diameter. In the lower right distribution space 2543, when assembled on the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attachment passage 2543a is the first start opening 2002 and the first large opening in the front view left of the start opening unit 2100. The game ball is released from the left end of the second attachment passage 2543a into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attachment passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball entering the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c opened at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b and returned to the inside of the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being interrupted.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is open at the front as a whole, and extends from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right vertical wall 2512 a and the upper right lateral wall 2512 b at the lower half of the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by the part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a plate-like transparent right front decorative plate 2544 which extends forward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right falling wall 2512 c in a front view and the rear is the right falling wall It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right circulation space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 which extends downward from the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall 2512 d at the front, and the rear is lower right lateral wall It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512 d.

  The center product 2500 projects into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543, and includes a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extending in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls. In the right flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately project at predetermined intervals from the mutually facing surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 in the flow direction of the game ball. In the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542, the spacing between the deceleration ribs 2546 is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the gaming ball on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed narrower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right flow passage 2542, the gaming balls always flow downward in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be exerted against acceleration due to gravity.

  On the other hand, in the lower right distribution space 2543, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately project at predetermined intervals from the mutually opposing surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 in the distribution direction of the game ball . The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right circulation space 2543 are set such that the distance between the deceleration ribs 2546 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball between the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side There is. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the speed reducing rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed narrower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, even in the lower right distribution space 2543, the gaming balls always flow downward in a zig-zag fashion, thereby reducing the distribution speed of the gaming balls and preventing the distribution speed of the gaming balls from becoming too fast.

  In the present embodiment, the upper right distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, a gate unit 2003, and a second starting opening 2004, and the lower right distribution space 2543 has a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped.

  More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending to the right in the front view from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a, and one gaming ball is It is formed to be able to pass in the vertical direction only. A gate sensor 2547 for detecting passage of the game ball is attached to the gate unit 2003. The gate unit 2003 is arranged slightly leftward in a front view with respect to a position immediately below the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center work 2500 project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 closing the lower half of the upper right circulation space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. It is prepared for. More specifically, the center character 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 at the upper end is formed in a container shape opened upward and rearward, and directly below the general winning opening 2001. The lower end of the ball receiving member 2548 formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens toward the left on the left side surface in a front view, and the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511 A second start opening door member 2549 rotatably mounted and closing the second start opening 2004 so as to open and close and a rear surface of the flange portion 2511 drive the second start opening door member 2549 to open and close. A starting opening solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 262) and a second starting opening sensor 2551 for detecting a game ball received by the second starting opening 2004 It is equipped with a.

  The general winning opening 2001 of the center character 2500 is opened in a size such that only one game ball can be received upwards right below the gate portion 2003 in a front view right direction. The gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged rearward of the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center role 2500 in the right side in a front view.

  The second start opening 2004 opens rightward from the front view right below the general winning opening 2001, and the second start opening door member 2549 is opened to the left by turning counterclockwise from the front view It becomes possible to receive the game ball. The external shape of the second starting opening door member 2549 has a base end circle forming a lower portion in the front view, and two sides extending from one point outside the base end circle to contact the base end circle. And so-called "droplet-like", and is rotatably mounted at the center of the base circle.

  In the normal state, the second start opening 2004 is deenergized with the start opening solenoid 2550, and the second start opening door member 2549 is in the upright state in which the distal end side is positioned approximately directly above the base circle The second starting opening door member 2549 is closed so that the game ball can not be received. Then, when the starting opening solenoid 2550 is energized according to the result of the normal drawing selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the front end side of the second starting opening door member 2549 moves to the left in front view Then, the second start opening door member 2549 is rotated, and the rotation is stopped in a state where the tip end side is slightly high. As a result, the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be received. In the state where the second start opening door member 2549 is pivoted and opened, the tip end of the second start opening door member 2549 substantially matches the vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

  After being guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, the gaming ball received in the second starting opening 2004 is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2551 and discharged downward.

  The second large winning opening 2006 is arranged to open upward at the bottom of the second attachment passage 2543 a in the lower right circulation space 2543. More specifically, the second upper winning opening 2006a constituting the second large winning opening 2006 opens upward at the right end in the front view in the second attachment passage 2543a, and similarly, the second large winning opening The second lower large winning opening 2006b constituting the opening 2006 is opened upward at the left side and the lower side of the second upper large winning opening 2006a in the second attachment passage 2543a. The width of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is formed in the range of three to four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The center product 2500 is slidably supported by the center base 2510 in the front-rear direction so as to be able to open and close the second upper large winning opening 2006a opening upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511 It is attached on the rear surface of the center base 2510 and a flat second upper winning prize port door member 2552 which is projected so as to project forward and close the second upper big winning hole 2006a and is inclined so that the left end in front view is low. The second upper winning solenoid sensor 2554 for opening and closing the second upper big winning opening door member 2552 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received by the second upper winning hole 2006a (FIG. 262 And the front and back sides of the center base 2510 so as to enable opening and closing of the second lower large winning opening 2006b opening upward. The second flat-plate-like second plate which is supported so as to be slidable toward the front and whose front end projects forward of the front face of the flange portion 2511 to close the second lower large winning opening 2006b and lowers the left end in front view The second lower attack solenoid 2556 attached to the lower large winning opening door 2555 and the rear surface of the center base 2510 to open and close the second lower large winning opening door 2555, and accepted by the second lower large winning opening 2006b And a second lower winning opening sensor 2557 (see FIG. 262) for detecting the game ball.

  In addition, the center character 2500 extends in the left-right direction straddling between the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 A flat plate-like cross-plate portion 2558 which is inclined so that the left end side of the view is lower and which forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attachment passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 A flat discharge plate 2559 extends in the left-right direction so that the left end is low from the front end left end of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attachment passage 2543a and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attachment passage 2543a. And have. The transverse plate portion 2558 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction in a range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. The release plate portion 2559 is formed to have a length of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  In the second attachment passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows in the left-right direction at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball It is set up. In the second attachment passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 213, from the upstream side of the flow of gaming balls, the first deceleration rib 2546a, the second deceleration rib 2546b, the third deceleration rib 2546c, the fourth deceleration rib 2546d, Ten speed reduction ribs 2546 including a fifth speed reduction rib 2546e, a sixth speed reduction rib 2546f, a seventh speed reduction rib 2546g, an eighth speed reduction rib 2546h, a ninth speed reduction rib 2546i, and a tenth speed reduction rib 2546j are provided. An odd-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and an even-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, and the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is disposed slightly to the right of the left end in the front view of the second upper large winning opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is disposed on the left side of the left end of the second upper large winning opening 2006a in a front view, in the vicinity of the right end of the bridge portion 2558. The third deceleration rib 2546c is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the transition plate portion 2558. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is disposed on the right side of the right end of the second lower large winning opening 2006b in a front view, in the vicinity of the left end of the bridge portion 2558. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is disposed on the left side of the right end in the front view of the second lower large winning opening 2006. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is disposed on the right in the front view in the left-right direction center of the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The seventh deceleration rib 2546g is disposed on the left in the front view in the left-right direction center of the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is disposed to the right of the left end in the front view of the second lower large winning opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in the front view of the second lower large winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the release plate 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546 j is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the release plate 2559.

  Of the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first deceleration rib 2546a to the ninth deceleration rib 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom of the second attachment passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall 2512d). Further, among the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 The even-numbered decelerating ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attachment passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 213 (a)).

  Of the even-numbered decelerating ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second decelerating rib 2546b closest to the left end in front view of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b, respectively The eighth deceleration rib 2546h, as shown in FIG. 213 (a), has a lower end at the bottom of the second attachment passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper large winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 Above the upper surface of the lower decelerating rib 2546, and is separated from the lower end of the other decelerating rib 2546 by a larger distance. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are the same distance as the outer diameter of the gaming ball from the front end left end of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b, respectively. , Are formed to be separated.

  As a result, when the second upper winning opening 2006a or the second lower opening 2006b moves from the open state where the game ball can be received to the closed state where it can not receive the game ball, the second upper winning hole slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower large winning opening door member 2555, the front view left end of the second upper large winning opening 2006a or the front view left end of the second lower large winning opening 2006b, and the second reduction rib 2546b It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) in which the game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h.

  In the state where the second upper winning prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning prize opening door member 2555 are projected forward to close the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b, In a state where the second upper winning prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning prize opening door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper large winning opening door member 2552 or the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second reduction rib 2546b or the eighth reduction rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball The game ball which is narrower than the second upper large winning opening door member 2552 and the upper surface of the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 (rolls) is the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h. And a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

  The center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 from the center of the upper side of the front circumferential wall 2512 from the approximate center in the left-right direction to the right on the front view, and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a ), And a space having a width allowing only one game ball to flow is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be hit in the front view right with respect to the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center character 2500 (so-called, hit right), the center in the game area 5a A game ball can be distributed in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the character 2500 in a front view.

  Further, in the assembled state on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the left and lower of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game balls driven into the game area 5a circulate downward through various paths by abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 214 to 217. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 215 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 218 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like on the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 218 (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like viewed from the back.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a lock attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 for removably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A mechanism 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in a front view in the back box 3010 and discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the center character 2500; It is attached near the front end of the front view lower right corner in the back box 3010, and the second big winning opening 2006 and the second of the center character 2500 Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center character 2500 to the bottom in the back box 3010, and then laterally central along the bottom. After being guided to the vicinity, the sheet is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game balls received by the second large winning opening 2006 and the second out port 2543c of the center character 2500 along the bottom in the back box 3010 to the left in front view, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the back view above the opening 3010 a at the back surface of the back box 3010 and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the back of the back up left movable effect unit 3200 The upper relay substrate 3040 relaying the connection with the upper left decorative substrate 3253, the upper relay substrate cover 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay substrate 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 A box-shaped effect driving board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010 a and an effect driving board box 3042 housed in the effect driving board box 3042 from the peripheral control board 1510 Right view from the rear surface of back box 3010 and effect drive board 3043 which drives each drive motor, decoration board etc. based on control command A panel relay board 3044, which is attached at a corner and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and each winning hole sensor, each solenoid, etc., and a rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay substrate cover 3045 attached.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 218 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. And two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view left side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side in rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Moreover, although the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the boss | hub for attaching each movable presentation unit etc., an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the back box 3010 in the position suitably.

[Back left inside decoration unit]
Next, the back left center decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 216 and 217 and the like. The back left inside decoration unit 3050 is attached near the front end on the upper side from the center in the vertical direction in the front view left side in the back box 3010. The back left inside decoration unit 3050 has a translucent unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010, and an attachment that is attached to the front of the unit base 3051 to form a decoration that three-dimensionally simulates the "middle layer" of mahjong. A back left middle decoration body 3052 having a light transmitting property, a back left middle decoration substrate 3053 attached between the back left middle decoration body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; Is equipped.

  The back left inside decoration unit 3050 can emit light and decorate the back left inside decoration body 3052 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left inside decoration substrate 3053.

[Back and back movable production unit]
Next, the back and bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear movable presentation unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 219 (b) is a perspective view of the back and back back movable presentation unit. FIG. 220 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back and back movable presentation unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 220 (b) is a disassembled back and back back movable presentation unit for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 221 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the back and back movable presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the first back body and the back second back decoration, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view seen from the back with it disassembles and it is a back decoration with a first decoration and a back decoration second decoration. FIG. 223 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the back bottom back movable presentation unit from the front. Fig. 224 (a) is a front view of the back and back movable presentation unit in the normal state, and (b) is a rotation of the first back and back back second decoration together from the normal state. It is a front view in a state where the second decorative surface of the second decorative body is directed to the front, and (c) is the back of the first decorative body and the lower back second decorative member in the state of (b) Is a front view in a state where it is moved to the moving end on the left side in a front view. In FIG. 225 (d), the first decorative body and the second decorative body are rotated together in the state of FIG. 224 (c) to form the first decorative surface of the first decorative body. (E) is a front view of the state directed to the front, and the first decoration is rotated from the state of (d) to the back and back to open the first decoration and the second decoration at the back. It is a front view in a state where the second decorative surface of the first back surface and the second decorative surface of the second back surface are directed to the front.

  The back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front of the back wall below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back and back movable presentation unit 3100 is supported by the back and forth back first decorative body 3110 coaxially with the vertically extending axial line on one side extending up and down. A rotary drive unit 3130 having a second rear decoration 3120, a lower back lower first decorative body and a lower back rear second decoration attached to the hinge rotatably and capable of separately driving the respective rotation, and a rotary drive unit 3130 And a slide unit 3150 slidably mounted in the left and right direction and mounted in the back box 3010, and a back and rear fixed decoration 3160 attached to the front of the slide unit 3150.

  The first decorative surface 3110 includes a first decorative surface 3111 and a second decorative surface 3112 which are disposed opposite to each other and are formed to be different from each other and have different light transmission properties, and the first decorative surface. A thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body main body 3113 supporting the 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 so as to face each other, and the first decorative body main body 3113 are attached, and the display screen is The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from one decorative surface 3111, and the side contacting the second decorative surface 3112 of the four sides of the rectangular first decorative body main body 3113 that extend vertically And two first hinges 3115 that can be supported so as to rotate about an axis extending up and down, and a first decorative body between the sub liquid crystal display 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112 Body 3113 Attached first decorative substrate after under the back of a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides has (not shown) in which provided with a.

  The first decorative surface 3111 of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces the front from the inside of the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the character of "Holy" is given. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the periphery control substrate 1510.

  The two first hinges 3115 are vertically spaced and coaxially attached. The first hinges 3115 are hinge-rotatably supported by the second hinges 3124 of the back-rear second decorative body 3120. The back and first back decoration substrate can emit light and decorate the first decoration surface 3111 and the second decoration surface 3112 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

  The back and back second decorative body 3120 is disposed opposite to each other, is formed with different decorations, and has a first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122 having translucency, and a first decorative surface. A rectangular solid second decorative body main body 3123 supporting the thin film 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 so as to face each other, and four extending in the vertical direction in the rectangular solid second decorative body main body 3123 It projects outward from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 of the sides, and rotates the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 back and forth around the axis extending up and down. A decorative body projecting cylindrically downward from the lower ends of the three second hinges 3124 which can be supported and spaced up and down and the lowermost second hinge 3124 of the three second hinges 3124 Support shaft 3125, The second decoration body side operation gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decoration body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decoration body support shaft 3125, and the outer periphery of the decoration body support shaft 3125 Between the first detection surface 3121 and the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3112 in the second decoration body 3123 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides And a second decorative substrate (not shown).

  The first decorative surface 3121 of the back and back second decorative body 3120 is formed with a decoration on which vertical writing "Nunkin" is applied. The second decorative surface 3122 of the back and back second decorative body 3120 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character of "Holy" is given. The second decoration main body 3123 of the back bottom back second decoration 3120 is formed to have a size substantially equal to that of the first decoration main body 3113 of the back bottom back first decoration 3110. That is, the outer dimensions of the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the back bottom first decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3122 of the back bottom back second decoration 3120 are the same. It is formed in substantially the same size.

  The three second hinge portions 3124 of the back second back body 3120 are vertically separated and coaxially attached, respectively, and the back second back portion 1124 is attached between the second hinge portions 3124. First hinges 3115 of 3110 are positioned and hingedly attached to each other. Thus, the back-to-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-to-back second decoration 3120 are closed with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 facing each other by hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface to each other It can rotate (hinge rotation) between the open state in which 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 are substantially coplanar. Then, in the state in which the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are opened, the second decoration faces 3112 and 3122 sandwich the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 to each other. It will be lined up, and each decoration will unite and the character of "holy" will appear. Although detailed illustration is omitted for the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the respective first decorative surfaces 3111 and 311 in the back rear first decoration 3110 and the back rear second decoration 3120. A decoration corresponding to the decoration given to 3121 and the second decoration surface 3112 and 3122 is given, and when the first decoration 3110 for back and back and the second decoration 3120 for back and back are opened, The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are made inconspicuous.

  At the upper end portion of the decoration support shaft 3125, the rotation transmitting member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 is rotatable so as to hinge-rotate the first decoration 3110 at the upper back and the second decoration 3120 at the lower back and the second decoration. Be inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotational drive unit base 3131 in the rotational drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the heights of the first decorative surface 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122. Furthermore, specifically, it is formed in 80%-90% of length. As a result, by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, even if the back heavy rear lower first decorative body 3110 etc. is eccentric on one side extending up and down and hinge rotation is possible, the back rear first The decorative body 3110 or the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall down.

  As shown in FIG. 222, the second decoration-side operation gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a that protrudes beyond the gear teeth at one location on the outer periphery, and can not be rotated once. The back and back second decoration substrate of the back and back second decorative body 3120 can emit and decorate the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3122 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 of the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3100 has a box shape open at the front side and rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 and is rotatably mounted to the slide unit 3150 in the lateral direction. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a rotatably supported by a rotary drive unit base 3131 and rotatably mounted on the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, projecting upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a A connecting portion 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, a first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over a half circumference around the lower end portion outer periphery of the sleeve portion 3132a, and one of the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c It has a first detection piece 3132 d extending outward from the end Includes a rotation transmitting member 3132 are, the.

  In addition, the rotational drive unit 3130 is a spur gear-like first drive gear 3133 meshing with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132 c of the rotation transfer member 3132 and a back rear first drive motor that rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133. 3134, the first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first back drive 3134 is attached and mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 and the second decoration side operation gear 3126 of the second back decoration 3120 are engaged A second drive gear 3136 in the form of a spur gear, a back and back second drive motor 3137 for driving the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, and a back and back second drive motor 3137 are mounted and in the rotation drive unit base 3131 And a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be mounted.

  Furthermore, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132 d of the rotation transfer member 3132, and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and capable of detecting the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 at the back and bottom.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the back bottom first decoration substrate, the back bottom second decoration substrate, the back bottom first drive motor 3134, The rotary drive unit relay board 3141 relaying the connection between the back lower second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the second rotation detection sensor 3140 and the back lower relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150 , Further equipped.

  Further, the rotational drive unit 3130 is a flat unit cover 3142 closing the front surface of the rotational drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a attached to the lower surface of the rotational drive unit base 3131 and elongated horizontally, and a rack gear And a rack member 3143 having a flat-plate shaped detection piece 3143b formed at the right end in a front view of 3143a.

  The rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130 is a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped, and a main portion 3131a in which the decoration support shaft 3125, the back bottom first drive motor 3134, the back bottom second drive motor 3137, etc. And a sub-portion 3131b which is disposed substantially to the left of the main portion 3131a in a front view as viewed from the main portion 3131a and has a substantially half height of the main portion 3131a and in which the rotary drive unit relay substrate 3141 is accommodated. The main portion 3131a and the sub portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottoms aligned.

  Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 is provided with a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131 c and a lower bearing portion 3131 d which are open at the front end side and notched toward the rear on the top plate portion and bottom plate portion . The upper bearing portion 3131 c penetrates up and down, and the sleeve portion 3132 a of the rotation transmission member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131 d is recessed downward from above and does not penetrate up and down, and the bearing member 3127 of the back second rear decoration 3120 is inserted. The open front end sides of the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d are closed by a unit cover 3142.

  The lower back rear first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the right side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a front view via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The lower back rear second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the left side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a front view via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

  The back-to-back first drive motor 3134 rotates the first drive gear 3133 to rotate the first drive gear 3133, thereby rotating the first drive gear 3133 together with the first decorative body-side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmitting member 3132 , The back and forth back first decoration 3110 can be rotated. On the other hand, the lower back rear second drive motor 3137 rotates the second drive gear 3136 to rotate the second drive gear 3136 so that the second decoration side actuating gear 3126 at the lower end of the decoration support shaft 3125 meshing with the second drive gear 3136 The back and back second decoration 3120 can be rotated together with the decoration support shaft 3125.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the slide unit 3150 of the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 is attached to a box-shaped unit base 3151 attached in the back box 3010 and opened forward and upward, and attached to the upper part in the unit base 3151 The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted on the front surface, and the slide guide 3152 extending in the left and right direction is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction substantially in the left and right direction in the unit base 3151 A transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a meshing with the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-like driven gear 3153b which is integrally rotated with the pinion gear 3153a and larger in diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153 A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 engaged with the driven gear 3153 b of the transmission gear member 3153; a back lower third drive motor 3155 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151 to rotationally drive the drive gear 3154; A slide detection sensor 3156 mounted in 3151 and detecting a detection piece 3143 b of the rack member 3143 in the rotational drive unit 3130 and a substantially lower half of a front open portion of the unit base 3151 are closed to It has a horizontal flat flat slide cover 3157 attached to the front end, and a back rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. ing.

  The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 slidably supports the rotational drive unit 3130 in the left-right direction. The lower back third drive motor 3155 rotationally drives the drive gear 3154 to rotationally drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshing with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 meshing with the drive unit 3130.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 223 and FIG. 224 (a) etc., in the normal state, the back and forth movable presentation unit 3100 has the rotary drive unit 3130 positioned at the right end in the front view with respect to the left and right slide directions by the slide unit 3150. ing. Further, in the normal state, the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 are in a state in which the second decoration faces 3112 and 3122 face each other and are closed, The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 (the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed forward. In this normal state, the back and forth back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 are positioned on the right side with respect to the axis of hinge rotation (decorative body support axis 3125) extending up and down. doing. Also, in the normal state, the side opposite to the side of the back of the first decorative body 3110 and the back second back of the second decorative body 3120 that is rotatably supported by the hinge is the decorative body. The whole is rotated so as to be located forward of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the normal state, the back and back first decorative body 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 are rotated approximately 20 degrees in a clockwise direction in plan view.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 223, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotational drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. In the normal state, the first detection piece 3132 d of the rotation transfer member 3132 in the rotational drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the back side first rear body 3110 is in a state where detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Furthermore, in the normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 in the back and back second decoration 3120 is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  Also, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 201 etc., when assembled on the game board 5, the back bottom back first back of the first decoration 3110 facing the front (front) of the movable decoration unit 3100 The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located at the lower front corner of the center character 2500 in the front right corner of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and on the player side From this, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right side of the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are positioned forward of the center of hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device The display screen 3114 is inclined to face the vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100.

  In this normal state, the second drive gear 3136, the second decoration body side operation gear 3126, and the decoration support shaft 3125 are driven by the second drive motor 3137 of the second drive motor 3137 under the second rotation drive unit 3130. It is closed when the second decorative body 3120 is turned in plan view clockwise direction (160 degrees) so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the back of the decorative body 3120 faces the front. The back of the second decoration 3120 located in front of the second decoration 3120 is pressed by the second decoration 3120 by the second decoration 3120 and is rotated together, and the back of the back is decorated with "good luck" The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 faces the front (see FIG. 224 (b)). Further, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back bottom first decorative body 3110, which has been facing the front in the normal state, is in the state of facing rearward and becomes invisible from the player side. From this state, any of the back and back first decorative body 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 can not be further rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view.

  In the state shown in FIG. 224 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, which rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 behind the lower back, is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125, which rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120, is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction in a front view by the third drive motor 3155 after the back of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position of the left end in a front view together with the back bottom back first decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 via 3143a. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the position of the left end in a front view in a state assembled to the game board 5, an axis extending in the vertical direction of the hinge rotation (center line of the decoration support axis 3125) is It substantially coincides with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows the state of sliding movement to the position of the left end in the front view in the state of FIG. 224 (b). In FIG. 225 (d), the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmission member are driven by driving the first drive motor 3134 to the rear end and moving to the position at the left end in the front view in the state of FIG. The first decorative body 3110 is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction in plan view through the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c and the connection portion 3132b of 3132 to perform the back lower first decorative body A state in which the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of 3110 is directed to the front, or from the state of FIG. 224 (c), by driving the first drive motor 3134. Is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the back and back first decoration 3110 is rotated together with the first decoration 3110 and the second decoration 3120 is rotated to turn the first decoration 3110 One decorative surface 3111 ( A state with its blanking liquid crystal display device 3114) in front shows.

  Subsequently, in the state shown in FIG. 224 (c), the second back body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by driving the second back drive motor 3137, or FIG. As shown in FIG. 225 (e), when the back bottom back first decoration 3110 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise in plan view by driving the back bottom back first drive motor 3134 in the state of (d). After the second decorative surface 3112 of the first back body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second back body 3120 are folded to face each other, they are hinge-rotated to back The first decorative body 3110 and the back and back second decorative body 3120 are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are aligned in the left and right direction and face the front.

  In the state shown in FIG. 225 (e), the back first back decoration 3110 and the back second back decoration 310 are overlapped with each other in the state of being superimposed on each other, the back back first decoration 3110 and The respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back second back decoration 3120 are arranged side by side, so that the face of the decoration formed by the back back first decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 is The size can be doubled, and it can be made to stand out in the game area 5a to attract the player's attention, and the player can be surprised by the appearance of the large decoration. Further, in the state of FIG. 225 (e), the decorations of the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back side first decoration 3110 and the back side second decoration 3120 are integrated, and the character of "Holy" is displayed. Decoration will be visible. The first hinge 3115 and the second hinge 3124 of the first back body 3110 and the second back body 3120 have first and second decoration faces 3111 and 3121 and second and third decoration faces 3112 and 3122 respectively. A decoration corresponding to the decoration given is given, and when the first back body 3110 and the second back body 3120 are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are provided. Can be made inconspicuous, making it possible for the player to visually recognize the character of "holy" in a good state.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, in the integrated decoration formed by the first decorative body 3110 in the back and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the second decoration 3120 in the back, A cut-out decoration 3170 like "one" is formed. The cut out decoration 3170 is formed by cutting out a part of a character or pattern, and on the upper side of the cut out decoration 3170, the back up left first decoration body 3210 of the back up left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cut out decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the back upper left second decoration body 3220 are positioned side by side, the whole of the character of "sparrow" is completed by the decoration (See Figure 254).

  As described above, according to the back bottom and back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back bottom back first decoration body 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration body 3120 are closed to each other from each other by overlapping each other's faces. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and opened, the surface of the decoration by the back-to-back first decoration 3110 and the back-to-back second decoration 3120 is enlarged (expanded) in the front view gaming area 5a ), And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which are closed and can not be seen from the player side can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first back of the first decorative body 3110 and the second back of the second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In the state (see FIG. 225 (d)), when the back bottom back first decoration 3110 is rotated and placed back to back left side front view second decoration 3120, the back bottom back first reflection The decoration area that was only the first decoration surface 3111 of 3110 becomes two of the second decoration surface 3112 and 3122 of the back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 so as to extend leftward. While the area of decoration is doubled, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which were not visible until now become visible from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). Alternatively, with the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 closed and the back back first decoration 3121 of the second decoration 3120 facing forward (FIG. 224 (c) Refer to), when the back and back second decoration 3120 is rotated and aligned to the right of the front view first decoration 3110 in the back and back, the first back only of the back and back second decoration 3120 only at the first decoration surface 3121 The area of the decoration is doubled so that the area of the decoration becomes two, the back and forth first decoration 3110 and the second decoration surface 3112 and 3122 of the back and back second decoration 3120 so as to extend rightward. As a result, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which were not visible until now become visible from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). Thus, by opening from the state where the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 are opened, the decoration range by the back back first decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 The game can be expanded and the decoration can be changed, so that the player can have a strong impact, and the player's attention is given to the first decoration 3110 and the second decoration 2120. While being able to attract strongly and enjoy the decoration spread by the back decoration first decoration 3110 and the back decoration second decoration 3120, making the player think that something good may be done It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, in a state where the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 are superimposed on each other and closed, the back back first decoration 3110 and back back second decoration 3120 are put together. If it is rotated, the first decoration 3110 on the back and the second decoration 3120 on the back and the back are rotated about the vertically extending side of one of the hinges rotatably mounted. When the back (back) face is turned forward, the entire position of the back decoration back first decoration 3110 and back back second decoration 3120 is the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the position of the other side across. More specifically, the back first back decoration 3110 and the back second back decoration 3120 are closed, and the back second back 3111 (sub liquid crystal display 3114) of the first decoration 3110 is directed forward. (See FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)), when the back first back body decoration 3110 and the back second back body decoration 3120 are rotated together, the back first back body decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 move to the left in the front view, and the back bottom back first decoration surface 3121 of the second decoration 3120 faces forward (Fig. 224 (b) and See (c)). On the other hand, with the back first back decoration 3110 and the back back second decoration 3120 closed and the back back first decoration 3121 of the second decoration 3120 facing forward (Fig. 224 (b) And (c)), when the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are rotated together, the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are rotated. While the whole moves to the right in the front view, the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is turned to the front from behind (see FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)). As a result, the area of the decoration by the back bottom first decoration 3110 or the back bottom second decoration 3120 in the front view gaming area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side is changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the first decoration 3110 or the back second decoration 3120, and the back first decoration 3110 or the back second decoration The movement and decoration of 3120 can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, in a state in which the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are overlapped with each other, the back bottom back first decoration 3110 or the back bottom second decoration 3120 is selected. In the case of rotating and opening, or rotating the back and forth back first decoration 3110 and back and back second decoration 3120 together, in any case, back and back first decoration 3110 and back and back first Since the surface visible from the player side of the two decoration 3120 starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation start, whether the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are opened, or It is difficult to determine whether the player and the player rotate together, and the player can be thrilled and excited depending on which action is taken, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. In addition, with respect to the decoration that can be viewed in the original state, the player is different between the case where the back first back decoration 3110 and the back second back decoration 3120 are opened and rotated together. Since the change in the decoration that can be viewed from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change in the decoration in various patterns, and the player can be made less likely to get bored with various effects.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 is hinged to rotate the back-to-back first decorative body 3110 and the back-to-back second decoration 3120 so that different decorations are provided. The decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 can be directed to the front, and the slide unit 3150 slides the back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 in the left and right direction. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

  Further, in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, in the back bottom back second decoration 3120, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending up and down the outline of the quadrangle. The upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decoration support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be respectively rotated by the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130 It is supported and rotatably supported in two places, which are separated from each other as much as possible. Accordingly, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from the position eccentric to the center of gravity of the back side first decorative body 3110 and the back side second decorative body 3120 so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is located on the upper side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 Even if a load is applied to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 due to the weight of the back side first rear body 3110 attached and the back side second cosmetic body 3120, it is difficult to tilt the decorative body support side 3125 The back support first support 3110 and the back support second decoration 3120 can be rotated by supporting the decoration support shaft 3125 straight. In other words, since the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131 c and the lower bearing portion 3131 d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decorative body Since the support shaft 3125 is hard to tilt, the large-weight back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 which are hinge-rotatably attached to each other are also located coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[Back up left movable production unit]
Next, the back-upper-left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. FIG. 226 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 226 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 227 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 228 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 229 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a back upper left first decorative body and a back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view shown in the state where it was moved to the position of a front view right end, and (c) shows the back first left decoration and the second back left decoration from the state of (b). It is a front view.

  The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 from the left end to the vicinity of the center in a front view. The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 extends in the front view up and down of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 having a square shape in front view and a predetermined decoration on the front surface. The back top left second decoration 3220 and the back top left first decoration 3210 are mounted on the right side with the hinge rotatably attached and the two faces facing away being provided with different decorations The sliding drive unit 3230 for rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by a hinge, the rotary driving unit 3230 and the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the back upper left second decoration body 3220 in the lateral direction And a slide unit 3240 mounted in the back box 3010.

The back top left first decorative body 3210 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 is a flat fixed decorative member 3211 having predetermined transparency on the front surface and having translucency, and the front end of the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view To cover the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the cylindrical first hinge portion 3212 which is mounted three coaxially vertically separated with respect to the vertically extending axial line projecting outward from the side A first decorative body base 3213 attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and projecting upward beyond the fixed decorative member 3211, and mounted between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211 The first decorative base 321 is connected to the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and to the upper surface of the first decorative base 3213 so that the side view is L-shaped. A connection portion 3215 extending from the left end to a position further to the right than the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connection portion 3215 and extending left and right, and from the front end near the left end of the connection portion 3215 And a flat plate-like detection piece 3217 extending.
Is equipped.

  The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a rectangular shape with a slightly elongated shape in a front view. The fixed decoration member 3211 has a side extending to the left and right, and a side extending to the left and the right of the first decoration 3110 at the back and the second decoration 3120 at the back and the back of the movable effect unit 3100. The same length, and the length of the side extending up and down is shorter than the length of the side extending up and down of the back and forth first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120. The fixed decoration member 3211 is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the characters of "sparrow" is given. As shown in FIG. 229 (c), in the present embodiment, the lower part of the lowermost "one" part is disconnected from the lowermost part with respect to the character "sparrow".

  The three first hinge portions 3212 are respectively provided at the upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions above the center in the vertical direction. Further, the three first hinge portions 3212 protrude rightward and forward from the right side in a front view of the fixed decorative member 3211. The rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decorative body base 3213 on the front face of a portion protruding upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the rear surface of the vertically extending portion of the L-shaped side view in the connection portion 3215. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can emit light and decorate the fixed decorative member 3211 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back upper left first decoration substrate 3214.

  The back top left second decorative body 3220 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 is a light transmitting first decoration member 3221 having a rectangular outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and the back surface of the first decoration member 3221 And a second decorative member 3222 having translucency having a decoration different from the first decorative member 3221 on the surface facing the surface of the first decorative member 3221 and the left and right of the first decorative member 3221 And two second hinge portions 3223 protruding outward from one of the vertically extending sides of one of the two, and hinged rotatably attached to the first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210; A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-like operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member 221 and the back on the left second decorative substrate having a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides is mounted between the second decorative member 3222 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 has a decoration on the surface of which the characters "Dokun" are given. The second decorative member 3222 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character of "sparrow" is formed on the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221. This second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as the character of "Song" by being located on the left side in a front view of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back top left first decorative body 3210. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decoration member 3211 and the second decoration member 3222 is a cut-out decoration 3260 in which the lower part is interrupted from the upper side of the lowermost "one" part with respect to the character of the "sparrow" On this lower side, the decoration (cut out decoration) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back bottom back first decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 in the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 is positioned By doing this, the letters "Song" are completed. In addition, since the cut-out decoration 3260 on the side of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", it can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut off.

  The two second hinge portions 3223 project rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated, and are respectively provided at positions closer to the center than the upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back top left first decorative body 3210. The operating gear 3225 is attached to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operation gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotary drive unit 3230.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 can emit light and decorate the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative substrate (not shown). .

  The rotary drive unit 3230 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a space between the rotary drive base 3231 attached to the front of the first decorative body base 3213 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rotary drive base 3231 A rotary drive cover 3232 which is formed and mounted on the upper side of the rotary drive base 3231, and rotatably mounted between the rotary drive cover 3232 and the rotary drive base 3231 and with an operation gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 A spur gear-like transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear (not shown) that meshes with the transmission gear 3233, and a back upper first drive motor mounted on the top surface of the rotation drive cover 322 to rotationally drive the drive gear 3235, mounted between the rotary drive base 3231 and the rotary drive cover 3232, the rotational position of the drive gear Rotation detecting sensor for detecting a (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the back top left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extended outward, and the rotation detection sensor detects this detection piece to detect the rotational position of the drive gear, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, The rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected through the operating gear 3225.

  The rotary drive unit 3230 causes the back upper left second decoration 3220 to be hinge-rotated via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233 and the operation gear 3225 by rotationally driving the back upper left first drive motor 3235. Can.

  The slide unit 3240 of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 is slidably mounted on the horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, the horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front of the unit base 3241 and the slide rail 3242 A slider 3243 to which the connection portion 3215 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is attached on the front, and a base cover 3244 attached to the front of the unit base 3241 such that a space is formed between the unit base 3241 A back upper left second drive motor 3245 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241 through the base cover 3244; Attached to the rotating shaft of motor 3245 The unit base 3241 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246, a small diameter first transmission gear 3247a meshing with the drive gear 3246, and a large diameter second transmission gear 3247b integrally rotating with the first transmission gear 3247a. The transmission gear member 3247 rotatably mounted between the cover 3244 and the second transmission gear 3247 b of the transmission gear member 3247 are meshed with the rack gear 3216 of the first rear body 3210 and meshed with the second transmission gear 3247 b. A pinion gear 3248 rotatably mounted between the base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a slide detection sensor 3249 mounted on the base cover 3244 and detecting the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 Have.

  In addition, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the front of the base cover 3244 on the left in front view, and has a back upper left first decoration substrate 3214, a back upper left second decoration substrate, a back upper left first drive motor 3235, a rotation detection sensor, The back upper left relay board 3250 relaying the connection between the back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043 and the front cover of the back upper left relay board 3250 A substrate cover 3251 attached to the front, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front of the substrate cover 3251, and a back left upper decorative substrate 3253 attached to the front of the back upper left decorative base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front , The front left of the back upper left decorative base 3252 is attached to cover the front of the back left upper decorative substrate 3253 A back left upper ornamental body 3254 having formed the translucent, and a.

  When the slide gear 3246 rotates the drive gear 3246 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 backs up the back upper left first decorative body 3210 via the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248 and the rack gear 3216. The left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 can be slid in the lateral direction. In addition, by making the LED of the back left upper decorative substrate 3253 emit light as appropriate, the back left upper decoration 3254 can be made to emit light.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is such that the back upper left second decoration 3220 covers the front of the back upper left first decoration 3210. The left second decorative body 3220 is folded toward the back upper left first decorative body 3210 by the rotary drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in a state of being In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the left end in the front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) also detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. In addition, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

  In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decoration unit 3050 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the player side It is in a state where it is not visible from (see FIG. 201 etc.).

  Under normal conditions, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction of the front view through the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right in front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 engaged with the 3248 and reaches the right end The slide movement stops (see FIG. 229 (b)). In this state, the hinge-rotatable vertically extending axes of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the state assembled to the game board 5 are the center of the game area 5 a in the left-right direction. And the back top left first decorative body 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 253).

  Then, with the back upper left first decorative body 3210 positioned at the right end in the front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotational drive unit 3230 is via the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the actuating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the back upper left second decoration 3220 folded and covering the front of the back upper left first decoration 3210 is expanded The hinge is turned to be in a state of being lined up on the right side in front view of the back top left first decorative body 3210 (see FIG. 229 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side, so that the size is about twice as large as that in the normal state. While being able to attract the player's attention strongly, the appearance of the large decoration can surprise the player.

  In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state of facing the front side by side and the respective decorations are integrated. And the decoration of the letters "Sparrow" will be visible. The first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are decorated with the decoration applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. A corresponding decoration is provided to make the first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 inconspicuous when the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is opened from the back upper left first decorative body 3210 It is possible to make the player visually recognize the character of "sparrow" in a good state.

  In addition, the decoration of the character of "Sparrow" that can be viewed together as one piece is broken down from the position above the lowermost "one" part, and the back top left first decoration 3210 and the back top Integrally with the decoration of the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the back and back first decoration 3110 and the back and back second decoration 3120 of the back and back movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decoration 3220 In this case, the letters "sparrow" are complete (see FIG. 254).

  In this manner, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back upper left second decorative body 3220 up and down The hinge can be folded so as to cover the front of the first back decoration 3210 or can be expanded to be aligned with the right front of the first back decoration 3210 by rotating the hinge about a vertical axis. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

[Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 230 and 231. FIG. 230 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 230 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 231 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 231 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decoration in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 in a front view. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported slidably in the left and right direction behind the back right fixed decoration 3310 and the back right fixed decoration 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front and a predetermined The frame-shaped back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the decoration is applied and the back right movable decorative body 3320 are slid in the left and right direction to be attached in the back box 3010 and the back left fixed decoration 3310 is attached to the front And a back left drive unit 3330.

  The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a vertically long shape in a front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 has a three-dimensional decoration and is attached to the light transmitting fixed side decorative member 3311 and the rear surface of the fixed side decorative member 3311, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a left rear fixed decoration substrate 3312. As shown in the drawing, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially provided with a decoration of "發". The back left fixed decoration 3310 can emit light and decorate the fixed side decoration member 3311 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left fixed decoration substrate 3312.

  The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310 as viewed from the front. The back left movable decorative body 3320 is a frame-like movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a translucent frame-like decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321 And a frame-like movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decoration frame 3322 and a back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decoration frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And a substrate 3324.

  The movable-side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back-bottom back first decoration 3110 in the back-bottom back movable presentation unit 3100. The lower end side of the movable base 3323 protrudes below the movable side decoration member 3321 and the decoration frame 3322, and the protruding portion is slidably mounted in the left-right direction by the back left drive unit 3330. Although the illustration is omitted, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U-shape along a portion on the right side of the center of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 in the left-right direction in a front view. The light emitting decoration of the movable side decoration member 3321 can be performed by making the LED of the back left movable decoration substrate 3324 emit light.

  The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide laterally. The slide guide 3332 attached to the left and right direction, the back left drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation axis extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation axis of the back left drive motor 3333 A hook-like actuating arm (not shown) attached at the tip end side and connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320 and a slide detection sensor 3335 attached to the unit base 3331 for detecting the rotational position of the actuating arm Is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 and fixed to the back left Urahidari movable decorative substrate 3324, and a Urahidari relay board 3336 that relays the connection between the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and effect driving substrate 3043, the.

  The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 mounts the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side in front view. The slide guide 3332 slidably mounts the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 in the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 in a rear view. The actuating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end in the rear view of the lower side of the frame-like back left movable decorative body 3320 at the tip end. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the action | operation arm is penetrating the front-back at the front-end | tip, and the slit extended in the longitudinal direction is formed in it. A guide pin protruding rearward from near the lower right corner in the rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted in the slit.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the back left movable decoration 3320 is positioned behind the back left fixed decoration 3310, and can hardly be seen from the front It is in a state of That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the invisible position which is not visible. In this normal state, the actuating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. In the normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, a part of the front right end of the back left fixed decoration placed on the front side faces the frame of the center character 2500 and the back left The front left portion of the front face of the fixed decoration can be viewed from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the first back body 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 of the back movable back effect unit 3100. ing.

  In this normal state, when the actuating arm is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted in the slit of the tip of the actuating arm The actuating arm is pressed to the right in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides and moves straight to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the portion on the right side of the frame-shaped back left fixed decoration 3320 substantially leaving the left side in a front view is positioned from the back of the back left fixed decoration 3310 from the front view back to the right, the slide movement to the right is stopped. Thereby, the site | part on the right side rather than the left side in the frame-like back left movable decoration 3320 will be located in the right of the back left fixed decoration 3310, and it will become visible from a front (refer FIG. 231 (b) ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is in the state of being located at the appearance position which can be visually recognized from the player side.

  When the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is positioned at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 passes through the frame of the center character 2500 from the player side in a state assembled to the game board 5 While being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed behind can be viewed through the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Therefore, when a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) is displayed on the display area directly behind the back left movable decorative body 3320 in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is displayed for the player. An illusion can be made that the liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. As a result, it is possible to make the player illusion that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 of the back bottom back first movable body 3110 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100.

[Back-to-back middle movable production unit]
Next, the back up middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 232 to FIG. FIG. 232 (a) is a perspective view of the back-side-up movable medium producing unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 233 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back middle movable presentation unit disassembled for each main configuration and (b) is a back-to-back middle movable presentation unit disassembled for each main construction It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 234 (a) is a perspective view of the back top inside decoration unit of the movable top performing unit from the front, and FIG. 234 (b) is a perspective view of the back top inside decoration unit from the back. FIG. 235 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back interior decoration unit seen from the front, and FIG. 236 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back interior decoration unit seen from the back. FIG. 237 (a) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of a back-up inside decoration unit from a front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in (a). FIG. 238 (a) is a front view of the back top inside decoration unit in the normal state, and FIG. 238 (b) is a state in which the pair of back top inside top decoration of the back top inside decoration unit is half-opened outward And (c) is a front view showing a pair of back top and bottom first decor bodies of the back top and center decor body unit in a completely open state.

  Further, FIG. 239 (a) is a perspective view of the back-upper-middle driving unit of the back-up middle movable effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is a back-up middle-back driving unit of the movable effect unit seen from behind FIG. FIG. 240 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration, and (b) is a back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main structure It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 241 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 241 (b) is a disassembled back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 242 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive system of the back-up, medium-moveable movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 243 (a) is a front view of the back up middle movable effect unit in the normal state, and FIG. 243 (b) is a front view showing the back up middle decoration unit lowered in the back up middle movable effect unit. .

  The back-up, middle, and movable effect unit 3400 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right end. As shown in FIG. 233, the back-to-back middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-to-back first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back-to-back first decorative bodies 3411 that are attached openably and closably. The back-to-back decoration unit 3410 having the back-to-back second decoration 3412, the rotating connection member 3430 attached to the back surface of the back-to-back decoration unit 3410, and the rotating connection member 3430 Back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is vertically movable and rotatably mounted, and is mounted on the back front middle drive unit 3440 mounted in the back box 3010, and back upper right decoration mounted on the front of the back upper middle drive unit 3440 A unit 3480 and a back-up middle relay board 3490 attached to the back surface of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 234, FIG. 235, etc., the back-to-back decoration unit 3410 of the back-to-back movable movable effect unit 3400 is a pair of back-to-back first decoration bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and transparency. 3411, a back-to-back second decoration 3412 disposed behind the pair of back-to-back first decorations 3411 and having a predetermined decoration on the front, and a pair of back-to-back first decorations A pair of light transmitting flat plate-like slide bases 3413 attached to the rear face of the body 3411 and a pair of slide bases 3413 attached to the rear face and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face Back top middle decoration board 3414, Back top middle decoration board 3415 attached to the back surface of back decoration second decoration 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, back top middle decoration board Overturn the back of 3415 At the back side of the substrate cover 3416 so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the back surface of the second decorative body 3412 and the substrate cover 3416 in the back and top. A flat slider cover 3417 is attached, and a decoration unit base 3418 is attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417.

  In addition, the back-and-front interior decoration unit 3410 is attached to the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decoration unit base 3418 and to the rear surface of the motor base 3419, and the rotation shaft protrudes on the front surface A spur gear-shaped first drive gear attached to the rotary shaft of the back drive first drive motor 3420 and the back drive first drive motor 3420 and disposed between the motor base 3419 and the decoration unit base 3418 3421 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 rotatably mounted on the decoration unit base 3418 such that the first drive gear 3421 is engaged with the first drive gear 3421 so that the front end projects forward of the decoration unit base Meshing with the first transmission gear 3422 and rotatably mounted on the front of the decoration unit base 3418 It includes a first pinion gear 3423, a.

  Furthermore, the back upper / middle decorative unit 3410 is engaged with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends laterally to a rack gear 3424 a and a mounting boss for attaching one of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the slider cover 3417. A first slider 3424 having a 3424 b and slidably mounted in the lateral direction between the slider cover 3417 and the decoration unit base 3418, and a rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. The rack gear 3425a meshing with the first pinion gear 3423 on the opposite side and extending left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b for attaching the remaining (other) of the pair of slide bases 3413 through the slider cover 3417 , Slider cover 3417 and decorative body uni A second slider 3425 slidably mounted in the left-right direction with the base 3418; and a slide detection sensor 3426 attached from the rear side to the decoration unit base 3418 and detecting the slide position of the second slider 3425; And.

  When viewed from the front, the pair of back-to-back first decoration 3411 of the back-to-back middle decoration unit 3410 bulges in a semicircular arc outward at one end side in the lengthwise direction of the square extending in the left and right, The opposite end is recessed inward in a semicircular arc, and the portion recessed in the semicircular arc is a recess 3411 a. Further, the outer periphery of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 except for the end side in which the concave portion 3411 a recessed in a semicircular arc shape inward is extended in a plate shape to the rear. The pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 are attached in a state where the end sides where the concave portions 3411 a are formed face each other. In addition, the pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 are entirely formed to be milky white having translucency, and one of the back and top of the first decorative bodies 3411 is the head side of the “dragon”. Decorations are respectively formed on the front of the remaining (other) back first decoration 3411 so as to have a metallic luster on the tail side of the "dragon".

  The shape of the second decorative body 3412 in the back surface is a flat shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view, and is formed slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back surface first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed) It is done. The second decorative body 3412 has a circular center bulging portion 3412a which can be inserted into the concave portion 3411a of the first decorative body 3411 at the center and the left and right of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular center lateral decoration 3412 b formed two on the both sides vertically separated from each other, and a circle having the same size as the center lateral decoration 3412 b and formed on the left and right outer sides of the center lateral decoration 3412 b An intermediate decorative portion 3412 c and a circular end decorative portion 3412 d which are respectively formed on the left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412 c and near the left and right ends and have a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412 c. The second decorative body 3412 is formed of a translucent white as a whole, and the outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d on the front surface, etc. In addition, a linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed. The back decoration and the second decoration 3412 has a decoration that reminds the player of the "point bar" of "mah-jong".

  The pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first decorative body 3411 in the back upper surface, and the back of the outer peripheral portion extending rearward of the first decorative body 3411 in the back upper surface It is attached to the end. In this way, by assembling the first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413 in the back upper side, the back upper side is formed between the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 in the back upper side and the slide base 3413. A space is formed in which the second decoration 3412, the second back decoration substrate 3415, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted. In addition, the pair of slide bases 3413 are respectively provided with slits 3413a which penetrate through the front and rear and extend left and right. The slit 3413a of one of the slide bases 3413 of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed closer to the upper side, and the slit 3413a of the other slide bases 3413 is formed closer to the lower side. In addition, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a translucent milky white.

  The pair of back and top first decorative substrates 3414 and the back and top second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates whose surfaces (entire surface) are white. This makes it easy to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate inconspicuous. The back surface of the first decoration 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 at the back of the back surface of the back of the first decoration 3411 so that the light from the LED is on the back surface. Since the irradiation range of light is expanded until it reaches the part which forms the front face of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, the entire first decorative body 3411 can be uniformly decorated by emitting light. it can. On the other hand, the second decorative substrate 3415 in the back and top can light-emitting and decorate the whole of the second decorative body 3412 in the back and back, in addition to the central decorative portion 3412 a of the second decorative body 3412 in the back and the central horizontal decorative portion The light 3412 b, the intermediate decoration 3412 c, and the end decoration 3412 d can be lighted and decorated independently.

  The substrate cover 3416 has a mounting boss 3416 a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape rearward from near both left and right ends of the rear surface and is inserted into the slit 3413 a of the slide base 3413. The mounting boss 3416 a of the substrate cover 3416 has a rear end passing through the slit 3413 a of the slide base 3413 attached to the slider cover 3417. Further, the mounting bosses 3416 a of the substrate cover 3416 relatively slide in the slit 3413 a in the left-right direction via the bushes 3427 that are rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

  The slider cover 3417 penetrates in the front and back direction and extends in the left and right direction, and the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted through the first slit 3417a and penetrates in the front and back direction and extends in the left and right The mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3417b. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. The second slit 3417 b is formed in the vicinity of the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The first pinion gear 3423 is disposed slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction in front view (see FIG. 237). The first slider 3424 is disposed such that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from the lower side, and two mounting bosses 3424b aligned in the left and right directions from the left end in the front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have their front ends projecting forward through the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417, and the first decoration on the back on which the head side of the "dragon" is decorated It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is disposed such that the rack gear 3425a meshes from above with respect to the first pinion gear 3423, and two mounting bosses 3425b aligned in the left and right directions from the right end in the front view protrude forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 project forward from the front end through the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417, and are decorated with the tail side of the "dragon" on the back of the first decorative body It is attached to the back of the slide base 3413 attached to the 3411. In addition, the second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c which protrudes upward in a plate shape from an upper portion near the right end in a front view. The detection piece 3425 c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 238 (a) etc., the back side of the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 is closed by bringing the end sides of the pair of back upper middle first decoration bodies 3411 on the concave 3411 a side into contact with each other. There is. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the second decorative body 3412 on the back is bulging forward through the circular opening formed by the recess 3411a, and the other portion of the second decorative body 3412 on the back is from the front. I can not see it.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the front end left end of the first slider 3424 and the front end right end of the second slider 2425 are in the left-right direction in the back upper middle decoration unit 3410. It is located near the center. The detection piece 3425 c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decoration 3412 a is lighted and decorated by the second decoration substrate 3415 in the back-up, the player can be made to show the decoration recalling the “thousand sticks” of “mah-jong”. In the normal state, when the whole second decoration 3412 is lit and decorated with the second back decoration substrate 3415, the first decoration on the back covering the front of the second decoration 3412 is set. The entire body 3411 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, when the LED of the first decorative body 3414 is lit in the normal state, the light is formed in white, and the back of the second decorative body 3415 in the back upper side and the back upper side of the first decorative body 3414 is formed in white. The light can be reflected and diffused on the front surface and the like, and the outer periphery and the like of the first decorative body 3411 can be emitted and decorated in the back and top.

  From the normal state, when the first pinion gear 3423 is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction in a front view through the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 by the first drive motor 3420 in the back-up, the first The first slider 3424 slides to the left in front view by the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 meshing with the pinion gear 3423, and the second slider 3425 to the right in front view Slide to move. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 in the back on which the decoration on the head side of the "dragon" attached via the mounting boss 3424b of the first slider 3424 is slid to the left in front view, and The first decorative body 3411 in the back on which the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” attached via the mounting boss 3425 b of the second slider 3425 is slid to the right in a front view, and the pair of back uppers The first decoration 3411 slides open in a direction away from each other.

  By sliding the pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 in a direction away from each other, the back and top middle decorative members 3411 are formed from the edge sides on the concave portion 3411 a side of the first and back back coverings. A part of the second decoration 3412 located on the back of 3411 comes to face forward. Then, with the center horizontal decoration 3412 b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 Stop the rotational drive of In this state (intermediately open state), as shown in FIG. 237 (b), the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and the four middle The central horizontal decorative portion 3412 b is in a state of facing forward. In this state, when making the central decorative portion 3412 a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412 b emit light by means of the second decorative substrate 3415 in the back and top, the player is made to show the decoration recalling the “five thousand point bar” of “mahjong”. it can.

  In this state, the back and top first drive motor 3420 slides the pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 in a direction away from each other and stops the rotational drive in the most separated state, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), substantially the whole of the second decorative body 3412 in the back upper side is in the front facing state between the pair of back upper and the first decorative bodies 3411 (full open state). In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back and middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward, and the back and inside middle second decorative substrate When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d are light-emitting decorated by 3415, the player can be made to show a decoration that evokes the "one stick" of "mahjong". it can. In addition, in this state, the back decoration first decoration substrate 3414 and the back decoration second decoration substrate 3415 make the entire back decoration first emission body 3411 and the back decoration second decoration 3412 emit light entirely. be able to.

  Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back-up middle movable presentation unit 3400 is attached to the longitudinal center of the back side of the decoration unit base 3418 in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 and is mounted on the back of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. The intermediate base unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467, and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 rotatably attached to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460.

  Subsequently, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 and the like, the back-up / middle-drive unit 3440 can turn the back-up / back-up rotation unit 3460 and the back-up / back-up rotation unit 3460 on the front side. And a base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. A back-up second drive motor 3443 attached to the front of the 3442 and having a rotation shaft projecting rearward through the base cover 3442 and a flat attached to the rotation shaft of the back-up second drive motor 3443 A large diameter spur gear shaped large diameter transmission gear meshing with the second drive gear 3444 and the second drive gear 3444 A second transmission gear 3445 having a small diameter spur gear-like small diameter transmission gear 3445b integrally rotating with the large diameter transmission gear 3445a, and a second transmission gear 3445 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442; A spur gear gear portion 3446a engaged with the small diameter transmission gear 3445b of 3445 and a cylindrical drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface of the gear portion 3446a are rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 The second driving gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the raising and lowering drive are provided. The second driving gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the raising and lowering driving gear 3446 It is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the gear 3446 and Includes cover 3442 in cooperation with the second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and the elevation drive gear 3446 plate-like gear cover 3447 are rotatably mounted to, the.

  The back-up middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and detects a turning position of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. Assist springs 3449 attached between them and biasing the back-up rotating unit 3460 in the direction in which the back-up inside decoration unit 3410 is lifted, and the entire body extends in the longitudinal direction while penetrating back and forth An assist arm 3450 which has an assist slit 3450a and whose proximal end is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and an assist arm 3450 is rotatably held from the front toward the unit base 3441 side. Arm holder 3451 attached to the front of the That.

  As shown in FIG. 241 and the like, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 has a bearing portion 3461 a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441 and a long hole penetrating in the front and back and extending in a predetermined direction Drive slit 3461b in which the drive pin 3446b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c in which the connection bush 3432 of the rotational connection member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of the assist arm 3450 projecting rearward A shallow box-like rotary unit base 3461 having a cylindrical assist pin 3461 d inserted into the 3450 a and opened at the rear, and a rotary unit base 3461 so as to close the open rear side of the rotary unit base 3461 A rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461 It is equipped with a.

  Also, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 has a back-up middle third drive motor 3463 attached to the front of the rotation unit base 3461 such that the rotation shaft protrudes between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461; The spur gear third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotation shaft of the third drive motor 3463 in the back and top, and the third drive gear 3464 mesh with the third drive gear 3464 so as to be rotatable by the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 A wedge-shaped transmission rack gear meshed with the drive pinion gear 3465 mounted thereon and the drive pinion gear 3465 and slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 3466 and the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the rotation unit base 3461 inserted A spur gear-like driven pinion gear 3467 which is rotatably mounted by a rotation unit base 3461 and a rear cover 3462 coaxially with 3461c and to which the rear end of the connection base 3431 of the rotary connection member 3430 is attached on the front surface; Is equipped.

  Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotational position of the driven pinion gear 3467 and inserts the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and the assist pin 3461 d of the rotation unit base 3461 inside. The bush 3469 is detached from the assist pin 3461 d attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461 d of the brazed cylindrical bush 3469 which is slidably inserted in the assist slit 3450 a of the assist arm 3450 and the outside of the assist unit 3450 And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing the

  The unit base 3441 of the back-up, middle-drive unit 3440 is formed in such a shape that the upper part of the left side in a front view of the rectangular shape extending up and down protrudes leftward and protrudes forward from the front of the lower part A pivot support pin 3441a is provided for pivotally mounting the unit 3460. The rotation support pin 3441 a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461 a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. While the rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 near the right end in the front view at the upper end of the front surface, the assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end in the front view.

  The back upper second drive motor 3643 is attached near the upper end of the front surface of the base cover 3442. The vertical drive gear 3446 to which the rotational drive of the back upper second drive motor 3463 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 is a substantially central position between the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442 in the vertical direction. Mounted rotatably (see Figure 242).

  The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same plane without rattling by being pressed against the unit base 3441 side by the arm presser 3451.

  The rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 extends left and right, and a bearing portion 3461 a into which the rotation support pin 3441 a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed at the lower right corner in a front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461 a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in a front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends along the lower side to the left and right longer than the transmission rack gear 3466, and has a slide groove 3461e slidably accommodating the transmission rack gear 3466, and protrudes upward from the upper right end in front view to detect rotation And a detection piece 3461f detected by the sensor.

  The back and middle third drive motor 3643 is mounted substantially at the center between the bearing 3461 a and the insertion hole 3461 c in the rotary unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, outer peripheral gear teeth meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only in a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and do not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 is provided with a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion on the outer periphery where the gear teeth are not formed, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

  Subsequently, the back upper right decoration unit 3480 of the back up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decoration unit 3480 is attached to the front of the decoration base 3481 and a decoration base 3481 attached to the front of the base cover 3442 at a position in front of the back up middle second drive motor 3443 in the back up middle drive unit 3440 A back upper right decorative substrate 3482 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a light transmitting back upper right decorative body 3483 disposed on the front of the back upper right decorative substrate 3482 and attached to the front of the decorative base 3481 And.

  The back upper right decoration unit 3480 can emit light and decorate the back upper right decoration body 3483 by causing the LED of the back upper right decoration substrate 3482 to emit light. The back upper right decoration body 3483 of the back right upper decoration unit 3480 is assembled on the game board 5, and the gate part 2003 and the general winning in the right hitting distribution space 2541 in the front view right hitting game area 2540 of the center character 2500 It is located between the mouth 2001 and can illuminate and decorate the inside of the upper right distribution space 2541 from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

  The back top middle relay board 3490 of the back top middle movable effect unit 3400 is a back top middle first decoration board 3414, a back top middle second decoration board 3415, a back middle first drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, a back top Middle second drive motor 3443, rotation detection sensor 3448, back upper middle third drive motor 3463, rotation detection sensor 3468, back upper right decoration substrate 3482, effect drive substrate 3043 connected to peripheral control substrate 1510, Connected.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described along with the operation of the back up middle drive unit 3440. In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), the upper side of the movable effect unit 3400 has its upper side extended in the state in which the decorative unit 3410 is extended horizontally so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal. It is located slightly lower than the upper side of the unit base 3441 in the back-up and middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, the pair of back top first ornaments 3411 abut on each other and close.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 242, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446 b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is a drive slit 3461 b of the rotation unit base 3461. Located at the lower end of the inside. In this state, a rotational moment acts on the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view centering on the rotation support pin 3441 a by the weight of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 or the like. ing. The drive pin 3446 b is pressed to the left side by the rotation slit via the drive slit 3461 b. Then, the lift drive gear 3446 tries to rotate by pressing the drive pin 3446 b, but the drive pin 3446 b passes through the rotation center of the lift drive gear 3446 and is a line perpendicular to the direction in which the drive slit 3461 b extends. Since the lower elevation gear 3446 is positioned lower than the lower elevation gear 3446, the elevation drive gear 3446 tries to rotate clockwise in a front view. However, since drive pin 3446b of lift drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end in drive slit 3461b, lift drive gear 3446 can not rotate in the clockwise direction any more and back-up middle rotation unit 3460 Is maintained in the normal state, and the back decoration unit 3410 is locked in the raised state. Further, in this state, the lifting drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, so that a load is applied to the second drive motor 3443 in the back-up via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. It is possible to maintain the back top middle decoration unit 3410 at the rising end even if the back top middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

  Further, in the normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is located at the moving end where the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) is away, The driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 is located in the vicinity of the rotational end in the clockwise direction in a front view. In the normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (following pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is positioned above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Furthermore, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally and the assist pin 3461 d of the rotation unit base 3461 which is slidably inserted in the assist slit 3450 a of the assist arm 3450 is the base in the assist slit 3450 a. It is located near the end of the end.

  In the normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. Further, in the normal state, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the front view center character 2500 is a pair of back upper and lower first decorative bodies 3411 that are horizontally extended and closed in the state assembled on the game board 5. It is located above the display screen of and visible from the player side (see FIG. 201 etc.).

  From this normal state, raising and lowering the vertical drive gear 3446 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second drive motor 3443 in the back up, raises and lowers Drive pin 3446b of drive gear 3446 revolves in a counterclockwise direction so as to ascend in drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b leftward, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is pivotally supported via the drive slit 3461b. It will rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view about the pin 3441a.

  When the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located above the rotation support pin 3441a (the bearing portion 3461a) and on the left in the front view The 3461 c (following pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back upper center decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 that has passed through the insertion hole 3461 c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461 d of the rotation unit base 3461 revolves in a counterclockwise direction in a front view about the rotation support pin 3441 a, so the assist arm 3450 is in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the assist pin 3461 d. As it pivots, the assist pin 3461 d slides in the assist slit 3450 a toward its tip end.

  Then, when the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the normal state, the rotational drive of the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 is stopped, and the insertion hole 3461 c of the rotation unit base 3461 (The driven pinion gear 3467) is positioned lower than the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back-and-back middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lowering end (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotation unit base 3461 abuts against the unit base 3441 and the assist pin 3461 d abuts against the end on the tip side in the assist slit 3450 a, and the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 The rotation is restricted.

  In the state where the back-up inside decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descent end by rotating the back-up inside rotation unit 3460 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the back up inside decoration is assembled in the state assembled to the game board 5 The center of the body unit 3410 (the center decoration 3412 a of the second decoration 3412 in the back and top) is located approximately at the center of the frame of the center piece 2500 (see FIG. 257).

  With the back and top decoration unit 3410 moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the front view flower by the back and top third drive motor 3643 via the third drive gear 3464 The transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides in the slide groove 3461e in the right direction in a front view. The transmission rack gear 3466 slides in the right direction, whereby the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the rotational connection attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 The back top center decoration unit 3410 is also rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430.

  In the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end in the front view of the slide groove 3461e. In the present embodiment, the back top center decoration unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in the state in which the back-and-front middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lowering end, it can be rotated 208 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in front view with respect to the normal state extending horizontally (FIG. 243 (FIG. see b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 243 (b), the first drive motor 3420 is driven to slide the pair of back middle first decoration bodies 3411 in the direction away from each other in the back top middle decoration unit 3410. Move (see FIG. 258 and FIG. 259 etc.).

  In this manner, the back-up and up-side movable unit 3400 has a back-up and inside decoration unit 3410 having a pair of back-up and inside first backers 3411 and a back-and-back and inside second back body 3412 and a back and up and inside drive unit 3440. In addition to being able to move up and down as well as being able to rotate, it is possible to open and close the pair of back upper first decorative bodies 3411 and to present the player with a variety of movable effects. In addition, in the “mah-jongg” that is expressed by the decoration of the back upper second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies by the degree of opening of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 Since the score of the "point bar" can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced by the point score.

[Back and back front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 244 to 251. FIG. 244 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 244 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 245 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front except for the back lower front decoration unit, and FIG. 246 is a disassembled view of the back lower front movable effect unit other than the back lower front decoration unit And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit, and FIG. 248 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front movable function unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 249 is a front view schematically showing the decoration unit elevating mechanism in the back lower front movable effect unit. FIG. 250 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decoration unit raising / lowering mechanism when the back bottom front decoration unit is lifted, and FIG. 250 (b) is an enlarged view of the unit raising / lowering pin in FIG. (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit raising and lowering pins and the raising and lowering slits by further enlarging (b). FIG. 251 (a) is a front view showing the back lower front movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 251 (b) is a front view showing the back lower front decoration unit lifted from the state of FIG. (C) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back 1st decoration of the back decoration front decoration unit from the state of (b).

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is mounted on the front of the back lower movable front effect unit 3100 by raising and lowering the back lower front decorative unit 3501 having a predetermined decoration and the back lower front decorative unit 3501. 3502, back lower left decoration unit 3503 attached to the front of the left end of the elevation unit 3502 in front view, and back decoration unit 3504 attached to the left of the front of the elevation unit 350 from the front left right direction center; A back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 mounted on the front of the lifting unit 3502 from the front to the left of the back decoration unit 3504 and a back lower front relay substrate 3506 attached to the rear surface of the lifting unit 3502; Is equipped.

  As shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 etc., the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 has a plate shape extending in the left and right direction and different decorations are provided on both sides. The body 3510 and the back lower front first decoration 3510 are hingedly mounted on the upper side extending in the left and right direction, and are vertically movably attached to the lifting unit 3502 and decorated on the front side And a second decorative body 3520.

  The lower back front first decorative body 3510 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view, a predetermined box being formed on the front, and a shallow box shape having an open rear side. A shallow box-like light-transmitting member is attached to the back surface of the first front decorative member 3511 having light properties and the first front decorative member 3511 and a predetermined decoration is formed on the rear surface, and the front side is opened. A first back decoration base 3513 attached between the first back decoration member 3512, the first back decoration member 3512 and the first front decoration member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, Two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 that project obliquely upward and backward so as to be coaxial with the axes extending from the left and right ends in a front view at the upper side of the first back decorative member 3512, and the first back decoration Positive of member 3512 A decorative body elevating pin 3515 which protrudes cylindrically from the right side of the right side and is slidably inserted in a slit 3533 a of a decorative body elevating arm 3533 in the back lower front second decorative body 3520 described later; And a flat detection piece 3516 protruding rearward from the right side in a front view of the back decoration member 3512.

  Of the two first hinge portions 3514 in the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in a front view is attached slightly to the left of the front end right end of the first back decoration member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the first lower back decoration 3511 has a decoration in which a plurality of "eyebrows" of "mah-jongg" are arranged in the left and right.

  The back bottom second decoration 3520 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is formed to be larger in left, right, upper and lower than the back bottom front first decoration 3510, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front, and the rear side is A second decorative member 3521 having an open shallow box shape and light transmitting property, and a second lower front decorative substrate 3522 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface , A flat substrate cover 3523 which is attached to the back side of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the rear of the second lower back decorative substrate 3522 and a front view at the upper side of the second decorative member 3521 extending to the left and right It projects obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending leftward and rightward from near the left and right end parts, and for hinge-rotatably attaching the first hinge portion 3514 of the first back decoration 3510. The right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side in the front view of the two cylindrical second hinge portions 3524 and the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is the back first lower decorative body 3510 And a cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 inserted from the right into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side of the front view, and a front view of the first decoration 3510 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the second decoration member 3521 in the front view And a hinge press 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the left first hinge portion 3514.

  In addition, the rear lower front second decorative body 3520 is a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view and opened rightward, and the gear base 3527 and the rotation shaft A back gear first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side surface of the gear base 3527 in a front view to project rightward, and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back first drive motor 3528 A transmission first gear 3530 meshing with the first drive gear 3529 and the first drive gear 3529 and rotatably mounted to the gear base 3527 and a transmission first gear 3530 meshing with the gear base 3527 A transmission second gear 3531 which is mounted on the gear base 3511; and a first lifting gear 3532 which meshes with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably mounted on the gear base 3527; In the front view left of the base 3527, it is integrally rotated with the first lifting gear 3532 and penetrates in the left-right direction and extends on an axis passing through the rotation center, and the decoration lifting pin 3515 of the first back decoration 3510 The decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 having a slit 3533a slidably inserted, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, and the first elevation gear 3532 as viewed from the right And a flat gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527. The flat gear cover 3534 is attached to the gear base 3527.

  Furthermore, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view, and a decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535 capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 A sensor cover 3536 attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevation detection sensor 3535; and a slider attachment extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 in front view A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end in the rear view at the top of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523.

  In the lower back front decoration unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decoration lifting pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525, 3526a, the lower back first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first A decoration raising and lowering mechanism that causes the gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, the first raising and lowering gear 3532, and the decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 to hinge-rotate the back and forth front first decoration 3510 with respect to the axis extending horizontally It constitutes 3501A.

  In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 is formed on the lower side of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right. , Equipped. As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, etc., the lifting slit 3540 is formed such that both ends extending in the left and right direction have the same height, and the upper side extending in the right and left extends from the left end in front view to the right And a locking projection 3540a protruding downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the side on the left side in a front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the half arc of the left end of the lifting slit 3540, and the side on the right side in the front view is a lifting slit It is formed in the shape of a straight line which diagonally extends toward the left end of the part which extended horizontally a little from the upper end of the semicircle of the right end of 3540 to the left. The lower side extending to the left and right of the lifting slit 3540 is formed in a shape following the upper side so as to form a substantially constant interval with the upper side.

  The elevating unit 3502 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is between the unit base 3550 and the flat unit base 3550 attached to the front of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, and the back of the back lower front decoration unit 3501. A base cover 3551 is attached to the front of the unit base 3550 with a space that can accommodate a portion lower than the front first decorative body 3510, and a rotary shaft protrudes between the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 Back second front drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 and a spur gear second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotation shaft of the second back front drive motor 3552; It meshes with the second drive gear 3553 and is rotated by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 Function transmission second gear 3554 and second transmission gear 3554 a circular arc-shaped second lifting gear 3555a and second lifting gear 3555a substantially semi-circular and flat main body 3555b concentric with the arc of the second lifting gear 3555a And an axial hole 3555c penetrating at the center of the main body 3555b and rotatably mounted by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arm 3555d extending from the main body 3555b in a direction away from the second lifting gear 3555a. And a column-like member attached from the front to the tip of the arm 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 from the front and slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501. Unit lifting pin 3556a, front end of unit lifting pin 3556a A flat connection piece 3556b extending toward the axial hole 3555c along the arm 3555d of the unit lifting arm 3555 and a rear end of the connection piece 3556b protruding rearward from the front end of the main body 3555b of the unit lifting arm 3555 And an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c attached to the front.

  The back lower front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 in a front view. The second drive gear 3553 is provided with a flat detection piece 3553 a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached to rotate around a position near the upper part from the center in the left-right direction of the front view in the unit base 3550 and around the upper part. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from the axial hole 3555c to the tip of the arm 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

  In addition, the elevation unit 3502 is attached to the front of the unit base 3550 and is attached to the unit elevation detection sensor 3557 capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and to the right end in front view on the front of the unit base 3550. The slide base 3558 extends vertically, the vertically extending bar-like middle slider 3559 slidably mounted vertically on the front side of the slide base 3558, and vertically slidably mounted on the front side of the middle slider 3559 The front surface of the cage includes a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501.

  In this lifting unit 3502, the back second front drive motor 3552, the second drive gear 3553, the second transmission gear 3554, the unit lifting arm 3555, the arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit lifting pin 3556a), the slide base 3558, and the middle slider 3559 The decoration unit elevating mechanism 3502A which raises and lowers the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is configured by the mounting slider 3560.

  Furthermore, the lifting unit 3502 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3550 at its proximal end, and penetrates forward and backward and extends toward the distal end, while the guide boss 3538 of the back front decoration unit 3501 is inserted A guide arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a, and a guide bush which is slidably inserted from the rear into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561 and into which the guide boss 3538 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 at the rear of the guide bush 3562, and an arm presser rotatably supporting the proximal end rear face of the guide arm 3561 and attached to the rear face of the unit base 3550 3564, arm presser 3564 and spring Over scan both ends and 3563 is provided with an assist spring 3565 which urges the respective attached and the direction in which the Ahemu presser 3564 and spring-based 3563 approach each other, the. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at a position on the upper left on the upper left side in a front view, and the tip end side extends to the right.

  The back lower left decoration unit 3503 of the back lower front movable presentation unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the unit base 3550 in a front view, and a three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front imitating a “mahjong” “eyebrow” And a back lower left decorative substrate 3561 attached to the front of the unit base 3550 behind the back lower left decorative body 3560 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted. The back lower left decoration unit 3503 can emit light and decorate the back left lower decoration 3560 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back lower left decoration substrate 3561. When assembled on the game board 5, the back lower left decoration unit 3503 is positioned behind the side unit top 2300, and can emit light and decorate the vicinity of the side unit top 2300 in the game area 5a.

  A back-to-back inside decoration unit 3504 of the back-to-back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the base cover 3551 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the front view. Back-to-back decoration 3570, and back-to-back decoration substrate 3571 attached to the front of the base cover 3551 at the back of the back-to-back decoration 3570 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front ing. The back bottom and inside decoration unit 3504 can emit light and decorate the back and bottom inside decoration 3570 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back bottom inside decoration substrate 3571. When assembled on the game board 5, the back lower middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the lower side unit 2200 in the front view gaming area 5 a and the center role 2500.

  The back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 can guide the gaming balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 under the side unit 2200 downward and can discharge them. The back lower left ball guiding unit 3505 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 whose front surface is open, and a transparent flat plate which closes the open front surface of the passage member 3580 A cover 3581 and a side rear decoration board 3582 attached to the front of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front are provided. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 is attached. In addition, the back lower left ball induction unit 3505 is located behind the lower side unit 2200 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the lower side unit 2200 is made to emit light by the LEDs of the side rear decoration substrate 3582 appropriately It can be decorated to emit light.

  The back bottom front relay substrate 3506 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 is a back bottom front first decoration substrate 3513, a back bottom front second decoration substrate 3522, a back bottom first drive motor 3528, a decoration body elevation detection sensor 3535, Back second front drive motor 3552, unit elevation detection sensor 3557, back lower left decoration substrate 3561, back bottom inside decoration substrate 3571, side back decoration substrate 3582, effect driving substrate 3043 connected with peripheral control substrate 1510 Relay connection.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 251 (a) etc., in the normal state, the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the falling end, and the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is A back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated so as to descend and located in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the first front decoration member 3511 of the first back decoration 3510 faces the front.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 249, the tip of the arm 3555 d of the unit lift arm 3555 of the lift unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555 c and is attached to the tip of the arm 3555 d A unit raising and lowering pin 3556 a of an arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted in the raising and lowering slit 3540 of the lower front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned in the vicinity of the right end in the front view in the raising and lowering slit 3540. Further, the guide arm 3561 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 extends substantially horizontally with its front end facing rightward in a front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3561 a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end in the front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevation detection sensor 3557.

  Also, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decoration body lifting arm 3553 in the back second front decoration 3520 of the back lower front decoration unit 3501 has a state in which the tip side extends downward from the rotation center And the decorative body raising / lowering pin 3515 of the back first front decorative body 3510 inserted in the slit 3533a of the decorative body raising / lowering arm 3553 is positioned at the end near the rotation center in the slit 3533a There is. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back first front decoration body 3510 is detected by the decoration body elevation detection sensor 3535 of the back bottom front second decoration body 3520.

  In this normal state, it is located below the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view and behind the lower side of the center character 2500 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the back bottom front decoration unit The first front decoration member 3511 of the back bottom first decoration 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

  Under normal conditions, the unit elevating arm 3555 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view through the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554 by the second lower drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502. The unit lifting pin 3556a at the tip of the arm 3555d revolves in the direction of rising around the shaft hole 3555c. As the unit raising and lowering pins 3556a revolve and rise, the unit raising and lowering pins 3556a press the inside of the raising and lowering slits 3540 upward, and the back lower front decoration unit 3501 is raised. Since the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the mounting slider 3560, the right end in a front view rises straight without being inclined.

  As the back lower front decoration unit 3501 ascends, a unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 leftward in a front view. Then, when the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a moves to the left in front view than the lowermost projecting portion of the locking projection 3540a in the elevating slit 3540, the driving of the back lower second driving motor 3552 is stopped And the rotation of the unit lift arm 3555 (revolution of the unit lift pin 3556a) also stops, and the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the drive unit 3502 ( State) (see FIG. 251 (b)).

  In this state, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the unit elevating arm 3555 (shaft hole 3555c). Due to the weight of the front decoration unit 3501, a rotational moment acts on the tip of the arm 3555d to rotate the unit lift arm 3555 clockwise in a front view. Then, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), on the left side surface of the lock protrusion 3540a in contact with the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a on the upper side of the raising / lowering slit 3540, the site on the right side of the abutting site is Since the lock projection 3540a is intruded into the boundary line L (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawing) of the turning range of the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a, the part where the lock projection 3540a penetrates in order to move downward The lock projection 3540a (back and front front decoration unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the back and front front decoration unit 3501 so that As the rotational moment acting on the lift pins 3556a is canceled out, the unit lift arm 3555 does not rotate clockwise as viewed from the front, and the rising end It is maintained (locked) in a state positioned.

  In the state where the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, substantially the entire back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is the center character 2500 in a front view in the state assembled on the game board 5. The player is positioned within the frame, and the player can visually recognize the decoration of the first front decoration member 3511 of the first back decoration 3510 from the player side.

  Subsequently, with the back lower front decoration unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530 are set by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decoration 3520. When the decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 is rotated clockwise in right side view through the transmission second gear 3531 and the first raising and lowering gear 3532, the slit 3533 a of the decoration raising and lowering arm 3533 enters the slit 3533 a. The first hinge portion 3514 and the lower hinge of the back first front decoration 3510 are moved forward and upward so that the decoration raising / lowering pin 3515 of the back first front decoration 3510 being inserted is pushed forward and the lower side of the back bottom first decoration 3510 moves forward and upward. The back and front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated about the second hinge portion 3524.

  Then, when the decoration lifting arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees clockwise in right side view, the rotation of the back driving first drive motor 3528 stops, and the back turning first decoration 3510 is back turning second It will be in the state located above the decoration 3520 (a raise position or an open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the first lower back decoration 3510, which was originally facing forward, is turned backward, and instead, the second lower back decoration 3520 of the first lower decoration is facing backward. The second back decoration member 3512 facing the second decoration member 3521 is directed to the front above the second decoration member 3521 with the front surface positioned substantially flush with the second decoration member 3521. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form a single large decoration (the decoration of the character of “S end”) (FIG. 251 (FIG. see c)).

  With the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 ascended and the back bottom front first decoration body 3510 being hinge-rotated to be open, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, the center character 2500 of Almost the lower half of the inside of the frame (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the first back decoration 3510 and the second back decoration 3520 (see FIG. 261).

  In this manner, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 maintains the back lower front decoration unit 3501 in the state of being stopped at the position of the rising end even if the back lower front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the back and front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. Also, since the rear lower front decoration unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position because it is locked in the middle of the unit raising / lowering pin 3556a revolving in the rising direction, the back lower front decoration unit 3501 There is no such unnatural movement as lowering, and the player can enjoy the movement of the back and front decoration unit 3501.

  Further, in the back bottom front decoration unit 3501, as the back bottom front first decoration body 3510 is lifted, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending to the left and right, and therefore, the slide is linear. Since the portion of the first lower back decoration 3510 seen from the player side changes every moment as compared with the case where it is made to make it possible to make it stand out, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly The first back decoration member 3512 of the first back decoration 3510 and the second back decoration 3520 which can not be seen in the normal state by opening the hinge by turning the first back decoration 3510. The second decorative member 3521 can be shown to surprise the player.

[Directions on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 252 to FIG. In FIG. 252, in the back-to-back and back-to-back movable unit of the back unit, the back-to-back first decoration and the back-to-back second decoration are rotated together in a normal position, with the second decoration surface facing the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. In FIG. 253, the back of the back unit and the back of the movable effect unit are closed, and the first decoration and the back second decoration are closed and the back of the first decoration is directed to the front. In the state, slide to the approximate center of the game area in the horizontal direction, and slide the back top left first decoration body and the back top left second decoration body of the back up left movable effect unit to the approximate center position in the game area It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. In the state of FIG. 253, the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 253, and the second decoration of the first decoration and the second back of the second decoration is opened. With the decorative surface facing forward, the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit is hinged to be opened, and the fixed decorative member of the back upper left first decorative body and the second of the back upper left second decorative body It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which faced the two decoration members in the front. In the state of FIG. 253, the first decoration is hinged to open the back of the movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 253, and the second decoration of the first decoration and the back of the second decoration is opened. It is a front view of a game board which shows the state where the decoration side was turned to the front.

  FIG. 256 is a front view of the game board showing the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit in a state in which the back left movable decoration is slid to the appearance position of the right end in a front view. FIG. 257 is a front view counterclockwise as in the back unit to move the back top inside decoration unit of the back up middle movable presentation unit to the falling end position and to extend the back top inside decoration unit down diagonally in front view left side It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being rotated in the surrounding direction. FIG. 258 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decoration bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 257 and slide-moved to the half open half open position. FIG. 259 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to the fully open position. FIG. 260 is a front view of the game board showing the back bottom front decoration unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit of the back unit positioned at the rising end. FIG. 261 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which the back first front decoration is hingedly rotated from the state of FIG. 260 and raised above the back bottom second decoration.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 201 etc., the game board 5 of the present embodiment passes through the frame of the center character 2500 and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000. , It can be visually recognized well from the player side (forward). In this normal state, the back of the back unit 3000, the hinge-rotatable back and back first decoration 3110 of the movable effect unit 3100 and the back and back second decoration 3120 are closed and the back and back first decoration are formed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 is directed forward so as to be visible from the player side, and the display of the sub liquid crystal display 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is on the right of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display 1600. The screen is facing forward.

  Further, in the normal state, the back top left first decoration 3210 and the back top left second decoration 3220 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are hinged to the back top left first decoration 3210. In a folded state in which the back upper left second decoration body 3220 is positioned in front of the fixed decoration member 3211 and is positioned behind the back left middle decoration unit 3050 which is the front left end with respect to the left and right slide directions The front side is blocked by the back left middle decoration unit 3050 so as not to be visible from the player side.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back left movable decoration 3321 of the back left movable presentation unit 3300 of the back unit is positioned behind the back left fixed decoration 3310 which is the front left end with respect to the left and right slide directions. A part of the back left fixed decoration 3310 faces slightly forward through the center character 2500 frame. Also, in the normal state, the back top middle decoration unit 3410 of the back top middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising edge above the top side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front view center character 2500 is visible forward in the frame.

  Further, in the normal state, in the back lower front decoration unit 3501 of the back lower front movable presentation unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decoration body 3510 is hinged to rotate the back lower front second decoration body 3520 The lower end of the main liquid crystal display 1600 lower than the lower side of the main liquid crystal display 1600 so that the back lower front decoration unit 3501 does not face forward from the inside of the frame of the center character 2500 in the state of being folded down to the side. It is located in

  The game board 5 is selected according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect or light emission effect) .

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back and back back second decorative body 3120 is viewed in plan by the back and back second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. The second decorative surface 3122 facing backward is turned to the front by rotating in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 252). At this time, the back and back back first decoration 3110 which is closed and positioned to the front of the back and back second decoration 3120 is pushed by the back and back back second decoration 3120 and rotates together. Thereby, the back bottom back first decoration 3110 and the back bottom back second decoration 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 While blocking the part of the effect image being displayed and making the back and back second decoration 3120 stand out, the back surface and back be decorated with the second decoration surface 3122 of the second decoration 3120 It is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration of “,” and to make the player think that there may be something good to increase the expectation for the game.

  In addition, as effects (movable effects) using the back and back movable presentation unit 3100 and back and left movable presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, in the back and back and back movable presentation unit 3100, the back and back third of the slide unit 3150 The rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to a position at the left end of the front view with the drive motor 3155 while the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are closed, and the rotation drive unit 3130 The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is turned to the front by rotating the first decorative body 3110 slightly back in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the first driving motor 3134. At the same time, in the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back top left first decorative body 3210 is made by the back top left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240, and the back top left second decoration body 3220 is back top left first With the first decorative member 3221 closed to the front with the decorative body 3210 closed, it is slid along with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 to the position of the front-view right end (see FIG. 253).

  In the state shown in FIG. 253, vertically extending axes for hinge-rotating the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower back movable presentation unit 3100, and the back upper left A vertically extending axis for hinge-rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is coaxially located to the left and right of the game area 5a. It almost coincides with the direction center. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 with the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back top left second decoration 3220 diagonally arranged in the frame of the center role 2500 in front view Located in front of the As a result, the player can be surprised by the movement of the back bottom first decoration 3110 to the center side and the appearance of the back top left second decoration 3220.

  Then, in a state in which the back bottom first decoration 3110 and the back top left second decoration 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state of FIG. 253), the rotation drive unit 3130 in the back bottom movable effect unit 3100 The back rear first decoration 3110 folded by the first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back back second decoration 3120, The back bottom back first decoration body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the back second decoration body 3120 and their second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back top left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the back top left movable effect unit 3200 The back top left second decoration 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view to open forward from the back top left first decoration 3210, and the back top A back on the left second decorative body fixing decorative member 3211 side by side 3220 on the right side of the first decorative body 3210 directs the second decorative member 3222 on the front (see Figure 254).

  In the state shown in FIG. 254, the back bottom back first movable body 3110 and the back bottom back second decorative body 3120 lined to the left and right of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3100 and the back top left movable effect unit 3200 The back first left decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are brought into a state where they are united vertically in the center of the frame of the center character 2500 in front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The front of the display screen is almost covered. In addition, the second decorative surface 3111, 3121 of the back-to-back first decoration 3110 and back-to-back second decoration 3120 of the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3100 facing the front, and the back-to-top left movable presentation unit 3200 The characters “Song of Stave” written vertically by the decoration given to the fixed decoration member 3211 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the second decoration member 3222 of the back upper left second decoration body 3220 It will be visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body appears in the frame of the center character 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), giving a great impact to the player, and a chance of "big hit game" and the like. Can strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  By the way, in the above, the effect of simultaneously opening the back bottom back first decoration 3110 of the back bottom back movable unit 3100 and the back top left second decoration 3220 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 has been described. As shown at 255, only the first decorative body 3110 may be opened first, after the back of the back movable back effect production unit 3100. Thereby, the back decoration back 1st decoration 3110 of back movement back movable motive unit 3100 and the back decoration 2nd decoration 3120 are first opened by hinge rotation, and those 2nd decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 are turned to the front. And, the word "holy" will be visible first. At this time, since the cut decoration 3170 such as “one” is provided on the upper side of the character “St.”, the decoration to be a set to complete the cut decoration 3170 on the upper side to the player It can be recognized that there is a (cut out decoration 3260), and the player is asked whether the set of the decoration appears or not (whether the back left second decoration 3220 is hinged open or not). It is possible to make the player feel nervous and pounding, and to increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slide-moved to the appearance position rightward in the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 located immediately behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in the frame of the center character 2500. And is visible from the player (see FIG. 256). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in an area corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the rear, An illusion can be made as the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the figure, since the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same size and the same decoration as the first back decoration 3110 in the back lower back movable presentation unit 3100, the back left movable decoration 3320 is When the decorative body 3320 is made to appear, another liquid crystal display device appears on the left side so as to form a pair with the back side and the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) on the right side. The effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the back and back first decorative body 3110 can be greatly enjoyed.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back-up middle movable presentation unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the direction of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 by the second drive motor 3443 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is viewed in a counterclockwise direction. And the back upper center decoration unit 3410 attached to the tip is located at the lowering end, and the back top middle decoration unit by the third drive motor 3463 of the back top middle rotation unit 3460. Rotate 3410 to the pivot point in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back and top decoration unit 3410 is positioned approximately at the center of the frame of the center character 2500 in front view, and the back and top decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end raised. State (FIG. 257). As a result, since the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 falls to the central position while rotating, the player is turned to the back middle decoration by the movement. The unit 3410 can be noticed, and the movement of the back-to-back decoration unit 3410 in a form that recalls the "thousand-stick" of "mah-jongg" is expected to have an expectation for a game as if it might be something good It can make you feel better.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257, from the state where the back-up interior decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lowering end and obliquely extended, the back-up interior decoration unit 3410 is closed by the first drive motor 3420 inside A pair of back and top first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to be in an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 258, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper and lower second decorative body 3412 are between the pair of back and upper first decorative bodies 3411, Since the player is facing forward, the player can be reminded of the "five thousand point bar" of "mah-jong", and it is expected that the possibility of "big hit game" will increase. It can make you feel better.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 258, when the back top first driving motor 3420 slides the pair of back top middle first decorative bodies 3411 in a direction to separate further from each other into a fully open state, as shown in FIG. The central decorative portion 3412a, the central lateral decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back-to-back second decorative member 3412 face forward from between the first-to-back decorative members 3411 In order to be in a state, the player can be reminded of a "one-man stick" of "mah-jongg" and convinced that the drawn first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" This makes it possible to enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, as an effect using the back and bottom front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back and bottom front first decorative body 3510 is hinge-rotated to the front of the back and bottom front second decorative body 3520 and remains folded. Then, the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is raised from the position of the lowering end to the position of the rising end by the back bottom front second drive motor 3552 of the lifting and lowering unit 3502. When the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, substantially the entire back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is positioned within the frame of the center character 2500 in a front view, The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the back first front decorative member 3510 can be visually recognized well from the user side (see FIG. 260). As a result, the first decorative body 3510 moves up from the bottom to cover the lower front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that it is possible for the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, and a sense of expectation for gaming. It can be enhanced. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decoration member 3511 of the first back decoration 3511 has a decoration in which a plurality of “marshes” of “mah-jongg” are arranged. As the front decorative member 3511 is lifted and can be visually recognized, it is possible for the player to have an illusion and enjoyment as if the user's side is lined up.

  Then, in a state where the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the lifting and lowering unit 3502, the back bottom front first drive motor 3528 of the back bottom front second decoration 352 (decoring body lifting mechanism 3501A) When the back decoration front first decoration 3510 is hinged with respect to the axis extending to the left and right so as to rise, and it is positioned above the back decoration front second decoration 3520 The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the first back decorative first body 3510 are vertically aligned. In this state, substantially the lower half of the inside of the frame of the center character 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the first decoration 3510 and the second decoration 3520 in front view. The decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form a single large decoration (the decoration of the character of "Saito") (FIG. 261). See). Thus, the first front decorative member 3511 having the decoration in which a plurality of "mahjong tiles" are arranged side by side is hinge-rotated about an axis extending in the left and right direction to mean "up", and the word "wasted" Can appear to the player that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", and it is entertaining by the feeling of expectation for the occurrence of the "big hit game" Can be increased.

[Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game machine 5 and a payout control board 951 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper dish liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image in the device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 2104 for detecting gaming balls received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003, and detecting gaming balls received in the first large winning opening 2005 Second large winning opening sensor 2254 for detecting game balls received by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening 2006a as the second large winning opening 2006, and the second lower large winning opening 2006b, and Detection signals from the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557, and a magnetic detection sensor for detecting improper magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. It is input via the port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2550, the first attack solenoid 2113, the second upper attack solenoid 2553, and outputs a drive signal to the second lower attachment solenoid 2556, or the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the second special symbol display, the first special symbol memory display The second special symbol memory indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal symbol memory indicator, the game state indicator, the round indicator, and the like output the drive signal.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening sensor 2104, the second start opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening A noncontact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the sensor 2557, whereas a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game balls enter frequently, The detection of gaming balls by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is also used for the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 951 and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. To Furthermore, the main control MPU controls various commands relating to control of game effects executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 etc. and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 around the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. It is transmitted to the control unit 1511. Note that the main control MPU, as described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, shapes these various commands, and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  As described in detail later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Provided). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. This blackout notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 951 or the like.

[Discharge control board]
The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls is not shown in detail, but performs payout control by the payout control unit 952 for performing various control related to payout and firing control by the firing solenoid 682 A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that clears an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the gaming balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removing operation.

[Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 952 for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 951 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, or the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and are input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. Ru.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the far cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out Based on the detection signal from detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no gaming ball in payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, in the payout paths 381d and 382d of the payout device 830, the payout wing 839 and the gaming ball are engaged to notify that the payout wing 839 is difficult to rotate), and the numeral "3 "" Is displayed Indicates that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When there is a "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, "full" (Specifically, the game ball stored in the far cover unit 520 is notified that it is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is displayed, it notifies that it is "CR not connected" (indication that the electric connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. It has informed the message indicating "stock" (specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined for the game ball is not paid out).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending button 332 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU Be done. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334, and this signal is a display unit. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[Release control unit]
The launch control unit 953 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and sphere feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is not shown in detail but a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding launch are input. A circuit, an oscillating circuit for outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the fire reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In the handle unit 500 relationship, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504 and a stop that detects whether the game ball is forcibly stopped to stop by the player's intention. The detection signal from the button is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit receives a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, and a firing reference pulse is input. At the same time, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit is triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse and outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 so that the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 are balled. When one ball is received in the feed unit 540 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the received game ball is sent to the striking device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply substrate for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control substrate 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control substrate 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 262, performs peripheral control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

[Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for game board decoration drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or a door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the vibration generator 242 or the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and each frame of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light emission data composed of a light-on signal to a color LED or the like provided on a substrate, door-side light emission data for outputting a blink signal or a gradation light-on signal Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal display control unit In addition to transmitting to 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via an effect drive board 3043 attached to the back surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 and the effect button press sensor 258 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 outputs a signal based on the operation signal. I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and various sounds adapted to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 Control is performed so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or the like) are transmitted to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the low frequency speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 as sound information. By sending (4.1 ch surround signal etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than ever before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of initial data, door frame side on / off blink commands, game board side on / off blink commands, movable body drive on / off commands, and display commands that are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the back surface of the back box. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received game board side lighting blink command The lighting signal or the blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 or the like.

  In addition, the effect drive board 3043, the drive signal based on the received drive command, the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, and each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Output to

[Effect display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 is not shown in detail but Display control MPU, display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for displaying and controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and main liquid crystal An image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied And have.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to the control data (display command) and the corresponding schedule data. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. It is done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data includes various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 in advance as image data from the image ROM to the nonresident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish are extracted. The drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244. Also, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 do not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-progress signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Do. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. In this "line buffer method", drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data of one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored. It affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 as an integrated unit. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thus, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the positions arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when sprites overlap with one another are set, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device The image is drawn on a liquid crystal display device 244 or 3114.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front And a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction intersecting with the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and use the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, they are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as a sub scan, and similarly draw data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 are sequentially scanned from left to right as main scanning as main scanning. It outputs to each minute pixel.

[Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 201, FIG. 207, FIG. 212, FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, so that it can be hit more strongly as it is rotated clockwise, continuously up to 100 game balls per minute, That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 , And flow down the area on the left side of the center part 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened in the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500, the center character passes through the warp passage 2521 It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 through the induction channel 2523.

  The game balls supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 on the left and right It is discharged backward from any of. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 The ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the gaming area 5 a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The gaming balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first winning opening 2005, and the like.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is brought closer to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the side unit upper 2300 There is a possibility that it can be accepted by 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 (driven And the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the upper right circulation space 2541. The game balls abut against the obstacle nails and circulate while changing the flow-down direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper portion, a general winning opening 2001 and a second start opening 2004 which is normally closed by a second start opening door member 2549 are provided at the lower portion.

  The gaming balls having flowed down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enter the lower right circulation space 2543 through the downstream right flow passage 2542. The game ball entering the lower right distribution space 2543 is closed with the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower opening winning hole 2006b arranged side by side as the second large winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower large winning opening door member 2555 passes through the second attachment passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from within the gaming area 5a from the left end of the discharge plate portion 2559 on the left in front view. Released. The downstream end (release plate portion 2559) of the second attack passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state When the gaming ball is released from the second attack passage 2543a into the gaming area 5a, the gaming ball is accepted by the first big winning opening 2005 with high probability.

  The game balls circulating in the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flow downward while the increase in the circulation speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, it may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attachment passage 2543a, and the gaming ball having entered the discharge passage 2543b is the game area 5a It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

  When the game ball entering the upper right distribution space 2541 is right-handed and passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, an ordinary random number is updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 An ordinary random number is acquired from among the above, and the selected ordinary random number is compared with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. If the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in front view only once and the second With the start opening 2004 open, the game ball can be received in the second start opening 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, it is randomly drawn as "normal hit", "first normal hit", "second normal hit", or "third normal hit" as a "normal hit". When the time-saving control is being performed, the second start-up door member 2549 is selected when the result of the ordinary lottery of the ordinary lottery is either “first ordinary hit”, “second ordinary hit”, or “third ordinary hit”. By turning in a counterclockwise direction from the front view to open the second start port 2004, the gaming ball can be received in the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the front view By turning in the counterclockwise direction to close the second start port 2004, the opening / closing control to make the second start port 2004 impossible to receive the game ball is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times) Repeatedly). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second start port 2004 is "0.3 seconds" as a period of five times in which the game ball can be accepted. , “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “the second normal hit” The second start-up port 2004 is set to be able to receive the game ball as five times, each of "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is made to be able to receive the game ball 5 times each The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second second hit" and "third normal" Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variable display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time) until the stop display is displayed (until the lottery result is normally suggested). At the second start port 2004, the second start port door member 2549 is pivoted to an open state after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of time reduction control mentioned later, control which shortens normal fluctuation time rather than normal (state which is not performing time reduction control) is performed. In addition, the opening time for turning the second start opening door member 2549 by turning the second start opening door member 2549 may be changed according to the game state, for example, the time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a long time as compared with the case where the time saving control is performed.

  In addition, a new game ball is a gate unit during a period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and until a normal symbol which is variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until a normal lottery result is suggested) After passing 2003, it is not possible to start the variation display of the normal symbol anew on the normal symbol display, so the start of the variation display of the normal symbol is until the previous variation display of the normal symbol is finished (normal lottery result I will hold it until the end of the suggestion. Specifically, based on the fact that the gate sensor 2547 detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003, the ordinary random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. Hold the start of the variation display of the normal symbol until. Note that the maximum number of reserved ordinary random numbers that can be stored on the main control board 1310 is up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. . Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated with a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit" by obtaining a first special random number from among one special random number and collating the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table , A "small hit", etc.) is drawn. Then, after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the first special lottery result selected, the first special lottery result The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in the lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after variably displaying the first special symbol). In addition, in the first special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002, "off", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" Yes, by comparing the acquired first special random numbers with the big hit determination table, it is determined which of them is the above, and further after the big hit game normally (low probability state: with a probability of about 395 in this example) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability change state): in this example it will win the big hit with a probability of about 1 in 44) to improve the probability of winning the big hit (winning probability) than winning the big hit) Whether or not to execute (a definite variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute a time reduction control (time saving state) to shorten the fluctuation time more than usual if at least the first special lottery result is out (time short hit or not) And time-saving control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. In addition, the winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 300 in this example).

  In addition, when the game ball received by the second start opening 2004 is detected by the second start opening sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. An advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit", "small hit", etc.) that is advantageous to the player by acquiring the second special random number of and comparing the acquired second special random number with the predetermined big hit determination table The lottery of the second special lottery result is generated. Then, after the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the second special lottery result selected, the second special lottery result The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in the lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol according to the second special lottery result after variably displaying the second special symbol). In addition, in the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the second start opening 2004, "off", "2R big hit", "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", There are "7R big hit", "8R big hit" and "16R big hit", and it is judged by comparing the acquired second special random numbers with the big hit judgment table which one of them is the normal after the big hit game. Low probability state: Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability change state)) for improving the probability (winning probability) of winning in a big hit than in this example with a probability of winning about 1 in 395 Then, whether or not to win the big hit with a probability of about 1/44 (whether or not a definite variation big hit or not), and at least the second special lottery results time reduction control to shorten the fluctuation time than normal when out (Short time ) Whether or not to execute (time or junior high hit or not) and the time to execute time reduction control (time reduction number of times: special symbol (number of times the first special bat symbol and second special symbol change)), and so It has become.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state The eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator) are displayed in the lighting mode according to the special lottery result after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, and then the first big winning opening Either of 2005 and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 will be in the state where reception of game sphere is possible with specified opening and closing pattern. When the game ball is received at the first large winning hole 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006 when the first large winning hole 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006 is open, a payout device is provided by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. From 830 to a predetermined number (for example, 11 when the game ball is received in the first large winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second large winning opening 2006) game balls Is dispensed onto the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 allow the game ball to be received, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 can receive many game balls. The balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  If the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first large winning opening 2005, the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) The open / close pattern that is acceptable after opening is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the first big prize winning opening A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the 2005 or second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept gaming balls, or it is determined in advance to the first big winning opening 2005 If either the number (for example, seven) of game balls are accepted or the predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls is accepted to the second large winning opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. The opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "4R big hit", 4 rounds if "5R big hit", 5 rounds if "16R big hit", 16 rounds if "16R big hit" each, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, the opening and closing pattern (the first large winning opening 2005 has a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)) to be executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" In the meantime, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the first large winning opening 2005 substantially in the opening / closing pattern (which is closed after becoming an open state capable of receiving the game ball). On the other hand, the opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept the game ball, or the first large winning opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (eg, seven) of game balls are accepted, or a predetermined number (eg, ten) of game balls are accepted to the second large winning opening 2006. If any of the conditions is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006 in the opening / closing pattern in which the gaming ball is in the closed state which can not be received. In addition, the special lottery results in the case of "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept gaming balls, or is previously determined to the first large winning opening 2005 A condition is met that either a certain number (for example, seven) of gaming balls are accepted or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are accepted to the second large winning opening 2006 Then, the number of rounds in which the opening and closing pattern for making the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is executed may be taken as a substantial special lottery result, and the number determined in advance to the first large winning opening 2005 as a special lottery result (for example, , 7) If any condition of game ball acceptance or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls accepted to the second big winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the game ball is not accepted closed. Opening and closing pattern to be in the state and opening and closing pattern to be executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first large winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds In the meantime, the game ball may be provided with a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern which can be opened and then closed after the game ball can be received. For example, a special lottery result "8R big hit with 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls can be received in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening If any of the predetermined number (for example, 10) game balls are accepted or not satisfied, the open / close pattern for making the game balls into the non-acceptable closed state is repeated four times, Opening and closing patterns executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for the first large winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds), The opening and closing pattern) may be repeated four times after the game ball can be opened and then closed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the second large winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second large winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of a "big hit", for example, the first round (1R eyes) is opened by the second large winning opening 2006a to make it possible to accept the game ball, to be closed by the satisfaction of the condition to make it unacceptable, and then to be acceptable. When the second lower large winning opening 2006b is opened and the next round (the second R) which enables the game ball to be accepted is started until the second interval (during interval), and the second lower large winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper large winning opening 2006a is reopened to make it possible to receive the game ball. Then, the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until the predetermined number of rounds of digestion. As a result, in the second attack passage 2543a, during the "big hit", either of the second upper large winning opening 2006a and the second lower large winning opening 2006b is ready to receive the game ball, so this state If the game ball is distributed in the second attack passage 2543a by hitting the right, the game ball will always be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006, and the game ball will not be missed, and the player will be entertained. Can.

  Further, in this embodiment, in some of the plurality of types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the time reduction control after the end of the jackpot game is made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-short time state (the state where the short time control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state where time reducing control is being executed), time saving control is executed after the big hit game. If the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-short time state (the state where the short time control is not executed), the time short control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state where time reducing control is being executed), time reducing control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability untimely state (the state where both the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improvement control after a big hit game If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, do not execute time saving control after the big hit game. On the other hand, in a state in which probability improvement control is being executed or time-shortening control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improvement control after a big hit game. In the case of a big hit, time saving control is performed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation display executed on the first special symbol display by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 and the reception of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 The variation display of the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display is stopped by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first The first start is performed until the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display is stopped and displayed (the second special lottery result is suggested) by the reception of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Because it is not possible to change the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) before the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery Until the suggestion of the result or the second special lottery result is completed ) Is set to be pending. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 by the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551 The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the fact that the game ball received by the second starting opening 2004 is detected, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) is stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. Note that the maximum number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four each, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are played Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension. In addition, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are configured to preferentially digest the second special random number. That is, regardless of the reception timing of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the variable display start of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed with priority over the symbol.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, the above-mentioned eight LEDs constituting the special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator), repeatedly turning on and off predetermined time It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and indicates a special lottery result by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of stopping.

  On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is indirectly controlled based on control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control substrate 1310, and the special lottery result is Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) The variation display of the decorative symbol row is started, and then the stop display is sequentially displayed (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) based on the special random number (the first special random number, the second special random number) acquired at the start winning occurrence, the plurality of decorative symbol rows change After being displayed, an effect image which is displayed in a stopped state so as to suggest special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display. Generally, the player pays attention to the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 because it is easy to see large.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, and the finalized image The time until the is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by main liquid crystal display device 1600, peripheral control board 1510, the decoration of center character 2500, the back left, according to the special lottery result drawn. Inside decoration unit 3050, back lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and back lower front movable effect unit 3500 etc. A light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed, and the player can be entertained also by various effects, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 263 (a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers and RAM as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that is being The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to the operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal at the time of power on. When it is determined that the above-mentioned data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in the various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not illustrated, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is performed to save information (for example, various flags and the like) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch is not operated, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU in the backup processing is referred to without performing the initialization processing (step S1). And executing recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. In addition, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is performed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) to be subjected to a lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) A random number, a second special random number), a fluctuating random number to be subjected to lottery processing for a fluctuating time required for a fluctuating display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), corresponding to a fluctuating display of the special symbol In the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, reach (in a state where the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped by the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not stopped yet, left, middle, etc. Reach random numbers to be subjected to lottery processing whether or not to synchronously display all the decorative symbols on the right so as to become the same symbol, if determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number Symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) to be used for lottery processing to determine the type, lottery processing according to the chance to hit the second start opening door member 2549 It has a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers and the like.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is started, the second start opening 2004 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters with different ranges of random numbers that update reach random numbers The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 263 (b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, the second Detection signals from various switches such as the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, and the like are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, the first showing the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process according to the hit which becomes the operation trigger of the second start opening door member 2549. . Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the second starting opening door member 2549 is higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. Is configured to execute (so-called short time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game, and the normal fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol When this is the case, such a short time is realized by extending the opening time of the second start port 2004 and increasing the number of times the second start port 2004 is opened.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The command set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process of outputting data such as contact information (16R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hole management computer next as the process of step S18 .

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the large winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the on state, the above payout control is performed so that the winning balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. The dispensing control command is output to the substrate 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834 so as to pay out the winning balls to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes storage processing of checking increase and decrease of the number of holdings as processing of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 264, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is firstly controlled by the first starting opening sensor 2104. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2551 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2004 is entered) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number The second starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that it is controlled to the big hit game is set (step S35), if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit control that controls the big hit game The process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is "2R positive variation big hit", "8R normal big hit", and "8R positive variation big hit" The first large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close based on the above, and the second large winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close based on the indication of "10R probability variation big hit". In addition, based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol is "2R normal big hit" based on that became a mode that suggests opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005, "4R The second big winning opening on the basis of becoming a form that suggests "5R definite variation big hit", "6R definite variation big hit", "7R definite variation big hit", "8R definite variation big hit", and "16R definite variation big hit" Control opening and closing of 2006. In addition, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol ends the jackpot game based on the fact that "10R probability variation big hit" has become a mode, and the second special symbol fluctuation As a result of the lottery process for display mode at the time of display stop, "4R probability variation big hit", "5R probability variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", "7R probability variation big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit" When ending the big hit game based on having become a mode, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the first special symbol in the time saving state became the mode that suggests "8R certain variation big hit" When you finish the big hit game based on the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a state other than the normal state When you finish the big hit game based on the result of "2R probability variation big hit" is set, the time saving control (time saving control) is executed until the next big hit by setting the time saving flag. Do. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol during the time saving state ends the big hit game based on the fact that "8R normal big hit" is suggested The special symbol (first special symbol, the first special symbol, the first after the big hit game by setting "72" to the fluctuation number counter which counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Execute time saving control (control of time saving state) until the number of times of fluctuation of 2 special symbols) reaches 72 times. In addition, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol during the time saving state ends the big hit game based on the fact that "2R normal big hit" has become a mode, the second special Depending on the lottery result, set one of “18”, “36”, “54” and “72” in the fluctuation number counter and also set the time saving flag, and after the big hit game, the special symbol (first special symbol, the first The time saving control (control of the time saving state) is executed until the number of times of fluctuation of the 2 special symbols) reaches the number according to the second special lottery result among 18 times, 36 times, 54 times and 72 times. In addition, high probability flag is set when you finish the big hit game based on the big hit (2R big hit, 4R big hit, 5R big hit, 6R true big hit, 7R true big hit, 8R positive big hit, 10R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) By doing this, probability improvement control (control of high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high probability short time state if both the high probability flag and the short time flag are set, and the high probability short time state if only the high probability flag is set without the time short flag set. Control is performed, and if only the short time flag is set without setting the high probability flag, control is made to the low probability time short state (so-called short time state). If neither the high probability flag nor the time short flag is set, the low probability Control to the non-time-short state (so-called normal state).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set or not (step S36), the small hit execution flag is If it is set, small hit control processing (step S41) to control the small hit game is executed. In addition, in the small hitting control process, it is based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becoming the aspect which suggests "small hitting" Control the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005.

  Further, if neither the big hit running flag nor the small hit running flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38) on condition that it is "0" (step S37) (second special symbol hold) On the condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), it depends on the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 2104 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 265. In step S41, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first special hold number counter to indicate the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned first special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display start of the first special symbol on hold: Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as each random number thus acquired Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the start of variation display of the first special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S42 to S44, the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, the main control MPU performs a big hit or a small hit on the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not to be the type of big hit if it is a big hit, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or an aspect of a game effect to be executed After the effect pre-determination process of determining the prior determination information such as the type (type of variation pattern) before starting the variable display according to the start winning combination (step S45), the process is ended.

  FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second starting opening sensor 2551 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 266. In step S51, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of reservations of the above-mentioned 2nd special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly start the variable display start of the second special symbol in the state of suspension Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as each random number acquired in this way Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S52 to step S54, the variable display start of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether it will be a big hit or a small hit by comparing it with the fluctuating random number, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, reach as a game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or a small hit The effect is executed or the type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage process, a high probability flag indicating that control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the first special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value and the first It is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing with one special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3857-3946) is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 272 (A) to be described later) and compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3937-3946) of low probability and low probability is set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 272 (A) at low probability) described later and is the jackpot judgment value to be compared with the first special random number. The same random number is used. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not a big hit is made, and the contents of the game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and this game Any of "big hit 1 to 12" as a big hit as a prior judgment information by specifying the type of fluctuation pattern indicating a period (fluctuation time) to execute the effect, and either "out" or "reach 1 to 4" as a big hit It can be classified into crabs. In this example, as shown in FIG. 268 (B), the outlier fluctuation pattern, the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the weak SP reach fluctuation pattern, the strong other than the specific according to the ratio (also referred to as the jackpot expected value, the jackpot reliability) SP reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns of a specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern is provided (big hit expected value is out fluctuation pattern <normal reach fluctuation pattern <weak SP reach fluctuation pattern <strong SP reach fluctuation pattern other than specified <Specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). In addition, the percentage of the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process in step S82 and the second variation pattern setting process in the second special symbol process) to be described later and executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is inversely proportional to the jackpot expected value (outside fluctuation pattern> normal reach fluctuation pattern> weak SP reach fluctuation pattern> non-specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern> specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the outlier fluctuation pattern is executed relatively frequently, while the specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern is rarely executed.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage processing, the same disturbance is generated regardless of whether the high probability flag is set or not. It is also specified whether or not it will be a small hit by comparing the small hit judgment value set in the numerical value with the first special random number. These high probability or low probability small hit judgment values (3800 to 3812) are set in the high probability or low probability big hit judgment table (refer to FIG. 272A) described later, and the first special random number is determined. The same random value as the small hit judgment value to be compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a small hit, and "big hit 9 to 12" in which a small hit is included as the predetermination information It can be classified.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that control of a high probability state is being performed is If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value It is determined whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing the second special random number with the second special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3857-3946) is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 272 (A) to be described later) and compared with the second special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3937-3946) of low probability and low probability is set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 272 (A) at low probability) described later and is the jackpot judgment value to be compared with the second special random number. The same random number is used. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a big hit, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as the prior determination information. It can be classified as either "off" or "reach 1 to 4".

  In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 is not performed in the time saving state (time saving) in which the time saving control is performed. There is. On the other hand, in the effect pre-determination process executed based on the game ball being received in the second start port 2004, the above time saving control is not performed in the non time saving state (non time saving) that is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when controlled to the non-time-short state, only the effect pre-determination processing based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 is executed, and the time-shorted state is controlled. In this case, only the effect pre-determination processing based on the game ball being accepted to the second start port 2004 is performed.

  Further, in the predetermination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the big win is identified by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table, the determination value indicating which big hit When the big hit type is identified by comparing with the first symbol random number and the big hit is identified by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table, a decision indicating which big hit is to be made The type of big hit is identified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, a determination value indicating that a special 1 (2R probability variation big hit) will be a big hit by matching the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) to be described later. It is considered as the same random number as the judgment value (0-16) which shows that it becomes a big hit of specific 1 among judgment values to be compared with one symbol random number, and it is specified 6 (8R probability variation big hit by matching with the first special random number Among the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) to be described later and compared with the first symbol random number, the judgment value indicating that the big hit of non-specific 2 (8R normal big hit) will be It is considered as the same random value as the judgment value (17-154, 160-199) which shows that it becomes big hit of specified 6 or non specified 2 and it matches with the first special random number and the big hit of specified 7 (10R certain variation big hit) The judgment value indicating that the The same random number value as the judgment value (155-159) which shows that it becomes big hit of specific 7 among the judgment values which are set in the symbol determination table (see Figure 272 (C)) and is compared with the first symbol random number It is done.

  Similarly, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that a big hit is identified by comparing the second special random number and the prior determination table, a determination indicating which big hit is to be made. Indicates the type of jackpot by comparing the value and the second symbol random number, and identifying the type of jackpot by identifying the type of jackpot by comparing the second special random number and the predetermination table. The type of the jackpot is identified by comparing the determination value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that a specific 1 (2R probability variation big hit) or a non-specific 1 (2R normal big hit) will be a big hit by matching the second special random number will be described later in the symbol determination table (FIG. 272 (FIG. C) See the judgment value that is set in (c) and is compared with the second symbol random number, and the same random value as the judgment value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it will be a jackpot of specified 1 or non-specified 1 And match the second special random number 2 (4R probability variation big hit), 3 (5R probability variation big hit), 4 (6R probability variation big hit), 5 (7R probability variation big hit), 6 (8R probability variation big hit) Judgment value which shows that it becomes big hit of will become big hit of specific 2-specific 6 among judgment values that are set in the symbol determination table (see Fig. 272 (C) to be mentioned later (see Fig. 272 (C)) and compared with second symbol random numbers. Is the same as the judgment value (20-55) Judgment value which is a random number value of and indicates a big hit of specified 8 (16R probability variation big hit) by matching with the second special random number is set in the symbol determination table (see Fig. 272 (C)) described later Among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number, the same random value as the determination value (56-159) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 8 is made.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made, a plurality of reach effects are produced by comparing the change value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the change random number. Specify which reach effect to perform and become a big hit. Specifically, in the big hit of the specific 7 and the specific 8, the judgment value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is a judgment that indicates that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is a random value identical to the value and indicates that super reach effect with a low probability of big hit (hereinafter referred to as weak SP reach), is judged to be compared with the fluctuation random number Among the values, it is a random number value identical to the judgment value indicating that the super reach production with low jackpot expectation degree is to be executed, and a specific superreach production with high jackpot expectation degree (hereinafter, also referred to as strong SP reach) Judgment values (30 to 216) indicating that non-super reach effect (also referred to as specific strong SP reach) is to be executed are specific super reach performances among judgment values to be compared with variable random numbers. Judgment value which is the same random value as the judgment value which indicates that the super reach effect with high expectation which will be high is to be executed is the same as the judgment value which indicates that certain super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects with high expectation In (217-240), among the determination values to be compared with the variable random number, the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be performed is used.

  Also, in the specific 2 to 6 or non-specific 2 jackpots, the determination value (0-4) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is a determination that indicates that normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is a random value identical to the value and indicates that the super reach effect with low jackpot expectation degree is to be executed, is the super reach effect with low jackpot expectation degree among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. The judgment value (30-216) is a random number that is the same as the judgment value indicating that the execution is to be performed, and indicates that the super reach production with a high degree of expectation of big hit is to be executed other than the specific super reach effect. Among the judgment values to be compared, a judgment value identical to a judgment value indicating execution of a super reach effect with a high degree of expectation for big hit other than a specific super reach effect is taken as a large win A judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among super reach effects having a high degree of expectation indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be performed among judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  In addition, in the specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot, the determination value (0-89) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is the determination value indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number The judgment value (90-189) which is the same random number value and indicates that the super reach effect with a low hit probability is to be executed executes the super reach effect with a low hit probability among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (190-216) which is set as a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that the player is to perform other than the specific super reach effect among the super reach effects having a high hit probability is compared with the change random number. The judgment value is the same random value as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a high degree of expectation for big hit other than the specific super reach effect is to be executed, The judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high degree of expectation for hitting is to execute a specific super reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random numbers. The same random value as the indicated judgment value is used.

  For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number with the prior determination table, the type of the jackpot is accurately identified and determined in advance. As information, "big hit 1" to be a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from normal reach, "big hit 2" to be a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from weak SP reach, strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach The "big hit 3" which makes the big hit of the specific 7 or the specific 8 "big hit 4" which makes the big hit of the specific 7 or the specific 8 from the specific strong SP reach, the specific 2 to 6 or the non specific 2 big hit Containing "big hit 5", specified 2 to 6 from weak SP reach or "big hit 6" containing non-specified 2 big hit, specified 2 from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach 6 or non-specific 2 jackpots included "big hit 7", specified 2 to 6 from specific strong SP reach or non-specified 2 big hit is included "big hit 8", specified 1 or non-specified 1 from normal reach A big hit "big hit 9", a specific 1 or non specific 1 big hit from a weak SP reach a "big hit 10", a specific 1 or non specific 1 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach It can be classified as either "big hit 11", or "big hit 12" as a specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified that the vehicle is out of the way, the reach is displayed when the high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being performed is set. Specify whether to display the reach by comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change and the reach random number to indicate that the high probability flag is not set and control of the short time state (low probability time short state) is executed If only the short time flag indicating that the user is doing is set, it is specified whether or not the reach is to be displayed by comparing the reach judgment value at the short time indicating the reach when displaying the reach with the reach random number. When the probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach random value is compared with the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed. Ri to determine whether or not to display the reach. The reach determination value (0) at the time of this probability change is set to the same reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. The reach judgment value (0-5) at the time is set as a reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number set in the reach judgment table (refer to FIG. 272 (B)) at the time of short. The reach judgment value (0-6) at the time is set to the same random judgment value as the reach judgment value which is set in the normal reach judgment table (see FIG. 272 (B) described later) and is compared with the reach random number. . Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether reach effect is to be executed as the game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when it is not a big hit. It can be classified into any of “reach” in which reach is not displayed (execution of reach effect) as determination information, and “reach 1 to 4” in which reach is displayed (execution of reach effect).

  In addition, the reach judgment value (0-5) at the time of short time and the reach judgment value (0-6) at the normal time include the same judgment value (0) as the reach judgment value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and reach random number match, it is classified whether reach is displayed (execution of reach effect) in any of the gaming states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number with the prior determination table in step S61, it is determined whether the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will perform reach effect as a game effect in any of the game states at the time of probability change, time reduction, and normal time. It can be identified.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the reach effect is performed as the game effect performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed and the change random number The mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparing. Specifically, the judgment value (0-163) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number The judgment value (164-222), which is a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that the execution is to be performed and indicates that the super reach effect with a low degree of expectation for big hit is to be performed, is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) Among the judgment values set in) and compared with the fluctuating random number, the judgment value is the same as the judgment value indicating execution of the super reach effect with low expectation of big hit, and specified among the super reach effects with high degree of hit expectation Judgment values (223-235) indicating that other than the super reach effect of are executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. The judgment value set in) is the same random value as the judgment value indicating execution of super reach effect with high expectation for big hit other than specific super reach effect among judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and the big hit expectation degree Judgment values (236-240) indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be executed among the high super reach effects are determined to be set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and compared with the change random number Of the values, the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be performed is used. Therefore, by comparing the variation random number and the prior determination table in step S61, the type type of the game effect to be executed is accurately identified, and the normal reach effect is executed as the prior determination information, "reach 1" "Leach 2" which performs low super reach production, "Leach 3" which performs super reach production with high expectation of big hit (except for specific super reach production), super reach production with high expectation of big hit (specific super reach production ) Can be classified into any of "reach 4". Then, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it can be classified as any of “reach 1” to “reach 4” as the prior determination information.

  As described above, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A) and the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), reach random numbers As a result of comparison with the variable random number), whether it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The reach effect is executed or the prior determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is specified, and as shown in FIG. 268 (B), the “prediction information” is “outside”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12 And “reach 1” to “reach 4” are classified into any of 17 types.

  Then, in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the identified pre-determination information (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit The reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed, and the type of the acquired special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number) And the number of reservations (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number, and the predetermination command according to is set. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information and the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the number of first special symbol held A first special symbol advance determination command corresponding to (the value of the first special hold number counter) is set (step S62). Then, the advance determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), whereby the start opening where the start winning is generated (first start port 2002, second start Whether or not to display as a big hit or small hit the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the start winning combination that is generated in addition to the number of reservations stored corresponding to the start opening) If there is a big hit type, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, or if the reach effect is executed as a game effect to be performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the prior determination information such as the type type of game effect to be executed The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, a first holding storage area for storing prior determination information on the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second for storing prior determination information on the variable display of the second special symbol A reserve storage area is provided. Further, the first pending storage area and the second pending storage area each have 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of pending, and the peripheral control MPU takes the first prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Store in order from the (first) storage area. Then, when the prior determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the prior determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area when the a priori determination command is received Is stored, and the variation pattern command (1st variation pattern command to notify the variation display start of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol of variation pattern command to notify the variation display start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) When the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the start of fluctuation display is received, the first storage area (if the first fluctuation pattern command is received, the first storage of the first reserved storage area according to the fluctuation pattern command received Area, discard the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the second reserved storage area if the second variation pattern command has been received, and discard the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area (N = 2 to 4) If it has received one variation pattern command, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the first pending storage area, and if it has received the second variation pattern command, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the second pending storage area The prior determination information is moved to the (N−1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (the prior determination information stored in the pending storage area is shifted). In addition, it is possible to specify whether to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by the fluctuation pattern command (whether it is the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command And shift the prior determination information stored in the first reserved storage area when it is specified to start the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command. When it is specified that the variable display of the second special symbol is started based on the reception of the second fluctuation pattern command, the prior determination information stored in the second reserved storage area is shifted. Thereby, the prior determination information of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start is generated and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information Become so.

  In this example, the random number is the same as the jackpot judgment value of the advance judgment table and the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the big hit decision value of the prior decision table includes only a part of the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table, or a part or all of the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table and the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table It may be configured to include a number of random values, and the degree of possibility of becoming a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of outlier judgment values (which may include a small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value and the big hit judgment value can be respectively discriminated as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group The high probability random number determining means, wherein the ratio to the above outlier judgment value of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value which is made distinguishable as above, is set higher than the ratio of the above big hit judgment table where the above big hit winning probability is decided. Of the random numbers obtained by the means, the first special random number and the second special random number are classified as either the above-mentioned out-of-range determination value or the above-mentioned big-off determination value Value of the high probability random number provided to the same judgment while belonging to the high probability random number group in which the big hit judgment value and the out judgment value are mixed. The pseudo probability precedent judging means capable of executing an advance judgment on the degree of expectation (pseudo winning probability) related to the big hit in each of the judgment processing in the pending state by judging whether there is any. The degree of expectation regarding the winning of the big hit may be determined in advance by the pseudo probability preceding determination means.

  In this way, by providing means for determining the high probability random number having the big hit judgment value and the negative judgment value mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the success result of the big hit judgment still in the pending state may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure excluding the above, with regard to the degree of expectation (pseudo-wining probability) relating to the above-mentioned big hit corresponding to the mixture ratio of the big hit judgment value and the falling judgment value in the high probability random number determination means The precedent determination can be made executable. For example, prior to the execution of the above-mentioned big hit judgment (digestion of the judgment processing), the prior judgment that the success random number provided for the big hit judgment is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (specific hit judgment value) was not made When the decision processing based on a random value (a value belonging to a low probability random number group which is paired with a high probability random number group) which is not the precedently determined special hit judgment value is expected, the expectation pertaining to the jackpot winning It is determined that the degree (pseudo-wining probability) is lower than the above-described jackpot expectation (wining probability) (pseudo-decided winning probability).

  According to the prior determination method for such a high probability random number group, even when the specific determination process is put on hold, the big hit determination is maintained in the unexecuted state (hold). The anticipation degree (pseudo-wining probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold digestion. Will be

  FIG. 269 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing etc. for the display mode at the time of stop of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)
5. The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit displays the above-mentioned first special symbol display mode when the variation control stop mode of the first special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 263).

  FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 270, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether the fluctuation display start of the first special symbol is in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display start of the first special symbol is in the pending state, then it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control MPU as the processing of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first one stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start-up winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display start is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state) when the current gaming state is high (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 272 (A) is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 272 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability time short state)) The jackpot determination table for low probability used for the game and the jackpot determination table for high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability time short state) are provided. And, in the big hit judgment table at low probability, like the above-mentioned prior judgment table, it matches with the big hit judgment value which shows that 10 kinds of first special random numbers are won as a big hit, 13 kinds of first special random numbers are small The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the player has won a hit, and to match the out determination value indicating that the first special random numbers of 3924 types are the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In this low probability big hit judgment table, like the above-mentioned prior judgment table, it matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that 10 kinds of second special random numbers are won as a big hit, and 3937 second special random numbers deviate from the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range determination value indicating that

  Further, in the big hit determination table at high probability, like the above-mentioned prior determination table, 90 types of first special random numbers including the first special random number identical to the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at low probability Matches the jackpot determination value, matches the small hitting judgment value indicating that the 19 types of the first special random numbers have won in the small hitting, and the 3838 first special random numbers match the leaving determination value. One special random number is associated with each other. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state), when the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability short time state And 9) of the short time state (low probability time short state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the high probability big hit judgment table to be referenced to compare with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In the high probability big hit determination table, 90 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table are the same as the prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and to match with the departure judgment value indicating that the second special random number of 3857 types is the above-mentioned departure.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115 ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is hit big is set, it ends processing (step S116), the 1st special read out at step S102 of the selected big hit judgment table and the 1st special symbol normal processing If it is determined as a small hit as a result of comparison with the random number (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is won for the small hit is set, and the process is ended (step S118). As a result of comparison between the selected big hit judgment table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing When it is determined that that compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 272 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 272 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is a probability variation used when the gaming state is a probability variation (high probability non-short status, high probability short status) Reach judgment table at the time, reach judgment table at short time to be used when the game state is short time (low probability time short state), and used when the game state is normal time (normal state: low probability non-short time state) And a reach determination table at a normal time. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation, similarly to the above-mentioned prior determination table, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number matches reach indicating that the reach random number does not reach 238 The reach random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above.

  In addition, in the reach determination table at the time of short time, similarly to the above-described prior determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including reach random numbers identical to the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation reach The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the time-short time (low probability time-short state) than in the probability variation (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including reach random numbers identical to the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the probability change time and the short time are reached similarly to the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the indicated reach determination value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time (low probability time short state).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the reach is determined to be out of step (step S120a), the variation Sets a reach flag indicating that it is a reach, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first of all, as shown in FIG. 273. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 (C). (Step S122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 272 (C), in the symbol determination table, each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, identification 2 4R probability variation big hit, identification 3 5R probability variation big hit, identification as in the prior determination table above) 4 6R probability variation big hit, specified 5 7R probability variation big hit, specified 6 8R probability variation big hit, specified 7 10R probability variation big hit, non-specified 1 2R normal big hit, non specified 2 8R normal big hit) to a random number (1st design) The random number and the second symbol random number are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of the present example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. By opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter, 2R big hit game is executed, probability improvement control is executed from the end of the 2R big hit game to the next big hit If there is a game state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state, low probability time short state), the specific 1 2R probability variation that executes time reduction control until the next big hit Big hit 2. The 2nd big winning opening 2006 is controlled by opening and closing in a mode that the game ball can enter, 4R big hit game is executed, after the 4R big hit game is over, until next big hit from probability improvement control and time saving control Specific 2 4R probability variation big hit that performs both 3. The 2nd big winning opening 2006 is controlled by opening and closing in the manner that the game ball can enter, and 5R big hit game is executed, after the 5R big hit game is over, with probability improvement control and time saving control until it becomes big hit next time Specific 3 5R probability variation big hit that performs both Opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2006 in a manner that the game ball can enter to execute the 6R big hit game, execute the 6R big hit game and finish the next big hit until it becomes the next big hit Specific 4 6R probability variation big hit that performs both Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter and execute the 7R big hit game, and after the 7R big hit game is over, the probability improvement control and time saving control from the end to the next big hit Specific 5 7R probability variation big hit that performs both If it is the first special lottery result, the opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005 is performed in a mode that the game ball can enter, and 8R big hit game is executed, and the 8R big hit game is over and until the next big hit Probability improvement control is performed, and if time reduction control is performed at the time of winning (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) time reduction control is performed until the next big hit, and if it is the second special lottery result Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter the 8R big hit game and execute the 8R big hit game and then the probability improvement control and time saving control until the next big hit Specific 6 8R probability variation big hit that performs both Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter and execute the 10R big hit game, and after the 10R big hit game is over, it is between probability improvement control and time saving control until the next big hit. Specific 7 10R probability variation big hit to do both 8. Control the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006 in such a manner that the game ball can enter the 16R big hit game and execute the 16R big hit game and finish the next big hit until it becomes the next big hit with probability improvement control and time saving control Specific 8 16R probability variation big hit that performs both By opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 in a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter, 2R big hit game is executed, and probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit after the 2R big hit game is over If there is time reduction control at the time of winning (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) 2R big hit after the end of the big hit game variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) a predetermined number of times ( Unspecified 1 2R Normal Big Hit that executes time-saving control until it is executed 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times). By opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 in a mode that the game ball can enter, 8R big hit game is executed, probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit after ending 8R big hit game If there is a time-saving control at the time of winning (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) after the end of the 8R big hit game variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times Time-saving control is performed until it is decided to be one of the 10 types of non-specific 2 8R normal big hits 10 types of big hits.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of big hit and the determination ratio are different I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272 (C), the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol includes a specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, a specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, a specific 7 10R probability variation big hit, non While the distribution of the judgment value is set for the special 2 8R big hit, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is a specific 1 2R positive variation big hit, a specific 2 4R positive variation big hit, a specific 3 5R probability variation big hit, specific 4 6R probability variation big hit, specific 5 7R probability variation big hit, specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, specific 8 16R probability variation big hit, non-specific 1 2R regular big hit for the distribution of judgment value set It is done.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, the big hit game (the game ball can enter) In the embodiment, the so-called right-handed game is performed, in which the game ball is hit to the right in front view than the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the center character 2500. In the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the center character 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. Then, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened due to the structure of the game board 5, the second large large opening 2006 is aimed at and the game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500. It is supposed to win the prize opening 2006 by all means. Therefore, in the big hit game that controls the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, the game balls hit in the right hitting game area 2540 are not wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1111 (2543 c)), It is possible to digest the jackpot game in a short time.

  On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted on the front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position between the right hitting game area 2540 and the first big winning opening 2005, the game ball is an obstacle By touching the nail, the game ball is given various motions to flow down. Therefore, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, even if the game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first winning hole 2005 is won That is not limited, gaming balls that have not won the first large winning opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from an out port 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the gaming area 5a. As described above, in the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in the present embodiment, the gaming ball is more efficient than the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close. It becomes possible to win a prize in the second big winning prize port 2006, and it is possible to digest a big hit game in a short time.

  Further, in this example, in one round of the opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005, the condition for changing the first large winning opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state and the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2006. The conditions for changing the second big winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are changed to the closed state about 30 seconds after being controlled to the open state, but even before that time When the number of game balls determined in advance is won in the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, the state is changed to the closed state. And, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first large winning opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2005 is changed to the closed state based on seven gaming balls having won in the first large winning opening 2005, In a big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that ten gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening 2006. Thus, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, only 7 game balls can be made to win the first big winning opening 2005 at the maximum and only winning balls for 7 winnings per round are obtained In the big hit game that controls opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006, up to 10 gaming balls can be made to win the second big winning opening 2006, and winning balls for 10 winnings per round can be won. As compared with the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing of the first jackpot 2005, the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing of the second jackpot 2006 can be expected to obtain more prize balls.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, if it is decided to be a specific 1 2R probability variation big hit, it is decided to be a 2R probability variation big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to a specific 6 8R probability variation big hit, it is an 8R probability variation big hit of the first special symbol If it is decided on the symbol and it is decided on the specific 7 10R probability variation big hit, it is decided on the 10 R probability variation hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is decided on the non specific 2 8R normal big hit, the first special symbol 8R usually Determine the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, the variation stop of the first special symbol The mode is determined to be a small hit symbol as an aspect of (step S125), and if the small hit flag is not set, it is determined to be an outlying symbol as a mode at the time of the variation stop of the first special symbol (step S126).

  And after the decision processing for the stop symbol is performed in this way, these lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach out, or out is indicated (stop symbol of the first special symbol) as processing of step S127 The judgment result notification command according to each of the lottery results is set so that the mode of (1) may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S128. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, from the received judgment result notification command to the specific 7R 10R probability variation big hit among the big hit When it is specified, it is decided to be a 10R probability variation big hit symbol (combination in which the left middle right decoration symbol becomes all the specific odd symbols (for example "7")), and the 16R probability variation is specified when the specification 8 16R probability variation big hit is specified A big hit symbol (a combination of all left and right decorative symbols becoming a specific odd symbol (for example, "7") is decided, and at the end of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command (at the end of game rendition) Display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination which becomes all the specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is the 10R probability variation big hit of the specific 7 from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the first special lottery Among the big hit due to each of the result and the second special lottery result, the number of rounds is the largest, and the winning of the 10R big hit game where the winning of the game ball to the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 is easy is decided It can be determined.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 2 4R probability variation big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If you decide to 4R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same decorative symbol of odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) and identify the specific 3 5R probability variation big hit among the big hit Is determined to be a combination of 5R probability variation big hit symbols (the combination of the same decorative symbols of odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. 4R probability variation big hit symbols in common) If you specified a big hit, it is a combination of 6R positive variation big hit symbols ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd combinations of the same decorative symbols. 4R positive variation big hit symbols and 5R positive variation big hit symbols) Determined, out of the big five of the big hit When you identify R random variation big hit, 7R probability variation big hit design (the combination of the same decorative design of odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. 4R positive variation big hit symbol, 5R positive variation big hit symbol, and If it is decided on 6R probability variation big hit symbols in common, and identifies the specific 6 8R probability variation big hits among the big wins based on the second special lottery result, 8R probability variation big hit symbols (“1”, “3”, “5” , A combination of the same odd decorative symbols of "7". 4R positive variation big hit symbol, 5R positive variation big hit symbol, 6R positive variation big hit symbol, and 7R positive variation big hit symbol (common to the symbol) and the fluctuation time specified from fluctuation pattern command The display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the time of (the end of the game effect). Thus, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. From the design, the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specific 3 5 R probability variation big hit, the specific 4 6 R probability variation big hit, the specific 5 7 R probability variation big hit, the specific 6 8 R probability variation big hit can not be discriminated either, but the second large It is possible to determine to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game which controls opening and closing the winning opening 2006.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU is specified based on the first special lottery result among the big hit from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If the 8R probability variation big hit is specified, it is decided on the 8R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6" even number) and the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit among the big hit If you specify the 8R normal big hit symbol ("2", "4", "6" even combination of the same decorative symbol. 8R positive variation big hit symbol and common) is determined from the variation pattern command At the time when the fluctuation time has elapsed (when the game effect is ended), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of “2”, “4”, and “6” of the same same decorative symbol is stopped as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, identification is performed from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 6 The 8R probability variation big hit, 8R non-specific 2R normal big hit can not be determined either, it is determined whether to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game to open and close control the first big winning opening 2005 I can not do it.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU identifies the specific 1 2R probability variation big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If you decide on a 2R probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols determined in advance among the missing symbols (separating eyes). Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of "357"), and you identify a small hit Small hit symbol (a combination of decorative symbols in the out-of-out symbol pattern (a broken line). 2R probability variation big hit symbol and common) is decided, when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (end of the game effect At the same time, the main LCD display device 1600 controls the display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbols of "357" stops fluctuating as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is the 2R probability variation big hit or small hit of the specific 1 Can not be determined, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a high probability state also after the 2R big hit game using the first big winning opening 2005 (2R big hit game in which the game ball is difficult to enter). It is not possible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end of these big hit games, in order to execute a difficult game effect to determine whether or not.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of a variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, is a disconnection with a reach when the reach is specified from the received determination result notification command. Design (a combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and if you identify an outset, a outlying design with no reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but left and right) The symbol is determined to be non-identical, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 274, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, and the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state is selected (step S142) If the small hit flag is set (step S143), select the small hit variation pattern table (not shown) according to the current gaming state (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), select a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state If the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, if the normal release (the reach effect is not performed), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of release (shown in FIG. No) is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display (step S149). In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determined in this manner, after the start of the fluctuation display of the contents of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) The information etc. which show the fluctuation time until it stops the fluctuation display of (In this case, the first special symbol) are also included. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the change pattern command set in step S149, in addition to the start of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Change of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting variable display of contents and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the game effect executed by main liquid crystal display device 1600 It is designed to identify the fluctuation time until the display is stopped. Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Thus, effect control is performed by the first special symbol display (variation display of the first special symbol) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variation display of the decoration symbol thereof) for the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern. It will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the above fluctuation It is stored in a form associated with each of the random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, as in the above-described prior determination table, the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variation random number It is set to decide. Specifically, one of 164 types of variable random numbers coincides with the judgment value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects whose jackpot expectation is low Match the judgment value (164-222) indicating that the 18 kinds of variable random numbers coincide with the judgment value (223-240) indicating that any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability is performed. As described above, the variable random numbers are associated with one another. Note that the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, next, as the processing of step S151, the fluctuation number counter that counts the fluctuation number of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after the big hit game. It is determined whether the counter value is "0". As described above, in the present example, when the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1 2R normal big hit, when executing time saving control at the time of winning, the special symbol (first The time reduction control is performed until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, 72 times), and the first special lottery result is 8R of non-specific 2 usually If it is a big hit, and time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, time reduction control until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game Do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1 2R normal big hit is finished in the big hit control processing, the number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times) according to the second special lottery result is set in the fluctuation number counter. When ending the non-specific 2 8R normal big hit, “72” times are set in the fluctuation number counter. In step S151, it is determined whether the variable display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter has been executed after the big hit game. Then, if this counter value is not "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter after the big hit game is not executed, after decrementing the fluctuation number counter (subtract 1) (step S152) Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0" (step S153). As a result, if the same counter value is "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game, the end flag indicating that is set (step S154) .

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", that is, the fluctuation of the number of times the fluctuation number counter has already been set after the big hit game caused by nonspecific 1 and nonspecific 2 If the display is being executed, or if it is determined that the fluctuation number counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, that is, the fluctuation number counter is still set after the big hit game caused by the nonspecific 1 and nonspecific 2 If the variable display of the number of times is not performed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that point. Then, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended. In addition, when executing time saving control from the end of the big hit game caused by the big hit of the specific 1 to the specific 8 until the next big hit, while setting the fluctuation number counter in the big hit control process, while setting 0 By setting the time saving flag, time saving control is continued until the next big hit.

  FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 277, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. The display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation count counter after the big hit game when the end flag is set, that is, non specific 1 and non specific 2 Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (step S185). ). As a result, after the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2, control of the low probability non-short state (normal state) will be executed .

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is to be started (step S187). The standby time until start (time to display a message to start the big hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). And while setting the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, the high probability flag is reset, the high probability flag is reset, and the time short flag is reset, the time short flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated such that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S190), this processing is ended. The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of big hit (2R positive variation big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 5R positive variation big hit, 6R positive variation big hit, 7R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit , 16R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) are prepared individually. In step S187, depending on the type of big hit (2R positive variation big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 5R positive variation big hit, 6R positive variation big hit, 7R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 10R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) Big hit start command (2R positive variable big hit start command, 4R positive variable big hit command, 5R positive variable big hit start command, 6R positive variable big hit start command, 7R positive variable big hit start command, 8R positive variable big hit start command, 10R positive variable big hit start command, 16R positive variable big hit Set start command, 2R normal big hit start command, 8R normal big hit start command). As a result, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating start of the small hit game (step S192), The standby time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying the small hit game to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated (step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and in step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game instructed by the small hit start command is the main liquid crystal It is performed by the display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 277, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initialization process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing an example of 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Control processing relating to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is serial for lamp driving board The game board side drive data for transmitting a drive signal to a drive motor for transmitting from the I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is for the game board decoration drive board The door side to transmit drive signals from serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or to an electric drive source such as the vibration generator 242 or the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3 Door side comprising drive data and lighting signals to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, door side light emission data for outputting blinking signals or gradation lighting signals Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be sent to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, or to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 Processing such as transmitting to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 from the control unit serial I / O port or outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a notice of a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) used for the lottery process related to specific notice effect described later A process of updating the value of a random number counter or the like that generates a judgment random number is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

  FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the advance notice determination process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). As shown in FIG. 279, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the predetermination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), the suspension corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the received predetermination command The prior determination information is stored in the storage area (step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the pending storage area for storing the prior determination information indicated by the prior determination command, the first pending storage area for storing the prior determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second And a second holding storage area in which prior determination information on the variation display of the special symbol is stored, and further, the first holding storage area and the second holding storage area respectively correspond to the number of holdings 1 to 4 It has one storage area. If the received prior determination command indicates the prior determination information on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the peripheral control MPU determines the prior determination in the storage region according to the number of reservations indicated by the prior determination command in the first pending storage region. The information is stored, and if the received prior determination command indicates the prior determination information on the variable display of the second special symbol, the second pending storage area is stored in the storage area according to the number of reservations indicated by the prior determination command. Stores judgment information.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a specific advance notice effect, which will be described later, is being executed (step S303), and whether or not the pending number indicated by the received prior determination command is "4" (step S304). If the specific advance notice is not being performed and the number of reservations indicated by the preliminary determination command is "4", the pending storage area storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command (variation display of the first special symbol The number of reservations "1" to "3" among the first holding storage area if it indicates the prior determination information on the 2nd, and the second holding storage area if it indicates the prior determination information on the variable display of the second special symbol. In the storage area corresponding to the pre-determination information other than outliers, specifically, the big hit 1 to big hit 12 and reach set as the pre-decision information in the pre-decision table shown in FIG. 268 (A) above Either pre-determined information-reach 4 it is determined whether or not stored (step S305).

Of the pending storage areas storing the prior determination information indicated by the prior determination command received in step S305, if any storage area corresponding to the number of pending “1” to “3” is stored prior determination information other than removal (YES in step S305), the process ends without executing the process of step S306 to step S309, that is, the lottery process of whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect. In this embodiment, a series of stories may be performed a plurality of times (three times in this example) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) as the specific advance notice effect, but may be two times or in two variable display It may be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the specific preliminary presentation effect to be separately executed and the specific preliminary announcement effect to be separately implemented to the variable display of three times. Divided into multiple predetermined (three in this example) variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed (one story is displayed per one variable display of the decorative symbol) To run). In addition, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol in a plurality of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol to execute the specific advance notice effect The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed after displaying a part of the series of stories (one part of the series of stories executed in three times). In this case, if there is a big hit, a small hit, or a variable display that will be a reach among a plurality of variable displays for performing a specific advance notice, a big hit game or a small hit game is started in the middle of a series of stories. It is impossible to execute the whole series of stories. In addition, while it does not execute when it becomes a big hit or a small hit, when it is a reach when it is to be performed to the player that it will always be out of reach if it becomes a reach during the execution of the specific advance notice effect It is realized, and even if reach production is carried out, it can not have the expectation for the big hit at all. Therefore, in this example, when the start winning is generated, the number of times that the variable display which is not accompanied by the reach is determined in advance as the variable display in which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied yet In this example, the lottery process as to whether or not the specific advance notice effect is to be executed is executed only when it is stored three times.

  In the pending storage area storing the prior determination information indicated by the prior determination command received in step S305, if any storage area corresponding to the number of pending “1” to “3” does not store any prior determination information other than removal (NO in step S305), a notice determination table according to the prior determination information is selected (step S306), and notice determination of a numerical value range (for example, 0 to 99) previously determined in the above-described random number update process (step S606) One notice determination determination random number is acquired from the random number counter for updating the random number, and the obtained notice determination determination random number is compared with the notice determination table selected in step S306 (step S307).

  In the present embodiment, the notice determination table to be compared with the notice determination random number is provided for each of the above-described prior determination information (Had, big hit 1 to big hit 12, reach 1 to reach 4), and the hit (big hit, Within the same type of prior judgment information (in this example, big hit 1 to 4 is the same big hit (specific 7, 8), big hit 5 to 8 is the same big hit (specific 2 to 6, not specified) 2) If the big hit 9 to 12 is the same kind of big hit (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hit), the level of the big hit expectation of the reach effect to be performed (in this example, the high hit is the high hit is The judgment value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect increases in proportion to specific strong SP reach 強 strong SP reach other than specific> weak SP reach> normal reach).

  In addition, in the notice determination table selected when the preliminary determination information indicates that it is not a hit and indicates a reach, the jackpot expectation of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the height of the jackpot expectation is specified The judgment value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect increases in proportion to: strong SP reach> specifically strong SP reach> weak SP reach> normal reach). On the other hand, in the notice determination table selected in the case where the preliminary determination information indicates the release, a determination value is assigned such that determination is made not to execute the specific notice effect regardless of the obtained notice determination random number.

  In this manner, the variable display after the specific advance presentation effect is performed (in the present example, when it is determined that the specific advance presentation effect is executed, three times before the variable display based on the suspension caused by the determination is started. The specific advance notice is executed over the variable display, and the variable display resulting in the execution of the specific advance notice for the fourth time is performed. The expectation for the occurrence of a big hit can be raised when the specific advance notice is performed. Moreover, since the ratio which performs specific advance notice production becomes high in proportion to the big hit expectation degree of reach production performed even if pre-judgment information is other than release, it is performed by the variable display after specific advance notice production is executed. And the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot in the variable display after the specific advance notice is performed.

  In addition, in comparison with each group of pre-decision information collected for each type of hit, the degree of advantage for the player (in this example, the degree of advantage for the player is the jackpot 1 collected for the jackpot of 7, 8 ~ 4> Specified 2-6, jackpot collected in the non-specific 2 jackpot 5-8> specified 1, non-specified 1 jackpot, in the order of the small hit 9-12 ranked in small hit) The determination value is set so that the ratio at which the specific advance notice effect is performed is high. And, because reach 1 to 4 given up by reach that is out of the game is lower in the degree of advantage to the player than pre-decision information to be hit, the ratio to execute the specific advance notice is lower than the big hit 1 to 12 The judgment value is set to. As a result, a jackpot more advantageous for the player when the specific advance notice is executed, specifically, an expectation for the occurrence of the 10R probability variation big hit if the specific advance notice is executed regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If the specific notice effect is executed for the second special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 16R probability variation big hit can be raised.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the series of stories is completed by executing the specific advance notice over a predetermined number of times (three times in this example) of variable display of the decorative symbol. It is However, in the determination as to whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect, it is intended that the specified advance notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number (in this example, one or two times) less than the number previously determined as the advance notice number. It is also possible to make a decision of (the so-called advance notice). If it is decided to carry out this Gasse notice, a series of stories will not be completed, and the specific notice effect will end, so that it will have an expectation for the big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is carried out I can not do it. Therefore, the player will play the game while wishing to be executed over the predetermined number of variable displays when the specific advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when the specific advance notice effect is executed, the specified advance notice effect may be resumed when the variation display of the next decorative symbol is started again after being ended once in the middle of a series of stories. This makes it possible to expect resumption of the specific advance notice effect even if the advance notice is executed.

  As a result of comparing the notice determination random number and the selected notice determination table, when the effect control MPU determines that the specified notice effect is to be executed (YES in step S308), the specific notice effect is being executed or the notice effect is being executed. While setting the notice flag indicating that it is set, the number of times of the specific notice effect determined is set in the notice counter, and the processing is ended (step S309). The advance notice flag is referred to in step S303 described above as to whether or not the specific advance notice effect is to be executed, and is referred to in the variable effect start process described later. If the advance notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU will If it is determined that the notice flag is set in the change effect start process described later, the process data for executing the specific notice effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the change pattern command received from the main control board 1310 Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific advance notice effect is performed. Also, if the number of times of execution of the specific advance notice effect is determined once, "1" is set in the notice counter, and if determined twice, the notice counter is set "2", and it is determined three times. If it is, set "3" in the notice counter. As a result, the specific advance notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number of times of execution of the specified advance notice effect set in the advance notice counter in step S309.

  FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 It will be done.

1. Variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed by the command analysis process (a first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation that indicates the variation pattern of the second special symbol After performing processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921 and the like based on the pattern command), the variation production start process (step S711) changes the rendering process flag to a value corresponding to the variation rendering process. )
2. The time elapsed since the control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED and the speaker 921 is started is measured, and processing is performed to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED and the speaker 921 according to the elapsed time. In-process variation production process (step S 712) that changes the rendering process flag to a value corresponding to the variation end process according to the variation time according to the pattern
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result is performed based on the reception of a symbol stop command instructing change display stop of a special symbol, and if it is an off, a value corresponding to the change process start process for the above-mentioned presentation process flag Change to a value according to the big hit rendering process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hitting production process if it is a small hit (step S713)
4. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the big hit game based on the reception of the big hit start command instructing start of the big hit game, and the above-mentioned process flag is displayed when the big hit game is ended. Big hit effect processing to change to the value according to the fluctuation effect start processing (step S714)
5. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during a small hit game on the basis of reception of a small hit start command instructing start of the small hit game, and the above described above is performed when the small hit game is ended. Small hit effect processing that changes the effect process flag to a value according to the change effect start processing (step S715)

  The main liquid crystal display synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) by the above processing. In the device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fluctuation effect start process (step S711). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variable effect start process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 281, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 first receives the fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation It is determined whether a pattern command or a second variation pattern command has been received (step S801). If the variation pattern command has been received, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

  Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU has received the first variation pattern command, the peripheral control MPU is set in step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 Based on the judgment result notification command, the above 2R probability variation big hit symbol, 8R probability variation big hit symbol, 10R probability variation big hit symbol, 8R normal big hit symbol, small hit symbol, out of design is decided either and the second fluctuation pattern command is received If it is, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol mentioned above based on the judgment result notification command sent from the main control MPU set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process not shown and mounted on the main control board 1310, 4R probability variation Big hit symbol, 5R positive variation big hit symbol, 6R positive variation big hit symbol, 7R positive variation big hit symbol, 8R positive variation big hit symbol, 16R positive variation Per symbol, 2R usually big hit symbol is determined to either the failure symbol.

  When the result of the fluctuation display of the received fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command, second fluctuation pattern command) is out, the received fluctuation pattern command is reach (in this case, the left decorative symbol and the right) When it is indicated that the decorative symbol is displayed with the same symbol as the stop symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not displayed with the stop symbol), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are made the same symbol as the missing symbol. Decide on a combination of different designs (reach out of design) different from the left and right decorative patterns only in the middle decorative pattern.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the notice flag set in the notice determination processing described above and indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed is set (step S 803). If the advance notice flag is not set, process data corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is selected (step S806), and display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

  On the other hand, if the advance notice flag indicating that the specific advance notice effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times to be executed this time among a plurality of times (three times in this example) of variable indication to execute the specific advance notice effect. The process data corresponding to the fluctuation time instructed by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected from the plurality of types of process data corresponding to (step S804), the value of the notice counter is decremented by 1 (step S805), and the selected Display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The above-mentioned notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variable display for performing the specified notice effect several times, and when it is determined to execute the specified notice effect, it is set according to the number of executions of the determined specified notice effect. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) starts the variable display where the reach is not accompanied by the reach, in other words, at least the special lottery result ( As a result of the first special lottery, when the second special lottery result) does not accompany the reach, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display where the start condition is met is satisfied. Hold shortening control is executed to shorten the fluctuation time of the variable display according to the number of non-displayed variable displays, that is, the number of reservations. More specifically, in this example, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "13 seconds" as the out-of-balance fluctuation pattern that would be accompanied by a reach without a reach, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of "8 seconds", and The main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 has the first special symbol withholding if the first special lottery result satisfies the start condition of the fluctuation display which becomes out of reach without reaching. If the number is "1" or "2", it is determined to be the out-of-out fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time "13 seconds" in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82), and the number of first special symbol to be held is "3" If there is a fluctuation time "8 seconds", it is determined to be an outlier fluctuation pattern, and if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "4", it is determined to be an outlier fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time "4 seconds". In addition, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 holds the number of reservations for the second special symbol at “1” or “1” when the second special lottery result satisfies the start condition of the variable display that results in losing without reaching. If it is 2 ", it will be determined as the outlier fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time" 13 seconds "in the second fluctuation pattern setting process not shown, and if the number of reservations of the second special symbol is" 3 "it will be out of fluctuation time" 8 seconds " The fluctuation pattern is determined, and if the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "4", it is determined to be the outlying fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time "4 seconds".

  In addition, as described above, in the case of a plurality of variable display of the decorative symbol performing the specific notice effect, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol is reduced to reduce the edge of the main liquid crystal display 1600 (for example, the upper left end) May be displayed on the)) after displaying a part of a series of stories (one for a series of stories executed in three times), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed Therefore, if the period of the story displayed in one time of the variable display among the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol for executing a series of stories as the specific advance notice effect is held constant, the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed and 1 The fluctuation time is shorter than the period of the story displayed in the variable display, and it is not possible to display all the stories, or the story period displayed in one variable display is shortened. And by making the fluctuation time shorter than the period of the story displayed in one variable display even if the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed, decoration is displayed after the story displayed in one variable display is displayed. A wasteful period occurs before the stop symbol of the symbol is displayed, which causes a problem of boring a player or the like.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, one variation display is performed so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control for each of the variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols for executing a series of stories as specific notice effects. The period of the story to be provided is equipped with multiple types of process data. That is, of the variation displays of the decorative symbol performed multiple times (three times in this example) for executing a series of stories as the specific advance notice effect, the variation time “8 seconds” as the story for which the number of notices is displayed in the first variation display. The process data corresponding to “4 seconds” and the process data corresponding to “4 seconds” correspond to the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time “13 seconds” and “8 seconds” as the story to be displayed in the second variable display. Process data corresponding to "13 seconds" and the process data corresponding to "8 seconds" as a story to be displayed in the third variable display with the process data corresponding to "4 seconds" and the process data corresponding to "4 seconds" It comprises data and process data corresponding to "4 seconds". In step S804, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of notices. In the example described above, when the first variable display is started among the plurality of variable displays of the specific advance notice effect, the number of holdings is always 3 or more, and the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed, “4 seconds”, Alternatively, although only the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of “eight seconds” is shown, among the plural fluctuation displays of the specific advance notice effect, “four seconds” and “eight seconds” as the first fluctuation display. Not only the process data corresponding to one fluctuation time but also the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of “13 seconds” may be provided. That is, in the case where the specific advance notice effect can be executed even when the number of reservations is 3 or less in step S304 of the above-mentioned advance notice determination processing, the first variable display among the multiple change displays of the specified advance notice effect Because the number of reservations becomes 2 or less when starting the operation and the above-mentioned shortening shortening control is not executed, it may be decided as the fluctuation time of “13 seconds”, in this case, the fluctuation time of “13 seconds” The process data corresponding to may be selected, and the first change display may be executed among the plurality of change displays of the specific advance notice effect, or the start condition of the change display other than the change display for which the start condition is satisfied. When the fluctuation shortening control is to be executed only when the number of fluctuation displays for which the above is not established is “4”, when the first fluctuation display is started among the plurality of fluctuation displays of the specific advance notice effect No more than 3 pending on In some cases, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" is selected and the specific notice effect is performed multiple times, since the reduction time may be determined to be the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" without being executed. The first variable display may be executed among the variable displays of the above.

  In addition, although it is comprised so that the same story may be displayed by multiple types of process data corresponding to the same notice frequency, according to the period of fluctuation time, the effect content (image and explanation) is simplified or more The fluctuation time and the presentation period are matched by in detail. In addition, when process data corresponding to the same fluctuation time is selected by the number of consecutive notices, each story is smoothly connected, of course, even when process data corresponding to different fluctuation time is selected. Each process data is configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the person. This makes it possible to execute a series of stories without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU discards the prior determination information stored in the first storage area among the pending storage areas for storing the prior determination information in step S302 of the above-mentioned advance notice determination processing in response to the received fluctuation pattern command. The prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored in the pending storage area by moving it to the N−1th (N = 2 to 4) storage area The prior determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first change pattern command has been received, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The stored prior determination information is moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area, and if the second variation pattern command is received, the first storage area of the second reserved storage areas is moved. Discard the prior determination information stored in the file and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) th storage area Let

  Then, the peripheral control MPU ends this process when updating the above-mentioned effect control process flag so that the process is shifted to the process during variable effect (step S 712) (step S 813).

  FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fluctuation effect end process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the change effect end process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 282, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs the change effect start process (step S711). The stop symbol determined in step S802 of the is fixedly displayed (a state in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle and right are completely stopped and displayed) (step S851).

  Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 has received a big hit start command notifying that the big hit game is to be started from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S 852), When the effect control process flag described above is updated so that the process is shifted to the jackpot effect process (step S714) (step S853), this process ends.

  In addition, if the small hit start command for notifying start of the small hit game is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit rendering process (step S715). When the effect control process flag described above is updated so as to be performed (step S855), this process is ended.

  If neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), the above-mentioned advance notice flag is set (step S856) Whether the above notice counter is “0”, that is, all of the multiple (three in this example) variable displays for executing the specified notice effect have been executed (the remaining number of specified notice effects is “0”) (Step S857), and if all of the multiple (three in this example) variable display for executing the specific advance notice effect are executed, the fore flag is reset (step S858). When the effect control process flag described above is updated so that the process is shifted to the fluctuation effect start process (step S711) (step S859), this process ends.

[Specific notice production summary]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device corresponds to the variable display of a series of stories as a special notice effect for a plurality of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) multiple times (three times in this example) The display is divided into a plurality of times (three times in this example) of the decorative symbol executed at 1600 and executed. However, the period for executing a series of stories as the specific advance notice effect is not constant, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-described hold shortening control. In this embodiment, even if the period for executing a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect is changed (shortened) by hold shortening control, these series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It is supposed to be. That is, the same story can be displayed in each of a plurality of fluctuation times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the suspension shortening control in the same number of notices in a series of stories executed as specific notice effects. The process data is configured in accordance with the period of fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time and the demonstration time are matched by simplifying the presentation contents or making it more detailed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when the number of notices is the third (in the present example, the last change display of the specific notice effect), when the number of reservations for which the change time is 4 seconds is one or two, If the main LCD display 1600 displays an explanation such as “A group of people will attack such a person,” but if the number of reservations is 13 and the fluctuation time is 13 seconds, “We will make the talent bloom. A description that "who will be attacked by A" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, and a longer explanation will be given as the fluctuation time is longer. Moreover, in addition to the explanation by such characters, compared with the case where the number of reservations for which the variation time is 4 seconds is one or two, the number for which the variation time is 13 seconds is four more Images are to be displayed. As such, the longer the fluctuation time, the more detailed the details of the effect, and the more information the player can obtain. In addition, the explanation has been made that the details of the effect become more detailed as the fluctuation time becomes longer, but depending on the effect added by this fluctuation time, the expectation for the hold that caused the execution of the specific advance notice is suggested You may do it. For example, by preparing a plurality of (for example, white, blue, red) character colors of "flowering of talent" in FIG. 283, it is possible to see with expectation in the specific preview effect itself.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the specific advance notice is being executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first starting opening 2002, the variation display of the second special symbol starts when the starting winning at the second starting opening 2004 occurs. If it is not possible to match the period of the story to be executed in a single variable display among the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol to be executed as a specific advance presentation effect, and the change time, or as a specific advance presentation effect As a variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that it is not possible to execute the variable display which has caused the execution of the specific advance notice effect. Therefore, in this example, when the specific advance notice effect is being executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start opening 2002, it is before the variable display according to the number of times of execution of the specific advance notice effect Also, when the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs, the specific advance notice effect is ended. Specifically, although not shown, when the advance notice flag is set in step S 803 of the variation effect start process, the advance notice flag is set due to the start winning at the first starting opening 2002 It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 when it is set due to the start winning to the first start opening 2002 relates to the second special symbol ( If it is the second change pattern command), the above-mentioned advance notice flag is reset, and the specific advance notice effect is ended before the change display according to the number of times of execution determined by proceeding to step S806. On the other hand, when the specific advance notice effect based on the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed in step S803, the specific notice based on the occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, if the variation pattern command determined to be received in step S801 relates to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific advance notice effect is continued The process proceeds to step S804.

  In this manner, the player is made to feel uncomfortable by reliably matching the period of the story to be executed in one time of the variable display among the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol executed as the specific advance notice effect. In order to be able to execute the fluctuation display which led to execution of the specified advance notice effect as the fluctuation display immediately after displaying a series of stories over a plurality of times of fluctuation displays as the specified notice effect while suppressing There is. It should be noted that the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning on the second start port 2004 does not execute the specific advance notice, and the specific advance presentation only on the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning on the first start port 2002. May be implemented. That is, if the prior determination command received in step S301 of the above-mentioned preliminary notice determination processing is based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004, the processes from step S302 to step S309, that is, the specific preliminary announcement effect is executed. It is also possible not to execute the specific advance notice effect based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start port 2004 by ending the processing without executing the lottery processing of whether or not.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the specific advance notice effect is being executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start opening 2002, it is before the variable display according to the number of times of the specific advance notice effect is executed. Even when the start winning combination to the second starting opening 2004 occurs, it shows what ends the specific advance notice effect, but it is not limited to this, for example, based on the starting winning combination to the second starting opening 2004 In the case of starting the change display of the decorative symbol, the specific advance notice effect is temporarily suspended, and the specific advance notice effect is resumed based on the end of the change display of the decoration symbol based on the start winning at the second starting port 2004. It is also good. Also, in this case, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like displays that the specific advance notice is being interrupted ("notice effect is suspended") while the decorative symbol is fluctuatingly displayed based on the start winning to the second start opening 2004 You may do it. In addition, even when the specific advance notice effect is temporarily interrupted when starting the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the start winning combination to the second starting opening 2004, the second special based on the starting winning combination to the second start opening 2004 When the lottery result is a big hit, the process may be ended without restarting the specific advance notice effect.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a story that is completed in three episodes is executed so as to be displayed one story at a time in one variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as a specific advance notice effect. The player can pay attention to the number of the story being executed because it is possible to impress the next variable display to be performed by executing all three episodes of the specific advance notice effect. . Therefore, in the present example, when the specific advance notice effect is being executed, the number of the story being executed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 is displayed (for example, "the third episode", etc.) .

  In the embodiment described above, a series of stories are divided into a plurality of variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to a plurality of variable display of the special symbol as the specific notice effect. However, in the multiple variation display (so-called pseudo continuous variation) of the decorative symbol performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the single variable display of the special symbol, a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect It may be made to be able to divide and carry out to a plurality of variable displays of this decorative symbol.

  Also, in this example, the specific advance notice can be performed only when the number of reservations is "4" which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in step S304 of the above-described advance notice determination process. However, even if the number of reservations is not the maximum value, it may be possible to execute the specific advance notice, in which case the number of times of execution of the specific announcement provided is determined not to exceed the number of reservations May be For example, when the start winning prize for the first starting opening 2002 occurs with the number of reservations for the first special symbol being "2", the variation display based on the starting winning prize generated this time is excluded as the number of executions of the specific advance notice effect The number of times may not be exceeded. In addition, the probability that it is determined to execute the specific advance notice effect may be changed according to the hold number, for example, if the hold number is the maximum value, the specific notice effect is executed rather than the case where the hold number is not the maximum value Then, the probability of being determined may be increased.

  In addition, as described above, a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays that are not accompanied by a reach. The variable display without this reach is usually the most frequently performed fluctuation pattern, and is the one that the player can not most expect against the big hit. In this example, by executing the specific advance notice effect over the variable display without the reach, even if the variable display where the player can not most expect against the big hit is performed, the expectation for the big hit is It can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the specific advance notice effect is executed, the variable display in which a series of stories are executed always becomes out of place, and in the change display immediately after the completion of this series of stories (the change display resulting in the execution of the specific advance notice effect) The chance of a big hit is high. That is, the player can make the player guess that the result of the variable display will be lost in the three variable displays in which a series of stories are executed as a specific advance notice effect, and the variable display immediately after the series is completed (specified While the occurrence of a big hit can be expected for the variable display executed immediately after finishing the advance presentation, the excessive expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be suppressed in the three variable displays for executing a series of stories.

  Further, in the variable display immediately after execution of the series of stories as the above-mentioned specific advance notice effect (the fluctuation display that is the cause of execution of the specified advance notice effect), an effect associated with the series of stories executed as the specified advance notice effect is executed. You may do so. In this way, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the execution of the specific advance presentation effect in conjunction with a plurality of variable display executions that execute the specific advance presentation effect, and the cause of executing the specific advance presentation effect from the start of execution of a series of stories It is possible to execute the related effects over a long period of time until the variable display becomes to gradually increase the player's expectation for the jackpot.

  The story to be executed in one variable display among the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol for executing a series of stories as the above-mentioned specific advance notice effect is changed according to the number of reservations when the variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to impart new game characteristics such as adjusting the hitting of the game ball by aiming for a change in the number of holdings in order to see all the stories different for each number of holdings. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning prize at the first starting opening 2002 and the starting winning prize at the second starting opening 2004. The greater the number of start winnings on the first starting opening 2002 and the number of starting winnings on the second starting opening 2004, the more advantageous the player is. In pachinko machine 1 where such a game is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as a specific advance notice effect for the player whose degree of advantage is reduced by stopping the hitting of the game ball when the specified advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the jackpot by suppressing the deterioration of the player's emotion caused by the decrease in the degree of advantage.

Seventh Embodiment
[Monochrome notice production]
A modification of the sixth embodiment described above will be described below as a seventh embodiment. First, in the seventh embodiment, until the number of reservations based on the prior determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is digested, the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the suspension (variation display of the special symbol) is performed. Every time it is executed, monochrome preview production of whether the preview production made to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes from color to monochrome (black and white) is executed, and the final hold is digested Also before, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by monochrome notice effect, the variation display (variation display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol based on the final hold is executed At the same time, the effect of entering the monochrome mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. This monochrome advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the monochrome advance notice execution process executed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 285 is a region occupation pattern determination table used to determine the region occupation pattern in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. FIG. 286 is an example showing a region for causing advance notice to appear in the display region of the main liquid crystal display device in execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. FIG. 287 and FIG. 288 are examples of effects when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S 602), first, the number of reservations based on the advance determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is digested. If it is decided to execute monochrome advance notice over a plurality of times during the variable display of the decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols), and if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice, the result of the monochrome advance announcement Control to determine whether to enter the black and white mode. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermination command has been transmitted from main control board 1310 based on the game ball having won in first start port 2002 or second start port 2004 (start condition established). (Step S1300). If it is determined in step S1300 that a preliminary determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome advance notice execution flag described later is set (step S1301). Then, if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (YES), all variation patterns for the already suspended portion are “normal” except for the suspension based on the new winning combination. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is "variation" (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1300 that the hold number command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 (NO), or if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag is not set (NO), It transfers to step S1308.

  It should be noted that based on the fact that the main control board 1310 transmits a priori determination command based on the game ball winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), based on the winning. Pre-determination information on suspension (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, the reach production as a game effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or a small hit If it is possible to specify or specify the type of game effect to be executed, etc., and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the predetermination command, it takes until it settles the hold based on the winning, The prior determination information specified from the prior determination command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when it is specified that it is classified as "prevention" as the prior determination information, the fluctuation pattern executed in the hold does not form reach as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (executes the reach effect ), It is determined that it is a change pattern of "normal change" in which it is set to stop and display the lost symbol, and "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "as a prior decision information When it is identified that it is classified into any of “reach 4”, the fluctuation pattern executed in the hold forms reach as a fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and executes the reach effect, and the jackpot symbol ( In particular, it is a variation pattern of "reach fluctuation" in which it is set that the stop display of "big hit 1"-"big hit 12" or the lost design ("reach 1"-"reach 4") is set. It can be. Then, in step S1302, by specifying the type of fluctuation pattern based on the prior determination information stored in the RAM of peripheral control board 1510, all of the fluctuation patterns for the amount already reserved are "normal fluctuation". It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern of

  In addition, if it is determined in step S1302 that all of the fluctuation patterns of the already suspended portion are the fluctuation patterns of the “normal fluctuation” (YES), except for the suspension based on the new winning combination (YES), the prior judgment A monochrome advance notice determination table (not shown) used to decide whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect until the pending number based on the command is digested is selected (step S1303). Then, the selected monochrome advance notice determination table is compared with the monochrome advance decision determination random number read out from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and it is determined whether or not the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (step S1304). Specifically, if the monochrome advance notice determination random number matches the determination value set in the monochrome advance notice determination table, it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (YES in step S1304), and if it does not match. It is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is not to be executed (NO in step S1304). In addition, in the monochrome advance notice determination table, the monochrome advance notice effect according to whether the fluctuation pattern of the suspension based on the new winning is the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. It is determined whether or not to execute the command, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the probability of judging that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" It is set to. However, in the monochrome advance notice determination table, whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect depending on whether the lottery result for the suspension based on the new winning combination is a big hit (or a small hit) or a loss. In the case of a big hit (or a small hit), it may be set such that the probability of performing monochrome advance notice effect is higher than in the case of a loss.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that a monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (YES), any one of a plurality of area occupancy patterns is used as a table corresponding to the number of reservations specified from the prior determination command. An area occupancy pattern determination table (FIG. 285) used to make the determination is selected (step S1305). In this area occupation pattern, the announcement effect is made to appear in any area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 each time the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is executed during the execution of the monochrome announcement effect. It is set whether or not to change the appearing advance notice effect from color to monochrome (black and white). Then, the area occupancy pattern determination table selected according to the hold number command is compared with the area occupancy pattern determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine the type of the area occupancy pattern (step S1306). If it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed, a monochrome advance notice execution flag indicating that the monochrome advance notice effect is being executed is set and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1307).

  On the other hand, except for the suspension based on the new winning in step S1302, one of the fluctuation patterns of the already suspended minute is not the fluctuation pattern of the “normal fluctuation” (the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” is included If it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is not to be performed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1308 without executing the monochrome advance notice effect. As described above, only when it is determined in step S1302 that all of the fluctuation patterns of the already held fluctuation patterns are “normal fluctuation” fluctuation patterns, except for the suspension based on the new winning combination, the monochrome advance notice effect Although it is not possible to reach even the reach in the variation display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern of the “normal variation” by making it possible to carry out the “normal variation”, the expectation of becoming a big hit can not be raised. By executing the monochrome advance notice effect for the fluctuation pattern of "", there is a possibility that the black-and-white mode described later may enter, and the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode can be increased. It is possible to eliminate the tediousness of being

  The area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a table corresponding to the number of reservations specified from the prior determination command, and one of a plurality of types of area occupancy patterns It is a table used to determine an occupancy pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (A), the area occupancy pattern 1 is used as an area occupancy pattern determination table to be used when suspension is added based on a new winning when the number of reservations is 1. As shown in FIG. 285 (B), the table is provided with a table in which 4 is set, and an area occupancy pattern determination table used when a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 2. A table in which area occupation patterns 1 to 18 are set is provided, and an area occupation pattern determination table to be used when suspension is added based on a new winning when the number of reservations is 3, FIG. 285 (C). As shown in the table, a table in which area occupation patterns 1 to 39 are set is provided.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed each time the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is executed during execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. It is set in which area of the area the advance notice effect is to appear and whether or not to change the appeared advance notice effect from color to monochrome (black and white). More specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), while one pending object is being digested, a notice effect is given to each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), it is set to appear, and the two liquid crystal display devices 1600 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are notified of each while the two holdings already held are digested In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), effects are set up to appear stepwise, and while the three reservations already suspended are being digested, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. The preview effects are set to appear in stages in each area.

  In addition, when the area occupancy pattern is determined, the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect (the hold that is determined to execute the monochrome advance notice effect when the hold is added based on the new winning) The area occupancy pattern that can be determined from the area occupancy pattern determination table is different depending on whether the fluctuation pattern of is the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” It has become. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), in the case of the variation pattern of “normal variation”, one of the region occupancy patterns 1 and 2 is determined, and the variation of “reach variation” In the case of a pattern, one of the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4 is determined. Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 10 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” In this case, one of the area occupation patterns 11 to 18 is determined. Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 22 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” In this case, one of the area occupation patterns 23 to 39 is determined.

  As described above, when the change pattern of the suspension causing the monochrome advance notice effect is the “normal change” fluctuation pattern, it is before the suspension triggered by the execution of the monochrome advance effect is digested. While the advance notice effect appears in each area of the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific effect (in this example, a point for the advance notice effect for a part or all of the advance notice effect made to appear) A part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome by preventing the stick from stabbing effect) and not changing some or all of the displayed preview effects from color to monochrome (black and white) It is not intended to be occupied by the notice effect of. In other words, by executing the cast of the monochrome advance notice effect, it does not actually enter the black and white mode while giving hope to enter the black and white mode.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of the "reach fluctuation", the main operation is performed before the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice is digested. A notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick pierces the notice effect) is executed for all the notice effects made to appear. At the same time, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect by changing the color of all the preview effects made to appear from color to monochrome (black and white). I am trying to plunge into the mode. That is, by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when entering the black and white mode, the reach is always formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reach effect is executed, so that the expectation of becoming a big hit can be enhanced. It has become. When a specific effect is executed on all of the notice effects made to appear in the respective display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect of the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is always monochrome. Because it is always occupied by and the black-and-white mode is always entered, it can be made to pay attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed when the advance notice effect appears. On the other hand, when the cast of the monochrome advance notice effect is executed, the black and white mode is not entered, and the reach is not formed as the variation display of the decorative pattern which is not the black and white mode (the reach effect is not executed), We can not increase our jackpot expectation. That is, when entering into the black and white mode, it is a state that suggests that the expectation of becoming a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and when not entering the black and white mode, the expectation of becoming a big hit (big hit expectation) is low. It can be said that it is a state that suggests Further, in the monochrome preview effect, the preview effects appear in stages in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but by changing the appeared preview effects from color to monochrome (black and white) The advance notice effect of monochrome is gradually occupied in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the wider the area occupied by the advance notice effect of monochrome, the whole display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is By approaching the state occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering into the black and white mode. Also, when the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect made to appear is displayed in color as the notice effect appears in a wider area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By changing to monochrome (black and white), it is possible for the wide area to be occupied by the monochrome preview effect, and when the wide area is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Since it approaches the state where the entire display area is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering the black and white mode.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the main liquid crystal display is displayed when a portion of the already held pending is digested except for the pending triggered execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. There is an area occupancy pattern set in the display area of the device 1600 so as not to appear in the advance presentation effect. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), in the area occupancy patterns 1, 2, 11, 12, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. , 23 to 30, even if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect may appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the first hold that is already put on hold is digested. Instead, the advance notice effect is set to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the next hold that has already been held is digested. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupancy patterns 3, 4 and 17 to 22 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. A preview effect is made to appear in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 before the last pending hold is digested, and when the last held pending is digested. The preview effect is set so as not to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to know when the monochrome preview effect is started and when it is finished with respect to the suspension that has already been suspended, so it is possible to always play the game with the expectation that the monochrome preview effect will be executed. It can be done.

  By the way, in the area occupation pattern, an area where the advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is divided into four equal parts, the upper part of the display area is the area A, the left of the display area is the area B, the lower part of the display area is the area C, the display area The right side of is set to the area D. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is equally divided, but may not be equally divided, and a part or all of the areas for causing the advance notice to appear is set to overlap, respectively. It may be

  Further, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance notice effect appears in a partial area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the next hold after the next hold is digested When being played, a new preview effect is set to appear in an area different from the area where the preview effect has already appeared. Then, until the notice effect occupies the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, new notice effect is set to appear stepwise in the area not occupied by the notice effect. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), after the advance effect appears in the area C in the area occupancy pattern 31, when the second pending pending is digested, The preview effect is made to appear in the area D different from C, and the preview effect appears in the areas A, B different from the areas C, D when the third hold that is already suspended is digested. It is like that. As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new preliminary announcement effect appears in an area different from the area occupied by the preliminary announcement effect, so that the new preliminary announcement effect can be easily recognized. Even if various types of preliminary effects appear at the same time, it is difficult for the player to miss any of the preliminary effects. In addition, by enabling the preliminary announcement effect to gradually appear in the area not occupied by the preliminary announcement effect until the preliminary announcement effect occupies the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As long as there is a region not occupied by the preview effect, whether or not a new preview effect appears (a specific effect for the preview effect made the appearance (in this example, the point bar pierces against the preview effect In response to the execution of the staging effect, by changing the appearing prior presentation effect from color to monochrome (black and white), it is determined whether the area where the prior presentation effect appears is occupied by the preview effect of monochrome). It has become possible to bring attention.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance effect appears in a partial area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the next or subsequent hold pending is digested. The preview effect may be set to appear so as to include a part of the area where the preview effect has already appeared. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), after the advance notice effect appears in any of the areas B, C, and D in the area occupancy patterns 37 to 39, the third one already reserved. When the hold is digested, the notice effect is made to appear on the entire screen of the display area so that the areas B, C, and D are included.

  Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table, no advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (this example) is applied to the entire screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect does not appear. Then, an area occupancy pattern (for example, area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)) is set in which an effect in which a point stick pierces the entire screen (background image) is executed. . In such an area occupancy pattern, no advance notice effect appears in the areas A, B, C, and D, and a background image is displayed over the entire display area. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick sticks to a background image), it becomes possible for the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be occupied by a monochrome background image. ing. When the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image, the black and white mode is entered as in the case of being occupied by the monochrome preview effect. For this reason, when the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation of becoming a big hit can not be enhanced, but there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed in reverse. , Can increase expectations to rush into black and white mode. Further, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a specific effect is executed on the notice effect having the appearance (for example, an area in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A) The notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 than the occupancy pattern 4), and the specific effect is executed on the entire screen (background image) in which the notice effect does not appear. As a trigger, the case where the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by a monochrome background image (for example, the area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)) is executed. Although the probability is low, the probability of becoming a big hit after the entry of the black and white mode is high. That is, in the case of a big hit, no advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the full screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect is not appeared. The probability of determining the area occupation pattern in which the specific effect is executed is high. For this reason, even if no advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, there is a probability that a big hit will occur when the specific effect is executed by turning around (when the black and white mode is entered). It is possible to maintain high, big-hit expectations.

  Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table, an area occupancy pattern (for example, an area occupancy shown in FIG. 285 (A)) where advance notice effects appear in each of the areas A, B, C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The area occupation pattern 4) in the pattern determination table is included. In the area occupation pattern in which the notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one or more notice effects appear for the areas A, B, C, and D. And, even though it is a variable display of a single decorative symbol, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick is pierced for the advance effect) for all of the advance effects made to have appeared, It is possible for the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be occupied by monochrome preview effects. When one advance notice effect appears on the areas A, B, C, D (full screen) of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the areas A, B, C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , D (full screen) than when multiple advance notice effects appear, the probability of becoming a big hit after entering the black and white mode is higher, and the expectation of becoming the big hit is further raised when entering the black and white mode It is possible to

  Next, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process, until the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested, step S1306 each time the start condition regarding the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is satisfied. The type of the notice effect to be made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 determined as the area occupying pattern of the monochrome advance notice effect is determined in When occupied by the preview effect, control is made to enter the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome preview effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition regarding the change display of the decoration symbol (the change display of the special symbol) (step S1308). If it is determined in step S1308 that a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (step S1309). If the change start command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1308 (NO), and if the monochrome advance notice execution flag is not set in step S1309 (NO), the monochrome advance notice execution processing is ended.

  Also, if the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set in step S1309 (YES), the main control board 1310 is changed based on the start condition regarding the change display of the decoration symbol (the change display of the special symbol). By transmitting the start command, it is determined whether or not the hold that has triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested (step S1310). If it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is not digested (NO), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is selected based on the area occupancy pattern determined in step S1306. In the display area, the area corresponding to the remaining number of reservations until the suspension which is the trigger for execution of the monochrome preview effect is digested is determined as the area for causing the preview effect to appear, and the type of preview effect to be displayed in that area is A notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) used to determine the set notice effect pattern is selected. In this advance notice effect pattern, one or more types of advance notice effects are set so that the area determined as the area occupation pattern can be occupied. Then, based on the area determined as the area occupation pattern and the type of fluctuation pattern for the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice pattern determination table is selected, and the selected notice effect pattern decision table is selected. Are compared with the notice effect pattern determination random numbers read out from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of notice effect effect for occupying the area determined as the area occupation pattern (notice effect pattern) is determined (step S1311). Here, it is before the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested, and the variation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, so that the decoration is made based on the variation pattern of “normal variation”. While the variable display of the symbol is executed, the type of the notice effect determined in step S1311 is made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while the variable display of such a decorative symbol is executed. The effect is executed (step S1312).

  The notice effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a table corresponding to the area determined as the area occupation pattern, and the notice effect pattern in which the type of the notice effect to be displayed in the area is set. Is a table used to determine the Specifically, a table in which a notice effect capable of occupying the area A is set as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is provided, and a table in which a notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set as a notice effect pattern determination table to be used when the notice effect appears in the area B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A table provided with a notice effect capable of occupying the area C is provided as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The preview effect putter used when the advance effect appears in the area D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a decision table, announcement attraction that can be occupied it is set tables is provided a region D.

  In addition, when the notice effect appears across a plurality of areas such as the area A and the area B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect capable of occupying both the area A and the area B Alternatively, a notice effect pattern determination table is provided in which a combination of a notice effect capable of occupying the area A and a notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set. That is, the advance notice effect at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect only needs to occupy the area determined as the area occupation pattern, and is a combination of the advance notice effect appearing across a plurality of areas and a plurality of advance notice effects It may be.

  Here, the advance notice that can be made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is similarly the main liquid crystal display other than at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. It is possible to make it appear in a part or all of the display area of the device 1600. As described above, it is determined whether to perform each of a plurality of types of preview effects based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not to be a big hit and whether to perform reach effects other than at the time of executing the monochrome advance effects. Depending on the type of the announcement effect, there is a high-predictive notice effect that is a big hit, and a low-predictive notice effect that is a big hit, and when a high-predictive effect that is a big hit appears, the big hit Will be able to increase their expectations.

  Then, when determining the type of preview effect to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 when executing the monochrome preview effect, the preview with a low expectation of becoming a big hit other than the time of executing monochrome preview effect. I try to determine the production with high probability. As a result, even if a low-announcement low-announcement announcement with a big hit appears except when the monochrome announcement effect is executed, the high-peak expectation can not be enhanced, but a low-ocket announcement with a low hit expectation appears. After that, when the announcement effect made to appear has changed from color to monochrome (black and white), it can be determined that it is executed as part of the monochrome announcement effect, not just the announcement effect, and the expectation of becoming a big hit Even if a low preview effect appears, it is possible to increase the expectation that the monochrome preview effect will be performed.

  In addition, when the type of preview rendering to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311 is determined during execution of the monochrome preview rendering, the variation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview rendering is Depending on whether it is a variation pattern of "normal variation" or a variation pattern of "reach variation", the probability of determining a high-predictive announcement effect with a high probability of becoming a big hit other than when the monochrome advance announcement effect is executed differs I have to. Specifically, when the change pattern of the suspension causing the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the change pattern of the "reach change", the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is more than that of the "normal change" change pattern It is intended to determine with high probability the high-announcement notice effects that are expected to be a big hit other than time. As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", since the black and white mode is entered, the jackpot of the expectation of becoming a big hit After a high preview effect appears, when the released preview effect changes from color to monochrome (black and white), the probability of entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome preview effect increases, and the expectation of entering the black and white mode is Will be able to enhance.

  In addition, at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, the fluctuation pattern for the hold triggered execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is “ Among the fluctuation patterns of "reach fluctuation", depending on whether it is a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with high expectation that is a big hit, or a fluctuation pattern that performs reach effect with a low degree of expectation that is a big hit. The probability of determining a high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit other than at the time of execution of the advance effect is made different. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect with a high expectation of becoming a big hit among the fluctuation patterns of “reach fluctuation” (for example, Of the "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "reach 4" as the pre-judgment information, "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit 7", "big hit 8", "big hit 11", When it is a fluctuation pattern that performs reach presentation with a low degree of expectation that becomes a big hit, when it is specified that it is classified as any of “big hit 12”, “reach 3”, “reach 4” For example, of the "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" and "reach 1" to "reach 4" as the prior determination information, "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5", "big hit 6", "big hit 9" ","Big Higher than expected when the black and white notice effect is performed but is more likely to be a big hit than when it is specified that it is classified as any of “10”, “reach 1”, “reach 2”) It is made to decide with high probability. For this reason, when the high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and the black-and-white mode is entered, the high-predictive notice to be a big hit is changed from color to monochrome (black and white) Because of the change, the probability of executing a reach presentation with a high expectation of becoming a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than the case of entering the black and white mode, and a high hitting expectation can be enhanced.

  When the type of preview effect to be made to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311 is determined at the time of execution of the monochrome preview effect, the lottery result for the suspension causing the execution of the monochrome preview effect is a big hit Depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss, it may be determined according to whether it is a loss or a loss, and according to whether it is a loss or a loss, a high-preceding notice effect with high expectation of becoming a big hit other than at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect The probability of determining may be different. Specifically, when the lottery result for the suspension which triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is a big hit, the notice effect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit other than when the monochrome advance effect is executed than when it is lost May be determined with high probability. Even in such a case, if the high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white), the high-predictive notice effect to be a big hit is from color to monochrome By changing to (black and white), the probability of becoming a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when entering the black and white mode, and it is possible to increase the jackpot expectation.

  Further, at the time of execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, as the advance notice effect to be displayed in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, step-up advance notice effect can also be used. With the step-up notice effect, effect images corresponding to each of a plurality of steps are provided, and based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not to be a big hit, and whether or not reach effect is performed, from the first step among the plurality of steps It is an effect which makes an effect image corresponding to a predetermined stage appear one by one. Further, in the step-up notice effect, the higher the predetermined level is, the higher the expectation for becoming a big hit is set. Then, each of the effect image corresponding to the first step, the effect image corresponding to the second step, the effect image corresponding to the third step, and the effect image corresponding to the fourth step among the plurality of steps, for example, the main liquid crystal display The display area of the device 1600 is made to appear in the area A, the area B, the area C, and the area D, and the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the notice effect as the step-up notice effect progresses. The area is increased.

  In the case where the above step-up notice effect is used, an effect image corresponding to the first step among a plurality of steps, an effect image corresponding to the second step, an effect image corresponding to the third step, and a fourth step are supported. Each of the effect images is caused to appear, for example, in area A, area A, B, area A, B, C, area A, B, C, D in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and step up When the stage of the preliminary rendering has progressed, by displaying the effect image in an area larger than the area before the stage proceeds, the area occupied by the preliminary rendering in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is increased. You may In addition, when the first step of the step-up notice effect is started, the effect image is made to appear in the area A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when proceeding to the second step, the area A to the area B The effect image is enlarged, and when advancing to the third stage, the effect image is expanded from the area A, B to the area C, and when advancing to the fourth step, the effect image is extended to the areas A, B, C, D When the stage of the step advance notice production progresses by expanding the area where the notice image of the notice effect is displayed, the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is increased. You may do it. In addition, even if the stage of the step-up notice effect has progressed, if the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 does not increase, the step is achieved by increasing the probability of becoming a big hit. As well as whether or not the stage of the advance presentation proceeds, attention can be paid to whether the area occupied by the advance presentation increases.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice production is digested (YES), the main processing is performed before the hold triggered by the execution of the monochrome advance notice production is digested, When all of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, an effect of entering the monochrome mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. When the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not partially or entirely occupied by the monochrome preview effect (it was a cast of monochrome preview effect), the main liquid crystal display device without entering the monochrome mode An effect of setting the background image in the display area 1600 as color and maintaining the background image at the normal time is executed (step S1313). Also, if it is determined that the hold that has triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is digested, the monochrome advance notice execution flag is reset and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1314).

  As described above, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set to monochrome and the black-and-white mode is entered when the black-and-white mode is entered. If not, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is colored, and the number of colors of the background image is different, as in the background image in the normal mode (other than the black and white mode). In this way, when entering the monochrome mode by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, a reach is necessarily formed as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the monochrome mode, and the reach effect is executed, so a big hit is made. Although the expectation can be raised, the background image becomes monochrome, and the number of colors of the background image is smaller than that at the normal time, so that the player can be given an impression different from that at the normal time, resulting in a big hit. It can be combined with expectations to increase expectations. In addition, when entering the black and white mode, the background image becomes monochrome, but on the front of the background image, as in the normal case, make it appear after fluctuating display of the decorative pattern or after entering the black and white mode By displaying in color the images of the preview effects that can be played, it is possible to make the images related to the lottery results contrast with the background image. That is, when the image enters the black-and-white mode, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the image related to the lottery result, and when the image of the variation display of the decorative symbol appears or the image of the notice effect appears, On the other hand, the player can be made to pay more attention than usual. On the other hand, when the black and white mode is not entered, the reach is not formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol (the reach effect is not performed), and it is impossible to increase the expectation of becoming a big hit. For this reason, when it does not enter into the black and white mode, it can not be expected in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and since the probability of appearance of the image of the preliminary effect is low, it can not be expected in the preliminary effect but It becomes a color, and the number of colors of the background image is larger than that in the black and white mode, so that the player can be given a lively impression even without the appearance of the notice effect image etc. It can be reduced.

  A specific rendering example of the monochrome preview effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. In FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, when the number of reservations is 2, the variation pattern for the suspension added based on the new winning (retention triggered by the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) is the variation pattern of “reach variation” (Classified as any of "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" and "reach 1" to "reach 4" as prior determination information), and the 2 o'clock held area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B) The case of using the area occupancy pattern 15 is shown. In the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock of the hold, while the first hold that has already been held is digested, the notice effect is produced in the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is set to appear, and while the second hold that has already been held is digested, a notice effect is set to appear in areas C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. There is.

  First, as shown in FIG. 287 (A), when the hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 2, the first hold that has already been held is digested. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 287 (B), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold. A preview effect across A and B appears. Specifically, as a preview effect over the areas A and B, an effect is performed that a person who is playing mahjong discards the mahjong roar and yells at "This is how it is!". At this time, during the execution of the preview effect across the areas A and B, as shown in FIG. 287 (C), an effect (specific effect) in which a point rod of mahjong is pierced against the appearing preview effect is performed By doing this, the appearing preview effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, in the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, areas A and B will continue to be occupied by the monochrome preview effect, and as shown in FIG. 287 (D), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol of "153"). With regard to the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is prevented that the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes difficult to visually recognize by maintaining the color tone.

  Then, before the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 287 (E), the character “black and white chance!” Is in the approximate center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The small and light gray level is displayed, and the mah-jongg point bars appear on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the notice effect across the areas A and B is simple. It can be recognized that the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect has been started, not the advance notice effect (the advance notice effect other than the monochrome advance notice effect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (F), the next hold (the second hold that has already been held when the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is added) is digested, In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again. At this time, the mah-jongg point bars appearing on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 scatter outside the area of the display area. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 287 (G), based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold, an area in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 A preview effect across C and D appears. Specifically, as a preliminary effect across areas C and D, an effect is performed in which a person who is playing mahjong shouts "Can win!" While looking at the mahjong pot. At this time, during the execution of the preview effect across the areas C and D, as shown in FIG. 287 (H), an effect (specific effect) in which a point rod of mahjong is pierced for the preview effect appearing is performed By doing this, the appearing preview effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As described above, the advance notice effect of monochrome occupies not only the regions A and B but also the regions C and D among the display regions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby all the display regions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The area is occupied by the monochrome announcement effect. Note that, in the case of a monochrome notice effect, the point bar does not stick to the notice effects appearing across the areas C and D, and a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is not occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it does not enter the monochrome mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (I), the text "B & W mode standby" is displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect. It can be recognized that it is foreshadowed. Then, as shown in FIG. 288 (J), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol of “153”). Then, before the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 288 (K), the character “B & W mode entry” is in the approximate center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By being displayed in a large size and in a darker and darker manner, it is possible to clearly recognize that the next time when the decorative symbol is displayed, the black and white mode will be entered as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (L), the next hold (the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) is digested, so that in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It will be started again. At this time, the background image becomes monochrome by entering the black and white mode in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the game is performed by giving an impression different from the color which is the background image in the normal mode other than the black and white mode. Meet the expectations of Then, when the black-and-white mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 288 (M), based on the fluctuation pattern of the suspension causing the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect being the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”, Since a reach (in the present example, a “7” symbol) is formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol and the reach effect is performed thereafter, the expectation of becoming a big hit can be enhanced. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol (in this example, the middle symbol of "7" in this example), and when the lottery result is a loss, the variation of the decorative symbol The display will be stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the middle symbol other than "7").

  In addition, before and after the point bar of the mahjong is pierced against the preview effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appearing preview effect is displayed in color to monochrome (black and white (black and white The image itself, such as a character depicted as a preview effect, does not change. The data for specifying the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the data for specifying the color arrangement of the depiction are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, but in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect Data designating coordinate positions of depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be commonly used, and an increase in the amount of data stored in the ROM of the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be prevented.

  Also, when the point bar of the mahjong sticks to the preview effect appearing in a part or the whole of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the area is occupied by the preview effect of monochrome. The ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be indicated. For example, when the preview effect of monochrome occupies the areas A and B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 (may be the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600) By displaying “50%” as a percentage of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect, the percentage of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect and the percentage of the remaining area that the monochrome preview effect must occupy Can be clearly recognized. When displaying the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the monochrome preview effect occupies a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In such a case, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can also be focused on, and the player can take a process until the monochrome preview effect is occupied. Can be viewed safely.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the variation display of the decorative symbol entering the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect is the target of the black and white mode, and the variation display of the decoration symbol entering the black and white mode ends. The black-and-white mode is also finished, but the black-and-white mode is continued not only for the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern that has entered the black-and-white mode but also for the fluctuation display of several decoration patterns after entering the black-and-white mode May be For example, even when the suspension is interrupted, the black and white mode may be continued until the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times. As described above, when the monochrome mode is continued over a plurality of times of variation display of the decorative symbol after entering the monochrome mode, even if the big hit is not obtained in the variation display of the ornamental symbol entering the black and white mode, By continuing the black-and-white mode, the expectation of becoming a big hit can be maintained by the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol from the next time onwards.

  In the above description, when the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, the black and white mode is entered from the start of the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol. It is not limited. For example, monochrome preview effects are executed in one or more times of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by monochrome preview effects, that is, monochrome preview effects In the variation display of the decoration symbol at the time when the Occupied, the black and white mode is entered, and when the black and white mode is entered, the reach is formed (the reach effect is executed) in the variation display of the decoration symbol. The expectation of becoming a big hit can be heightened also for the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern at the time when the advance notice effect is occupied. Further, for example, among the preview effects that can be made to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation for becoming a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 ( In the case where a specific high-expected advance notice effect displayed on the entire screen appears, the point region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed in all areas when the point bar of mahjong is stuck for the specific high-expected notice effect. By entering the black and white mode by being occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering the black and white mode even when the hold is not stored.

  The present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, although the game machine to which the pachinko machine 1 is applied is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the second special symbol is not limited to the one that is displayed with priority, and up to eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which are held, in the order in which the hold occurs. The present invention is applicable even to a gaming machine of the type (settling hold) that starts at (the order of occurrence of starting winnings to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004).

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 1st starting opening 2101a always winning opening 2101b special opening winning opening 2102 2nd starting opening 2111 Movable piece 2301 Common figure gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying predetermined symbol information;
Lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of the start condition after the start condition is established;
A fluctuation period determination unit that determines a fluctuation period of the symbol information variably displayed on the display unit when the win lottery is performed by the lottery unit;
Display control means for causing the symbol information to be stopped and displayed in a mode according to the lottery result of the lottery means after variably displaying the symbol information over the fluctuation period determined by the fluctuation period determination means;
Shortening control means for executing shortening control for shortening the fluctuation period more than usual on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined shortening condition;
First shortening termination means capable of terminating the shortening control being executed by the shortening control means based on satisfaction of a first termination condition determined in advance;
And second shortening termination means capable of terminating the shortening control being executed by the shortening control means based on the satisfaction of a second termination condition different from the first termination condition;
The second shortening end means ends the shortening control being executed by the shortening control means triggered by the start of the variable display which causes the failed mode to be stopped and displayed as a mode according to the lottery result of the lottery means. A gaming machine characterized by gaining.